http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/api.php?action=feedcontributions&user=Fabcam1&feedformat=atomBend-Tech 7x Wiki - User contributions [en]2024-03-28T11:41:00ZUser contributionsMediaWiki 1.30.2http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Bend-Tech_Dragon_-_A400_Series&diff=9857Bend-Tech Dragon - A400 Series2022-11-17T16:14:49Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Dragon A400 Rack and Pinion Information<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
'''Dragon A400 Assembly Manual'''<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/access.php?doc=a400assembly Dragon A400 R&P Assembly Manual]<br />
*[https://bend-tech.com/files/access.php?doc=a400coolingassembly Dragon Material Coolant System Assembly Manual]<br />
'''Maintenance and Troubleshooting'''<br />
*[https://bend-tech.com/files/Dragon_MaintenanceGuide_v02.pdf Dragon Maintenance Guide]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/Dragon_TroubleshootingGuide_v02.pdf Dragon Troubleshooting Guide]<br />
|<br />
'''Dragon A400 Startup Manual'''<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/access.php?doc=a400manualp1 Safety and Maintenance]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/access.php?doc=a400manualp2 Machine Overview, Inspection, and Startup]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/access.php?doc=a400manualp3 Torch Mount, Software Overview, and Side Offsets]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_plasma_cutting_guide_rp_v3.pdf Plasma Cutting Guide]<br />
|<br />
'''Dragon CAM Operator's Manual'''<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/DragonCAM_OperatorsManual_v04_Part1.pdf Libraries, Settings, Backup & Restore]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/DragonCAM_OperatorsManual_v04_Part2.pdf Dragon CAM Overview]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/DragonCAM_OperatorsManual_v04_Part3.pdf Tutorials & Calibration]<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Dragon A400 Belt Driven Information<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
'''Dragon A400 w/ Drive Belt Assembly Manual'''<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/A400_Rack_Pinion_Assembly_Manual/a400_assembly_manual_v5.pdf Dragon A400 Belt Driven Assembly Manual]<br />
'''Dragon A400 w/ Old Style Actuators'''<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/a_and_z_motor_actuator_maintenance_guide.pdf A and Z Axis Actuator Maintenance Guide]<br />
|<br />
'''Dragon A400 w/ Drive Belt Startup Manual'''<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_startup_manual_part1_v4.pdf Safety and Maintenance]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_startup_manual_part2_v4.pdf Machine Startup and Walkthrough]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_startup_manual_part3_v4.pdf Torch Mount and Software Overview]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_startup_manual_part4_v4.pdf Side Offsets, Angle, Channel & Calibration]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_plasma_cutting_guide_v3.pdf Plasma Cutting Guide]<br />
|<br />
'''Dragon A400 w/ Drive Belt Troubleshooting'''<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_troubleshooting_v3 Maintenance and Troubleshooting]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/y_motor_mounting_bracket_installation.pdf Y-Motor Mounting Bracket Installation]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/x_motor_set_screw_adjustment_guide.pdf X-Motor Set Screw Adjustment Guide]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/pulley_spacing_and_belt_tension_guide.pdf Pulley Spacing and Belt Tension Guide]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/power_switch_replacement_guide.pdf Power Switch Replacement Guide]<br />
|<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Additional Documents<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
'''Misc. Machine Information'''<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_powered_gate_retrofit_guide_v4.pdf Powered Gate Retrofit Guide]<br />
*[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/dragon_optimization_guide.pdf Dragon Optimization Guide]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/footprint_a400_coolant.pdf A400 Footprint with Coolant System]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/dragon_preventative_maint.html Dragon Preventative Maintenance]<br />
|<br />
'''Misc. Information'''<br />
*[[A400 Ethernet Connection Scenarios|Ethernet Connection Scenarios]]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/machine_control_connection_guide.pdf Machine Control Connection Guide]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/lifter_station_adjustment_guide.pdf Lifter Station Adjustment Guide]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/grounding_with_dielectric_grease.pdf Grounding with Dielectric Grease]<br />
|<br />
'''Die Calibration & Rotation'''<br />
*[[Dragon Die Calibration]]<br />
*[[Dragon Rotation Calibration]]<br />
'''Software Plugin Information'''<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/design_transfer_software_tekla_v4.pdf Tekla Design Transfer Tool]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/design_transfer_sds2_v4.pdf SDS2 Design Transfer Tool]<br />
|<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Operations<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Drag_Launcher.png|link=Bend-Tech Launcher|40px]] '''[[Bend-Tech Launcher]]''' || [[File:BT_Product_Dragon1.png|link=Dragon Guide|40px]] '''[[Dragon Guide]]'''|| [[File:BT_Product_Dragon_Options.png|link=Dragon Options|40px]] '''[[Dragon Options]]''' || [[File:Dragon-Tips_&_Hints1.png|40px|link=DragonA400 Tips & Hints|Dragon Tips & Hints]] '''[[DragonA400 Tips & Hints|Dragon Tips & Hints]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Tekla_Import_Icon1.png|40px|link=Tekla Import Guide]] '''[[Tekla Import Guide]]''' || [[File:CAD_2_CAM1.png|40px|link=CAD to CAM Part Transfer]] '''[[CAD to CAM Part Transfer]]''' || [[File:Dynatorch_Guide1.png|40px|link=Dynatorch Dragon Guide]] '''[[Dynatorch Dragon Guide]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Tutorials<br />
|-<br />
|[[File:dragon_straight_tut2.png|40px|link=Dragon Straight Part Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Straight Part Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_bent_tut2.png|40px|link=Dragon Bent Part Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Bent Part Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_cust_design_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Custom Design Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Custom Design Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_nesting_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Nesting Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Nesting Tutorial]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:dragon_diamond_notch_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Diamond Notch Bridging Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Diamond Notch Bridging Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_plunge_holes_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Plunge Holes Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Plunge Holes Tutorial]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Video Tutorials<br />
|-<br />
|[[File:Dragon_tut_icon1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vd7Ie84tjZM&]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vd7Ie84tjZM Dragon Parts to Dragon Machine Tutorial]''' || [[File:Dragon_tut_icon2.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h6Dd46GK7wE]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h6Dd46GK7wE Assembly to Dragon Machine Tutorial]''' || [[File:IND_tut_icon1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b7kK7WUMKpM]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b7kK7WUMKpM Industrial Tutorial 1 - Import to Machine]''' || [[File:IND_tut_icon2.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q-1wpELF3Dw]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q-1wpELF3Dw Industrial Tutorial 2 - Design to Machine]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Dragon_S&T_Tut1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Pr0-D2EZL2g]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Pr0-D2EZL2g Dragon Slot and Tab Tutorial]'''</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Bend-Tech_Dragon_-_A400_Series&diff=9856Bend-Tech Dragon - A400 Series2022-11-17T15:54:08Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Dragon A400 Rack and Pinion Information<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
'''Dragon A400 Assembly Manual'''<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/access.php?doc=a400assembly Dragon A400 R&P Assembly Manual]<br />
*[https://bend-tech.com/files/access.php?doc=a400coolingassembly Dragon Material Coolant System Assembly Manual]<br />
'''Maintenance and Troubleshooting'''<br />
*[https://bend-tech.com/files/Dragon_MaintenanceGuide_v02.pdf Dragon Maintenance Guide]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/Dragon_TroubleshootingGuide_v02.pdf Dragon Troubleshooting Guide]<br />
|<br />
'''Dragon A400 Startup Manual'''<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/access.php?doc=a400manualp1 Safety and Maintenance]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/access.php?doc=a400manualp2 Machine Overview, Inspection, and Startup]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/access.php?doc=a400manualp3 Torch Mount, Software Overview, and Side Offsets]<br />
|<br />
'''Dragon CAM Operator's Manual'''<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/DragonCAM_OperatorsManual_v04_Part1.pdf Libraries, Settings, Backup & Restore]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/DragonCAM_OperatorsManual_v04_Part2.pdf Dragon CAM Overview]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/DragonCAM_OperatorsManual_v04_Part3.pdf Tutorials & Calibration]<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Dragon A400 Belt Driven Information<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
'''Dragon A400 w/ Drive Belt Assembly Manual'''<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/A400_Rack_Pinion_Assembly_Manual/a400_assembly_manual_v5.pdf Dragon A400 Belt Driven Assembly Manual]<br />
'''Dragon A400 w/ Old Style Actuators'''<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/a_and_z_motor_actuator_maintenance_guide.pdf A and Z Axis Actuator Maintenance Guide]<br />
|<br />
'''Dragon A400 w/ Drive Belt Startup Manual'''<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_startup_manual_part1_v4.pdf Safety and Maintenance]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_startup_manual_part2_v4.pdf Machine Startup and Walkthrough]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_startup_manual_part3_v4.pdf Torch Mount and Software Overview]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_startup_manual_part4_v4.pdf Side Offsets, Angle, Channel & Calibration]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_plasma_cutting_guide_v3.pdf Plasma Cutting Guide]<br />
|<br />
'''Dragon A400 w/ Drive Belt Troubleshooting'''<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_troubleshooting_v3 Maintenance and Troubleshooting]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/y_motor_mounting_bracket_installation.pdf Y-Motor Mounting Bracket Installation]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/x_motor_set_screw_adjustment_guide.pdf X-Motor Set Screw Adjustment Guide]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/pulley_spacing_and_belt_tension_guide.pdf Pulley Spacing and Belt Tension Guide]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/power_switch_replacement_guide.pdf Power Switch Replacement Guide]<br />
|<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Additional Documents<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
'''Misc. Machine Information'''<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_powered_gate_retrofit_guide_v4.pdf Powered Gate Retrofit Guide]<br />
*[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/dragon_optimization_guide.pdf Dragon Optimization Guide]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/footprint_a400_coolant.pdf A400 Footprint with Coolant System]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/dragon_preventative_maint.html Dragon Preventative Maintenance]<br />
|<br />
'''Misc. Information'''<br />
*[[A400 Ethernet Connection Scenarios|Ethernet Connection Scenarios]]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/machine_control_connection_guide.pdf Machine Control Connection Guide]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/lifter_station_adjustment_guide.pdf Lifter Station Adjustment Guide]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/grounding_with_dielectric_grease.pdf Grounding with Dielectric Grease]<br />
|<br />
'''Die Calibration & Rotation'''<br />
*[[Dragon Die Calibration]]<br />
*[[Dragon Rotation Calibration]]<br />
'''Software Plugin Information'''<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/design_transfer_software_tekla_v4.pdf Tekla Design Transfer Tool]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/design_transfer_sds2_v4.pdf SDS2 Design Transfer Tool]<br />
|<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Operations<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Drag_Launcher.png|link=Bend-Tech Launcher|40px]] '''[[Bend-Tech Launcher]]''' || [[File:BT_Product_Dragon1.png|link=Dragon Guide|40px]] '''[[Dragon Guide]]'''|| [[File:BT_Product_Dragon_Options.png|link=Dragon Options|40px]] '''[[Dragon Options]]''' || [[File:Dragon-Tips_&_Hints1.png|40px|link=DragonA400 Tips & Hints|Dragon Tips & Hints]] '''[[DragonA400 Tips & Hints|Dragon Tips & Hints]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Tekla_Import_Icon1.png|40px|link=Tekla Import Guide]] '''[[Tekla Import Guide]]''' || [[File:CAD_2_CAM1.png|40px|link=CAD to CAM Part Transfer]] '''[[CAD to CAM Part Transfer]]''' || [[File:Dynatorch_Guide1.png|40px|link=Dynatorch Dragon Guide]] '''[[Dynatorch Dragon Guide]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Tutorials<br />
|-<br />
|[[File:dragon_straight_tut2.png|40px|link=Dragon Straight Part Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Straight Part Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_bent_tut2.png|40px|link=Dragon Bent Part Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Bent Part Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_cust_design_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Custom Design Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Custom Design Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_nesting_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Nesting Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Nesting Tutorial]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:dragon_diamond_notch_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Diamond Notch Bridging Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Diamond Notch Bridging Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_plunge_holes_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Plunge Holes Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Plunge Holes Tutorial]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Video Tutorials<br />
|-<br />
|[[File:Dragon_tut_icon1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vd7Ie84tjZM&]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vd7Ie84tjZM Dragon Parts to Dragon Machine Tutorial]''' || [[File:Dragon_tut_icon2.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h6Dd46GK7wE]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h6Dd46GK7wE Assembly to Dragon Machine Tutorial]''' || [[File:IND_tut_icon1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b7kK7WUMKpM]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b7kK7WUMKpM Industrial Tutorial 1 - Import to Machine]''' || [[File:IND_tut_icon2.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q-1wpELF3Dw]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q-1wpELF3Dw Industrial Tutorial 2 - Design to Machine]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Dragon_S&T_Tut1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Pr0-D2EZL2g]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Pr0-D2EZL2g Dragon Slot and Tab Tutorial]'''</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Dragon_Material_Settings&diff=9853Dragon Material Settings2022-01-19T19:58:01Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''The Dragon Material Settings page is meant to show the user how the Dragon machine reacts to your different material and tooling settings. These are general guidelines meant to give you understanding about your material machine settings and how they operate both within the software and in the practical application of the Dragon machine.'''<br />
<br />
<br />
===Material Machine Settings Video===<br />
'''[https://youtu.be/q9D4oRMRbxo Standard Material Machine Settings]'''<br />
<br />
===Hypertherm Manual Links===<br />
'''[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/hypertherm_powermax_45_owners_manual.pdf Hypertherm Powermax 45 Manual]'''<br />
<br />
'''[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/hypertherm_powermax_45_xp_owners_manual.pdf Hypertherm Powermax 45 XP Manual]'''<br />
<br />
'''[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/hypertherm_powermax_65-85_owners_manual.pdf Hypertherm Powermax 65-85 Manual]'''<br />
<br />
'''[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/mrt_-_duramax_retrofit_for_1000-1250-1650.pdf MRT Duramax Retrofit for Powermax 1000-1250-1650 Manual]'''<br />
<br />
'''[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/mrt2_-_duramax_retrofit_for_600-800-900-max42-max43.pdf MRT2 Duramax Retrofit for Powermax 600-800-900-MAX42-MAX43 Manual]'''<br />
<br />
<br />
*To access the Material Settings, first select the '''[[Tube/Pipe Library]]''' from the Dragon '''[[Task Menu]] Screen'''.<br />
<br />
==General==<br />
[[File:Drag_Tube_General_Tab1.png|right]]<br />
===Material Properties===<br />
[[File:Drag_Tube_General_Tab2.png]]<br />
<br />
====Material Name:====<br />
*This title will be used to refer to the material throughout the software. It is recommended to give each a unique, descriptive name to more easily identify each material. <br />
<br />
====Weight (per inch):====<br />
*The weight of the material per unit can be supplied here. This value is completely optional, but it will be used to calculate the total weight of the part in the part designer interfaces above the results table.<br />
<br />
====Color:====<br />
*The color of the material can be chosen using the Color button. [[File:Color_button.png]] This color will be used to shade the material in various areas throughout the software. <br />
<br />
====Unit of Measure:====<br />
*Parts can be measured in either inches or millimeters.<br />
<br />
===Select Shape:===<br />
*Tube material can be either Round, Square, or Rectangle. If you have our newest capabilities, you can also choose L-Channel (Angle Iron) or U-Channel.<br />
<br />
====Wall Thickness, Diameter, and Height:====<br />
*Depending on the type of material chosen, there will be different dimensions that will need to be supplied. If the material is round or square, the wall thickness and diameter measurements will be required. These values will be entered into the fields on the material diagram. If the material is rectangular, the wall thickness, diameter/width, and height will need to be provided. Note: The diameter/width and height of all materials are measured from the outside edges.<br />
<br />
[[File:Mat_lib_1.png]][[File:Mat_lib_2.png]]<br />
<br />
==Machine Settings==<br />
[[File:Drag_Machine_Settings3.png|right]]<br />
===Basic Settings===<br />
[[File:Drag_Tube_Basic_Settings1.png]]<br />
<div style="font-size:12pt;color:#d50000;"><br />
-Typical Settings-<br />
</div><br />
====Kerf Width:====<br />
*This is the size (width) of the cutting path determined by your plasma torch. This is generally between 0.05 and 0.06 depending on your plasma torch settings and type of torch you own. Consumables that you're using and amperage can change this number considerably, so we suggest a test in order to measure the exact width.<br />
<br />
====Cutting Overlap:====<br />
*This is the amount of under travel or over travel that a cut profile will perform. This can be changed under certain circumstances. One of which would be in order to leave a certain amount of material attaching your stock tube to the cut part in order to break it off after the cut is performed.<br />
<br />
====Web Spacing:====<br />
*This is the amount of material selected to be left between any nested parts. We recommend to set this number to 0.5 to indicate that a half of an inch will be left between these parts. This will help accommodate for lead-ins and lead-outs that may require this extra space.<br />
<br />
====Default Length:====<br />
*This section indicates your default stock length of tubing typically associated with this material. Every time you select this material, your stock length of tubing in your nesting projects will default to this number. This will be input in the unit type specified in the '''General''' tab for this material.<br />
<br />
====Edge Cut Offset:====<br />
*'''For l-channel (angle iron) and u-channel only''', this will be the distance beyond the edge of the material the lead in/out will extend when performing edge cuts.<br />
<br />
====Chuck Grip:====<br />
*This setting is used to indicate whether or not you will be using the pass-through of the chuck for this material or if it will require the use of the steps on the chuck jaws. Indicating the use of any other option except for the pass-through, the software will adjust loading, flipping, repositioning, and dead zone locations based on the chuck grip selected.<br />
<br />
[[File:Question_Mark_Picture1.png]]<br />
<br />
*Click on the question mark icon in the software to see an image of the different steps on the chuck to help you determine what will be needed for the selected material.<br />
<br />
[[File:Question_Mark_Picture2.png]]<br />
<br />
===Tool Heights===<br />
[[File:Drag_Height_Offsets1.png]]<br />
<div style="font-size:12pt;color:#d50000;"><br />
-Typical Settings-<br />
</div><br />
====Cutting Height:====<br />
*This is the number indicating how far off the tubing the torch head will be located during cutting. This height depends on the model of torch you have as well as the material thickness. ''Refer to your hypertherm manual for an exact height. Links to manuals are located at the top of this page.''<br />
<br />
====Marking Height:====<br />
*This number is meant to adjust the calibration values correlated to the height the marker head. (Example) If the tubing was entered as 1.75 OD, but the actual OD is 1.74, then you may enter a -.01 in this field in order to compensate for the difference in tube diameter when marking. '''This value should almost always be set to 0.'''<br />
<br />
====Engraving Height:====<br />
*This number is meant to adjust the calibration values correlated to the height the engraver head. (Example) If the tubing was entered as 1.75 OD, but the actual OD is 1.74, then you may enter a -.01 in this field in order to compensate for the difference in tube diameter when engraving. '''This value should almost always be set to 0.'''<br />
<br />
====Pierce Height:====<br />
*This number will indicate the distance that the torch will be placed off of the tubing during the piercing process of a cut. This is always 2 1/2 times the cutting height. ''Refer to your hypertherm manual for an exact height. Links to manuals are located at the top of this page.''<br />
<br />
===Support Lifter Gap:===<br />
'''Not available on the Dragon A150 Series.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Material_Drag_Lifter_Gap1.png]]<br />
<br />
*This is the gap amount desired from the current lifter height. To allow for an element of '''increased sag''' in the material, '''enter a positive distance value'''. To '''reduce sag''' in the material, '''enter a negative value'''.<br />
<br />
*Lifter 1 (B): is your standard lifter station provided with the Dragon A400 machine. Lifter 2(C): is for use if you've purchased, or designed an additional lifter station.<br />
<br />
===Corner Rotation Ext===<br />
<br />
'''*For square or rectangle material only'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Corner_Rotation_Ext1.png]]<br />
<br />
*The '''[[Corner Rotation Extension]]''' is a distance entered by the user that will cause the material to rotate before the corner radius of the material itself. This is used in cases where the wall thickness is wider than that of the extension of the corner radius on a square or rectangle material. Click the blue lettering for a visual representation of how this works.<br />
<br />
===Feed Rates===<br />
[[File:Drag_Material_Feed_RAtes1.png]]<br />
<div style="font-size:12pt;color:#d50000;"><br />
-Typical Settings-<br />
</div><br />
====Cutting Feed Rate:====<br />
*This setting determines the rate at which the machine's torch moves in the act of performing a cut. ''These feed rates are dependent on your particular torch and thickness of material, so be sure to check your Hypertherm manual for exact cutting feed rates. Links to manuals are located at the top of this page.''<br />
<br />
====Engraving Feed Rate:====<br />
*This is the rate at which your engraver travels along the tube. This should be set to '''30 inches per minute''' to ensure consistent engraving.<br />
<br />
====Marking Feed Rate:====<br />
*This is the rate at which the marker travels along the tubing. This can remain at '''100 inches per minute''' to ensure a smooth line with the marker.<br />
<br />
====Rotation Speeds:====<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Rotation_Speeds1.png]]<br />
<br />
*This '''Rotation Speeds''' setting sets the rate at which the chuck rotates during functions in a shift. This should be lowered with heavier, large OD material or in the case that you're using square or rectangle material with sharp corners. A lower rotational speed ensures that the rotational motor will not move too quickly and over-step the steps in the motor.<br />
<br />
====Machine Acceleration:====<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Acceleration_Speeds1.png]]<br />
<br />
*'''Travel (X):''' The value entered here will set the acceleration for the X-axis when running jobs using this material. A lower value should be used with larger, heavier OD tubing/pipe. As an example: A typical value which could be all encompassing would be '5-10'. This would be applicable to up to 6" tubing with a 0.25" wall thickness. Many smaller OD tubing/pipe (0.75 - 1.25 OD) may allow for this value to be around '35'. Set this value to zero to apply the default located in the Factory Settings of the Machine Library (Default is 35).<br />
<br />
*'''Rotation (Y):''' The value entered here will set the acceleration for the Y-axis when running jobs using this material. A lower value should be used with larger, heavier OD tubing/pipe. As an example: A typical value would be around '5' considering it will allow the material a smoother rotational ramp up and ramp down action. The lower the number, the longer the rotational axis takes to reach it's maximum cutting speed. Set this value to zero to apply the default located in the Factory Settings of the Machine Library (Default is 1: This value is indicating a 100% of normal value using a specific formula for determining Y-axis acceleration).<br />
<br />
===Misc Settings===<br />
<br />
====Use Bridge Cutting====<br />
*When this check box in checked, any newly made nest with this material will automatically keep the torch firing as it moves from the end cut of the previous part to the start cut of the next part.<br />
<br />
====Disable Lifter Station====<br />
'''Not available on the Dragon A150 Series.'''<br />
<br />
*When this check box is checked, the lifter station will be ignored in any new project with this material when it is sent to the Dragon machine. The lifter will not require a homing sequence, nor will it be used during the run.<br />
<br />
==Lead In/Out Defaults==<br />
[[File:Drag_Lead_In_Out_Default_Settings1.png|right]]<br />
===End Cut Profile Lead Defaults===<br />
*These settings are completely user specified and can vary based on the user's preference.<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Ignite_Settings1.png]]<br />
<div style="font-size:12pt;color:#d50000;"><br />
-Suggested Settings-<br />
</div><br />
===Lead In Type:===<br />
*This is where the user will select the type of lead-in ignite type that will be set to this material by default. '''Arc with Angle''' is a preferred method. This means that the torch will initiate its cut into the material at an angle which will ease into an arc and then to the intended cut profile. This is a smooth ignite type and leaves little chance for error.<br />
<br />
====Length/Distance:====<br />
*This is the length of the line that eases into the actual cut profile. We can keep this relatively short. We recommend '''.125''' in most cases.<br />
<br />
====Dwell Time(sec):====<br />
*This indicates how long the torch will remain on one place during the pierce. This can differ based on your torch and material type and thickness. ''Refer to your hypertherm manual for an exact time. Links to manuals are located at the top of this page.''<br />
<br />
====Angle/Sweep:====<br />
*This will be the angle at which the initial cut eases into the intended cut. We recommend a '''45''' degree angle for the ignite cut.<br />
<br />
====Radius:====<br />
*This is where the user will enter the radius of the arc that channels into the cut profile. We recommend keeping this at around '''.125''' as a preference.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Extinguish_Settings1.png]]<br />
<div style="font-size:12pt;color:#d50000;"><br />
-Suggested Settings-<br />
</div><br />
===Lead Out Type:===<br />
*This is where the user will select the type of lead-out extinguish type that will be set to this material by default. '''Perpendicular''' is a preferred method. This means that the torch will extinguish its cut at a perpendicular angle after the cut profile has been performed. This is a extinguish type that leaves the cut profile smoothly at a 90 degree angle.<br />
<br />
====Length/Distance:====<br />
*This is the length of the line that eases out of the cut profile. We can keep this relatively short. We recommend '''.125''' in most cases.<br />
<br />
====Dwell Time(sec):====<br />
*This indicates how long the torch will remain on one place during the extinguishing stage of the torch. This can be set to '''0'''.<br />
<br />
====Angle/Sweep:====<br />
*Opposite of the ignite type section, this will be the angle at which the cut eases out of the intended cut. This will be greyed out when the perpendicular extinguish type is set as a default.<br />
<br />
====Radius:====<br />
*This is where the user will enter the radius of the arc that channels out of the cut profile. This will be greyed out when the perpendicular extinguish type is set as a default.<br />
<br />
===Internal Cut Lead Defaults===<br />
*'''All other cut lead defaults can be set like the original cut lead defaults. These are meant for all cuts other that the start and end cuts of a part.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Default_Ignite_And_Extinguish_Settings1.png]]<br />
<br />
==NRC Settings==<br />
[[File:Drag_NRC_Settings1.png|right]]<br />
===Input Values===<br />
*With NRC cutting, the further from the centerline you're cutting, the thicker the material is. '''This grid allows you to make fine tuning adjustments.''' With the default first line in the example to the right, the entire cut will have a feed rate of 35 inches per minute (ipm) and a height of .06 and a thickness of 0.12. If you find that when it gets thicker it's not cutting all the way through, then you would add an entry so that when it gets to that thickness, it will slow down or cut at a different height. In the picture shown, when the thickness of the tube is .13 or greater, the feed rate will slow down by 10(making it 25), and the height will not change. When the thickness is .15 or greater, it slows down the feed rate by 15(making it 20) and lowers the cut height -.01(making it .05).<br />
<br />
*Inputted values will include the top line indicating your initial '''Thickness, Feed Rate and Cut Height''' and adjustments in feed rates and cut heights based on the thickness you're encountering throughout the duration of the cut. These will be inputted with (+ and -) signs to indicate the adjustment that is to be preformed.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
==Pricing==<br />
[[File:Drag_Pricing_Settings1.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
==Advanced==<br />
[[File:Drag_Adv_Settings1.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
===Polyline Resolutions:===<br />
[[File:Drag_Tube_General_Tab3.png]]<br />
<br />
====Max Length:====<br />
*This is where the user will enter the maximum length for each segment in a polyline. A segment will be ignored if it is longer than this value. If the segment is shorter, it may be combined with an adjacent segment to create a single segment.<br />
<br />
====Max Angle:====<br />
*This is where the user will enter the maximum angle between two segments in a polyline. If the angle is smaller than this value, the two segments may be combined to create a single segment.<br />
<br />
====Max Offset:====<br />
*This is where the user will enter the maximum boundary offset for a polyline. If the combination of two line segments breaches the boundary defined by this value, the features will not be combined.</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Dragon_Material_Settings&diff=9852Dragon Material Settings2022-01-19T19:56:40Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''The Dragon Material Settings page is meant to show the user how the Dragon machine reacts to your different material and tooling settings. These are general guidelines meant to give you understanding about your material machine settings and how they operate both within the software and in the practical application of the Dragon machine.'''<br />
<br />
<br />
===Material Machine Settings Video===<br />
'''[https://youtu.be/q9D4oRMRbxo Standard Material Machine Settings]'''<br />
<br />
===Hypertherm Manual Links===<br />
'''[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/hypertherm_powermax_45_owners_manual.pdf Hypertherm Powermax 45 Manual]'''<br />
<br />
'''[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/hypertherm_powermax_45_xp_owners_manual.pdf Hypertherm Powermax 45 XP Manual]'''<br />
<br />
'''[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/hypertherm_powermax_65-85_owners_manual.pdf Hypertherm Powermax 65-85 Manual]'''<br />
<br />
'''[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/mrt_-_duramax_retrofit_for_1000-1250-1650.pdf MRT Duramax Retrofit for Powermax 1000-1250-1650 Manual]'''<br />
<br />
'''[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/mrt2_-_duramax_retrofit_for_600-800-900-max42-max43.pdf MRT2 Duramax Retrofit for Powermax 600-800-900-MAX42-MAX43 Manual]'''<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Tube_General_Tab1.png|center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
*To access the Material Settings, first select the '''[[Tube/Pipe Library]]''' from the Dragon '''[[Task Menu]] Screen'''.<br />
<br />
==General==<br />
[[File:Drag_Tube_General_sTab1.png|right]]<br />
===Material Properties===<br />
[[File:Drag_Tube_General_Tab2.png]]<br />
<br />
====Material Name:====<br />
*This title will be used to refer to the material throughout the software. It is recommended to give each a unique, descriptive name to more easily identify each material. <br />
<br />
====Weight (per inch):====<br />
*The weight of the material per unit can be supplied here. This value is completely optional, but it will be used to calculate the total weight of the part in the part designer interfaces above the results table.<br />
<br />
====Color:====<br />
*The color of the material can be chosen using the Color button. [[File:Color_button.png]] This color will be used to shade the material in various areas throughout the software. <br />
<br />
====Unit of Measure:====<br />
*Parts can be measured in either inches or millimeters.<br />
<br />
===Select Shape:===<br />
*Tube material can be either Round, Square, or Rectangle. If you have our newest capabilities, you can also choose L-Channel (Angle Iron) or U-Channel.<br />
<br />
====Wall Thickness, Diameter, and Height:====<br />
*Depending on the type of material chosen, there will be different dimensions that will need to be supplied. If the material is round or square, the wall thickness and diameter measurements will be required. These values will be entered into the fields on the material diagram. If the material is rectangular, the wall thickness, diameter/width, and height will need to be provided. Note: The diameter/width and height of all materials are measured from the outside edges.<br />
<br />
[[File:Mat_lib_1.png]][[File:Mat_lib_2.png]]<br />
<br />
==Machine Settings==<br />
[[File:Drag_Machine_Settings3.png|right]]<br />
===Basic Settings===<br />
[[File:Drag_Tube_Basic_Settings1.png]]<br />
<div style="font-size:12pt;color:#d50000;"><br />
-Typical Settings-<br />
</div><br />
====Kerf Width:====<br />
*This is the size (width) of the cutting path determined by your plasma torch. This is generally between 0.05 and 0.06 depending on your plasma torch settings and type of torch you own. Consumables that you're using and amperage can change this number considerably, so we suggest a test in order to measure the exact width.<br />
<br />
====Cutting Overlap:====<br />
*This is the amount of under travel or over travel that a cut profile will perform. This can be changed under certain circumstances. One of which would be in order to leave a certain amount of material attaching your stock tube to the cut part in order to break it off after the cut is performed.<br />
<br />
====Web Spacing:====<br />
*This is the amount of material selected to be left between any nested parts. We recommend to set this number to 0.5 to indicate that a half of an inch will be left between these parts. This will help accommodate for lead-ins and lead-outs that may require this extra space.<br />
<br />
====Default Length:====<br />
*This section indicates your default stock length of tubing typically associated with this material. Every time you select this material, your stock length of tubing in your nesting projects will default to this number. This will be input in the unit type specified in the '''General''' tab for this material.<br />
<br />
====Edge Cut Offset:====<br />
*'''For l-channel (angle iron) and u-channel only''', this will be the distance beyond the edge of the material the lead in/out will extend when performing edge cuts.<br />
<br />
====Chuck Grip:====<br />
*This setting is used to indicate whether or not you will be using the pass-through of the chuck for this material or if it will require the use of the steps on the chuck jaws. Indicating the use of any other option except for the pass-through, the software will adjust loading, flipping, repositioning, and dead zone locations based on the chuck grip selected.<br />
<br />
[[File:Question_Mark_Picture1.png]]<br />
<br />
*Click on the question mark icon in the software to see an image of the different steps on the chuck to help you determine what will be needed for the selected material.<br />
<br />
[[File:Question_Mark_Picture2.png]]<br />
<br />
===Tool Heights===<br />
[[File:Drag_Height_Offsets1.png]]<br />
<div style="font-size:12pt;color:#d50000;"><br />
-Typical Settings-<br />
</div><br />
====Cutting Height:====<br />
*This is the number indicating how far off the tubing the torch head will be located during cutting. This height depends on the model of torch you have as well as the material thickness. ''Refer to your hypertherm manual for an exact height. Links to manuals are located at the top of this page.''<br />
<br />
====Marking Height:====<br />
*This number is meant to adjust the calibration values correlated to the height the marker head. (Example) If the tubing was entered as 1.75 OD, but the actual OD is 1.74, then you may enter a -.01 in this field in order to compensate for the difference in tube diameter when marking. '''This value should almost always be set to 0.'''<br />
<br />
====Engraving Height:====<br />
*This number is meant to adjust the calibration values correlated to the height the engraver head. (Example) If the tubing was entered as 1.75 OD, but the actual OD is 1.74, then you may enter a -.01 in this field in order to compensate for the difference in tube diameter when engraving. '''This value should almost always be set to 0.'''<br />
<br />
====Pierce Height:====<br />
*This number will indicate the distance that the torch will be placed off of the tubing during the piercing process of a cut. This is always 2 1/2 times the cutting height. ''Refer to your hypertherm manual for an exact height. Links to manuals are located at the top of this page.''<br />
<br />
===Support Lifter Gap:===<br />
'''Not available on the Dragon A150 Series.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Material_Drag_Lifter_Gap1.png]]<br />
<br />
*This is the gap amount desired from the current lifter height. To allow for an element of '''increased sag''' in the material, '''enter a positive distance value'''. To '''reduce sag''' in the material, '''enter a negative value'''.<br />
<br />
*Lifter 1 (B): is your standard lifter station provided with the Dragon A400 machine. Lifter 2(C): is for use if you've purchased, or designed an additional lifter station.<br />
<br />
===Corner Rotation Ext===<br />
<br />
'''*For square or rectangle material only'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Corner_Rotation_Ext1.png]]<br />
<br />
*The '''[[Corner Rotation Extension]]''' is a distance entered by the user that will cause the material to rotate before the corner radius of the material itself. This is used in cases where the wall thickness is wider than that of the extension of the corner radius on a square or rectangle material. Click the blue lettering for a visual representation of how this works.<br />
<br />
===Feed Rates===<br />
[[File:Drag_Material_Feed_RAtes1.png]]<br />
<div style="font-size:12pt;color:#d50000;"><br />
-Typical Settings-<br />
</div><br />
====Cutting Feed Rate:====<br />
*This setting determines the rate at which the machine's torch moves in the act of performing a cut. ''These feed rates are dependent on your particular torch and thickness of material, so be sure to check your Hypertherm manual for exact cutting feed rates. Links to manuals are located at the top of this page.''<br />
<br />
====Engraving Feed Rate:====<br />
*This is the rate at which your engraver travels along the tube. This should be set to '''30 inches per minute''' to ensure consistent engraving.<br />
<br />
====Marking Feed Rate:====<br />
*This is the rate at which the marker travels along the tubing. This can remain at '''100 inches per minute''' to ensure a smooth line with the marker.<br />
<br />
====Rotation Speeds:====<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Rotation_Speeds1.png]]<br />
<br />
*This '''Rotation Speeds''' setting sets the rate at which the chuck rotates during functions in a shift. This should be lowered with heavier, large OD material or in the case that you're using square or rectangle material with sharp corners. A lower rotational speed ensures that the rotational motor will not move too quickly and over-step the steps in the motor.<br />
<br />
====Machine Acceleration:====<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Acceleration_Speeds1.png]]<br />
<br />
*'''Travel (X):''' The value entered here will set the acceleration for the X-axis when running jobs using this material. A lower value should be used with larger, heavier OD tubing/pipe. As an example: A typical value which could be all encompassing would be '5-10'. This would be applicable to up to 6" tubing with a 0.25" wall thickness. Many smaller OD tubing/pipe (0.75 - 1.25 OD) may allow for this value to be around '35'. Set this value to zero to apply the default located in the Factory Settings of the Machine Library (Default is 35).<br />
<br />
*'''Rotation (Y):''' The value entered here will set the acceleration for the Y-axis when running jobs using this material. A lower value should be used with larger, heavier OD tubing/pipe. As an example: A typical value would be around '5' considering it will allow the material a smoother rotational ramp up and ramp down action. The lower the number, the longer the rotational axis takes to reach it's maximum cutting speed. Set this value to zero to apply the default located in the Factory Settings of the Machine Library (Default is 1: This value is indicating a 100% of normal value using a specific formula for determining Y-axis acceleration).<br />
<br />
===Misc Settings===<br />
<br />
====Use Bridge Cutting====<br />
*When this check box in checked, any newly made nest with this material will automatically keep the torch firing as it moves from the end cut of the previous part to the start cut of the next part.<br />
<br />
====Disable Lifter Station====<br />
'''Not available on the Dragon A150 Series.'''<br />
<br />
*When this check box is checked, the lifter station will be ignored in any new project with this material when it is sent to the Dragon machine. The lifter will not require a homing sequence, nor will it be used during the run.<br />
<br />
==Lead In/Out Defaults==<br />
[[File:Drag_Lead_In_Out_Default_Settings1.png|right]]<br />
===End Cut Profile Lead Defaults===<br />
*These settings are completely user specified and can vary based on the user's preference.<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Ignite_Settings1.png]]<br />
<div style="font-size:12pt;color:#d50000;"><br />
-Suggested Settings-<br />
</div><br />
===Lead In Type:===<br />
*This is where the user will select the type of lead-in ignite type that will be set to this material by default. '''Arc with Angle''' is a preferred method. This means that the torch will initiate its cut into the material at an angle which will ease into an arc and then to the intended cut profile. This is a smooth ignite type and leaves little chance for error.<br />
<br />
====Length/Distance:====<br />
*This is the length of the line that eases into the actual cut profile. We can keep this relatively short. We recommend '''.125''' in most cases.<br />
<br />
====Dwell Time(sec):====<br />
*This indicates how long the torch will remain on one place during the pierce. This can differ based on your torch and material type and thickness. ''Refer to your hypertherm manual for an exact time. Links to manuals are located at the top of this page.''<br />
<br />
====Angle/Sweep:====<br />
*This will be the angle at which the initial cut eases into the intended cut. We recommend a '''45''' degree angle for the ignite cut.<br />
<br />
====Radius:====<br />
*This is where the user will enter the radius of the arc that channels into the cut profile. We recommend keeping this at around '''.125''' as a preference.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Extinguish_Settings1.png]]<br />
<div style="font-size:12pt;color:#d50000;"><br />
-Suggested Settings-<br />
</div><br />
===Lead Out Type:===<br />
*This is where the user will select the type of lead-out extinguish type that will be set to this material by default. '''Perpendicular''' is a preferred method. This means that the torch will extinguish its cut at a perpendicular angle after the cut profile has been performed. This is a extinguish type that leaves the cut profile smoothly at a 90 degree angle.<br />
<br />
====Length/Distance:====<br />
*This is the length of the line that eases out of the cut profile. We can keep this relatively short. We recommend '''.125''' in most cases.<br />
<br />
====Dwell Time(sec):====<br />
*This indicates how long the torch will remain on one place during the extinguishing stage of the torch. This can be set to '''0'''.<br />
<br />
====Angle/Sweep:====<br />
*Opposite of the ignite type section, this will be the angle at which the cut eases out of the intended cut. This will be greyed out when the perpendicular extinguish type is set as a default.<br />
<br />
====Radius:====<br />
*This is where the user will enter the radius of the arc that channels out of the cut profile. This will be greyed out when the perpendicular extinguish type is set as a default.<br />
<br />
===Internal Cut Lead Defaults===<br />
*'''All other cut lead defaults can be set like the original cut lead defaults. These are meant for all cuts other that the start and end cuts of a part.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Default_Ignite_And_Extinguish_Settings1.png]]<br />
<br />
==NRC Settings==<br />
[[File:Drag_NRC_Settings1.png|right]]<br />
===Input Values===<br />
*With NRC cutting, the further from the centerline you're cutting, the thicker the material is. '''This grid allows you to make fine tuning adjustments.''' With the default first line in the example to the right, the entire cut will have a feed rate of 35 inches per minute (ipm) and a height of .06 and a thickness of 0.12. If you find that when it gets thicker it's not cutting all the way through, then you would add an entry so that when it gets to that thickness, it will slow down or cut at a different height. In the picture shown, when the thickness of the tube is .13 or greater, the feed rate will slow down by 10(making it 25), and the height will not change. When the thickness is .15 or greater, it slows down the feed rate by 15(making it 20) and lowers the cut height -.01(making it .05).<br />
<br />
*Inputted values will include the top line indicating your initial '''Thickness, Feed Rate and Cut Height''' and adjustments in feed rates and cut heights based on the thickness you're encountering throughout the duration of the cut. These will be inputted with (+ and -) signs to indicate the adjustment that is to be preformed.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
==Pricing==<br />
[[File:Drag_Pricing_Settings1.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
==Advanced==<br />
[[File:Drag_Adv_Settings1.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
===Polyline Resolutions:===<br />
[[File:Drag_Tube_General_Tab3.png]]<br />
<br />
====Max Length:====<br />
*This is where the user will enter the maximum length for each segment in a polyline. A segment will be ignored if it is longer than this value. If the segment is shorter, it may be combined with an adjacent segment to create a single segment.<br />
<br />
====Max Angle:====<br />
*This is where the user will enter the maximum angle between two segments in a polyline. If the angle is smaller than this value, the two segments may be combined to create a single segment.<br />
<br />
====Max Offset:====<br />
*This is where the user will enter the maximum boundary offset for a polyline. If the combination of two line segments breaches the boundary defined by this value, the features will not be combined.</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=File:Drag_Tube_General_Tab1.png&diff=9851File:Drag Tube General Tab1.png2022-01-19T19:55:29Z<p>Fabcam1: Fabcam1 uploaded a new version of File:Drag Tube General Tab1.png</p>
<hr />
<div></div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Dragon_Material_Settings&diff=9850Dragon Material Settings2022-01-19T19:49:09Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''The Dragon Material Settings page is meant to show the user how the Dragon machine reacts to your different material and tooling settings. These are general guidelines meant to give you understanding about your material machine settings and how they operate both within the software and in the practical application of the Dragon machine.'''<br />
<br />
<br />
===Material Machine Settings Video===<br />
'''[https://youtu.be/q9D4oRMRbxo Standard Material Machine Settings]'''<br />
<br />
===Hypertherm Manual Links===<br />
'''[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/hypertherm_powermax_45_owners_manual.pdf Hypertherm Powermax 45 Manual]'''<br />
<br />
'''[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/hypertherm_powermax_45_xp_owners_manual.pdf Hypertherm Powermax 45 XP Manual]'''<br />
<br />
'''[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/hypertherm_powermax_65-85_owners_manual.pdf Hypertherm Powermax 65-85 Manual]'''<br />
<br />
'''[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/mrt_-_duramax_retrofit_for_1000-1250-1650.pdf MRT Duramax Retrofit for Powermax 1000-1250-1650 Manual]'''<br />
<br />
'''[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/mrt2_-_duramax_retrofit_for_600-800-900-max42-max43.pdf MRT2 Duramax Retrofit for Powermax 600-800-900-MAX42-MAX43 Manual]'''<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Tube_General_Tab1.png|center]]<br />
'''IF YOU DON'T HAVE THIS NEW LOOK AND YOU'D LIKE TO TAKE ADVANTAGE OF SOME NEW ABILITIES, PLEASE CONTACT YOUR BEND-TECH REPRESENTATIVE AND REQUEST AN UPDATE FOR YOUR SOFTWARE.'''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
*To access the Material Settings, first select the '''[[Tube/Pipe Library]]''' from the Dragon '''[[Task Menu]] Screen'''.<br />
<br />
==General==<br />
[[File:Drag_Tube_General_sTab1.png|right]]<br />
===Material Properties===<br />
[[File:Drag_Tube_General_Tab2.png]]<br />
<br />
====Material Name:====<br />
*This title will be used to refer to the material throughout the software. It is recommended to give each a unique, descriptive name to more easily identify each material. <br />
<br />
====Weight (per inch):====<br />
*The weight of the material per unit can be supplied here. This value is completely optional, but it will be used to calculate the total weight of the part in the part designer interfaces above the results table.<br />
<br />
====Color:====<br />
*The color of the material can be chosen using the Color button. [[File:Color_button.png]] This color will be used to shade the material in various areas throughout the software. <br />
<br />
====Unit of Measure:====<br />
*Parts can be measured in either inches or millimeters.<br />
<br />
===Select Shape:===<br />
*Tube material can be either Round, Square, or Rectangle. If you have our newest capabilities, you can also choose L-Channel (Angle Iron) or U-Channel.<br />
<br />
====Wall Thickness, Diameter, and Height:====<br />
*Depending on the type of material chosen, there will be different dimensions that will need to be supplied. If the material is round or square, the wall thickness and diameter measurements will be required. These values will be entered into the fields on the material diagram. If the material is rectangular, the wall thickness, diameter/width, and height will need to be provided. Note: The diameter/width and height of all materials are measured from the outside edges.<br />
<br />
[[File:Mat_lib_1.png]][[File:Mat_lib_2.png]]<br />
<br />
==Machine Settings==<br />
[[File:Drag_Machine_Settings3.png|right]]<br />
===Basic Settings===<br />
[[File:Drag_Tube_Basic_Settings1.png]]<br />
<div style="font-size:12pt;color:#d50000;"><br />
-Typical Settings-<br />
</div><br />
====Kerf Width:====<br />
*This is the size (width) of the cutting path determined by your plasma torch. This is generally between 0.05 and 0.06 depending on your plasma torch settings and type of torch you own. Consumables that you're using and amperage can change this number considerably, so we suggest a test in order to measure the exact width.<br />
<br />
====Cutting Overlap:====<br />
*This is the amount of under travel or over travel that a cut profile will perform. This can be changed under certain circumstances. One of which would be in order to leave a certain amount of material attaching your stock tube to the cut part in order to break it off after the cut is performed.<br />
<br />
====Web Spacing:====<br />
*This is the amount of material selected to be left between any nested parts. We recommend to set this number to 0.5 to indicate that a half of an inch will be left between these parts. This will help accommodate for lead-ins and lead-outs that may require this extra space.<br />
<br />
====Default Length:====<br />
*This section indicates your default stock length of tubing typically associated with this material. Every time you select this material, your stock length of tubing in your nesting projects will default to this number. This will be input in the unit type specified in the '''General''' tab for this material.<br />
<br />
====Edge Cut Offset:====<br />
*'''For l-channel (angle iron) and u-channel only''', this will be the distance beyond the edge of the material the lead in/out will extend when performing edge cuts.<br />
<br />
====Chuck Grip:====<br />
*This setting is used to indicate whether or not you will be using the pass-through of the chuck for this material or if it will require the use of the steps on the chuck jaws. Indicating the use of any other option except for the pass-through, the software will adjust loading, flipping, repositioning, and dead zone locations based on the chuck grip selected.<br />
<br />
[[File:Question_Mark_Picture1.png]]<br />
<br />
*Click on the question mark icon in the software to see an image of the different steps on the chuck to help you determine what will be needed for the selected material.<br />
<br />
[[File:Question_Mark_Picture2.png]]<br />
<br />
===Tool Heights===<br />
[[File:Drag_Height_Offsets1.png]]<br />
<div style="font-size:12pt;color:#d50000;"><br />
-Typical Settings-<br />
</div><br />
====Cutting Height:====<br />
*This is the number indicating how far off the tubing the torch head will be located during cutting. This height depends on the model of torch you have as well as the material thickness. ''Refer to your hypertherm manual for an exact height. Links to manuals are located at the top of this page.''<br />
<br />
====Marking Height:====<br />
*This number is meant to adjust the calibration values correlated to the height the marker head. (Example) If the tubing was entered as 1.75 OD, but the actual OD is 1.74, then you may enter a -.01 in this field in order to compensate for the difference in tube diameter when marking. '''This value should almost always be set to 0.'''<br />
<br />
====Engraving Height:====<br />
*This number is meant to adjust the calibration values correlated to the height the engraver head. (Example) If the tubing was entered as 1.75 OD, but the actual OD is 1.74, then you may enter a -.01 in this field in order to compensate for the difference in tube diameter when engraving. '''This value should almost always be set to 0.'''<br />
<br />
====Pierce Height:====<br />
*This number will indicate the distance that the torch will be placed off of the tubing during the piercing process of a cut. This is always 2 1/2 times the cutting height. ''Refer to your hypertherm manual for an exact height. Links to manuals are located at the top of this page.''<br />
<br />
===Support Lifter Gap:===<br />
'''Not available on the Dragon A150 Series.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Material_Drag_Lifter_Gap1.png]]<br />
<br />
*This is the gap amount desired from the current lifter height. To allow for an element of '''increased sag''' in the material, '''enter a positive distance value'''. To '''reduce sag''' in the material, '''enter a negative value'''.<br />
<br />
*Lifter 1 (B): is your standard lifter station provided with the Dragon A400 machine. Lifter 2(C): is for use if you've purchased, or designed an additional lifter station.<br />
<br />
===Corner Rotation Ext===<br />
<br />
'''*For square or rectangle material only'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Corner_Rotation_Ext1.png]]<br />
<br />
*The '''[[Corner Rotation Extension]]''' is a distance entered by the user that will cause the material to rotate before the corner radius of the material itself. This is used in cases where the wall thickness is wider than that of the extension of the corner radius on a square or rectangle material. Click the blue lettering for a visual representation of how this works.<br />
<br />
===Feed Rates===<br />
[[File:Drag_Material_Feed_RAtes1.png]]<br />
<div style="font-size:12pt;color:#d50000;"><br />
-Typical Settings-<br />
</div><br />
====Cutting Feed Rate:====<br />
*This setting determines the rate at which the machine's torch moves in the act of performing a cut. ''These feed rates are dependent on your particular torch and thickness of material, so be sure to check your Hypertherm manual for exact cutting feed rates. Links to manuals are located at the top of this page.''<br />
<br />
====Engraving Feed Rate:====<br />
*This is the rate at which your engraver travels along the tube. This should be set to '''30 inches per minute''' to ensure consistent engraving.<br />
<br />
====Marking Feed Rate:====<br />
*This is the rate at which the marker travels along the tubing. This can remain at '''100 inches per minute''' to ensure a smooth line with the marker.<br />
<br />
====Rotation Speeds:====<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Rotation_Speeds1.png]]<br />
<br />
*This '''Rotation Speeds''' setting sets the rate at which the chuck rotates during functions in a shift. This should be lowered with heavier, large OD material or in the case that you're using square or rectangle material with sharp corners. A lower rotational speed ensures that the rotational motor will not move too quickly and over-step the steps in the motor.<br />
<br />
====Machine Acceleration:====<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Acceleration_Speeds1.png]]<br />
<br />
*'''Travel (X):''' The value entered here will set the acceleration for the X-axis when running jobs using this material. A lower value should be used with larger, heavier OD tubing/pipe. As an example: A typical value which could be all encompassing would be '5-10'. This would be applicable to up to 6" tubing with a 0.25" wall thickness. Many smaller OD tubing/pipe (0.75 - 1.25 OD) may allow for this value to be around '35'. Set this value to zero to apply the default located in the Factory Settings of the Machine Library (Default is 35).<br />
<br />
*'''Rotation (Y):''' The value entered here will set the acceleration for the Y-axis when running jobs using this material. A lower value should be used with larger, heavier OD tubing/pipe. As an example: A typical value would be around '5' considering it will allow the material a smoother rotational ramp up and ramp down action. The lower the number, the longer the rotational axis takes to reach it's maximum cutting speed. Set this value to zero to apply the default located in the Factory Settings of the Machine Library (Default is 1: This value is indicating a 100% of normal value using a specific formula for determining Y-axis acceleration).<br />
<br />
===Misc Settings===<br />
<br />
====Use Bridge Cutting====<br />
*When this check box in checked, any newly made nest with this material will automatically keep the torch firing as it moves from the end cut of the previous part to the start cut of the next part.<br />
<br />
====Disable Lifter Station====<br />
'''Not available on the Dragon A150 Series.'''<br />
<br />
*When this check box is checked, the lifter station will be ignored in any new project with this material when it is sent to the Dragon machine. The lifter will not require a homing sequence, nor will it be used during the run.<br />
<br />
==Lead In/Out Defaults==<br />
[[File:Drag_Lead_In_Out_Default_Settings1.png|right]]<br />
===End Cut Profile Lead Defaults===<br />
*These settings are completely user specified and can vary based on the user's preference.<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Ignite_Settings1.png]]<br />
<div style="font-size:12pt;color:#d50000;"><br />
-Suggested Settings-<br />
</div><br />
===Lead In Type:===<br />
*This is where the user will select the type of lead-in ignite type that will be set to this material by default. '''Arc with Angle''' is a preferred method. This means that the torch will initiate its cut into the material at an angle which will ease into an arc and then to the intended cut profile. This is a smooth ignite type and leaves little chance for error.<br />
<br />
====Length/Distance:====<br />
*This is the length of the line that eases into the actual cut profile. We can keep this relatively short. We recommend '''.125''' in most cases.<br />
<br />
====Dwell Time(sec):====<br />
*This indicates how long the torch will remain on one place during the pierce. This can differ based on your torch and material type and thickness. ''Refer to your hypertherm manual for an exact time. Links to manuals are located at the top of this page.''<br />
<br />
====Angle/Sweep:====<br />
*This will be the angle at which the initial cut eases into the intended cut. We recommend a '''45''' degree angle for the ignite cut.<br />
<br />
====Radius:====<br />
*This is where the user will enter the radius of the arc that channels into the cut profile. We recommend keeping this at around '''.125''' as a preference.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Extinguish_Settings1.png]]<br />
<div style="font-size:12pt;color:#d50000;"><br />
-Suggested Settings-<br />
</div><br />
===Lead Out Type:===<br />
*This is where the user will select the type of lead-out extinguish type that will be set to this material by default. '''Perpendicular''' is a preferred method. This means that the torch will extinguish its cut at a perpendicular angle after the cut profile has been performed. This is a extinguish type that leaves the cut profile smoothly at a 90 degree angle.<br />
<br />
====Length/Distance:====<br />
*This is the length of the line that eases out of the cut profile. We can keep this relatively short. We recommend '''.125''' in most cases.<br />
<br />
====Dwell Time(sec):====<br />
*This indicates how long the torch will remain on one place during the extinguishing stage of the torch. This can be set to '''0'''.<br />
<br />
====Angle/Sweep:====<br />
*Opposite of the ignite type section, this will be the angle at which the cut eases out of the intended cut. This will be greyed out when the perpendicular extinguish type is set as a default.<br />
<br />
====Radius:====<br />
*This is where the user will enter the radius of the arc that channels out of the cut profile. This will be greyed out when the perpendicular extinguish type is set as a default.<br />
<br />
===Internal Cut Lead Defaults===<br />
*'''All other cut lead defaults can be set like the original cut lead defaults. These are meant for all cuts other that the start and end cuts of a part.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Drag_Default_Ignite_And_Extinguish_Settings1.png]]<br />
<br />
==NRC Settings==<br />
[[File:Drag_NRC_Settings1.png|right]]<br />
===Input Values===<br />
*With NRC cutting, the further from the centerline you're cutting, the thicker the material is. '''This grid allows you to make fine tuning adjustments.''' With the default first line in the example to the right, the entire cut will have a feed rate of 35 inches per minute (ipm) and a height of .06 and a thickness of 0.12. If you find that when it gets thicker it's not cutting all the way through, then you would add an entry so that when it gets to that thickness, it will slow down or cut at a different height. In the picture shown, when the thickness of the tube is .13 or greater, the feed rate will slow down by 10(making it 25), and the height will not change. When the thickness is .15 or greater, it slows down the feed rate by 15(making it 20) and lowers the cut height -.01(making it .05).<br />
<br />
*Inputted values will include the top line indicating your initial '''Thickness, Feed Rate and Cut Height''' and adjustments in feed rates and cut heights based on the thickness you're encountering throughout the duration of the cut. These will be inputted with (+ and -) signs to indicate the adjustment that is to be preformed.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
==Pricing==<br />
[[File:Drag_Pricing_Settings1.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
==Advanced==<br />
[[File:Drag_Adv_Settings1.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
===Polyline Resolutions:===<br />
[[File:Drag_Tube_General_Tab3.png]]<br />
<br />
====Max Length:====<br />
*This is where the user will enter the maximum length for each segment in a polyline. A segment will be ignored if it is longer than this value. If the segment is shorter, it may be combined with an adjacent segment to create a single segment.<br />
<br />
====Max Angle:====<br />
*This is where the user will enter the maximum angle between two segments in a polyline. If the angle is smaller than this value, the two segments may be combined to create a single segment.<br />
<br />
====Max Offset:====<br />
*This is where the user will enter the maximum boundary offset for a polyline. If the combination of two line segments breaches the boundary defined by this value, the features will not be combined.</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Bend-Tech_Dragon_-_A400_Series&diff=9834Bend-Tech Dragon - A400 Series2021-04-13T16:14:21Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Dragon A400 Rack and Pinion Information<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/access.php?doc=a400assembly Dragon A400 R&P Assembly Manual]<br />
|<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/Startup_Manual_for_Rack_Pinion_A400/a400_startup_manual_part1_v6.pdf Dragon A400 R&P Safety and Maintenance]<br />
|<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/Startup_Manual_for_Rack_Pinion_A400/a400_startup_manual_part2_v6.pdf Dragon A400 R&P Machine Overview, Inspection, and Startup]<br />
|<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/Startup_Manual_for_Rack_Pinion_A400/a400_startup_manual_part3_v6.pdf Dragon A400 R&P Torch Mount, Software Overview, and Side Offsets]<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Dragon A400 Belt Driven Information<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/A400_Rack_Pinion_Assembly_Manual/a400_assembly_manual_v5.pdf Dragon A400 Belt Driven Assembly Manual]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_troubleshooting_v3 Maintenance and Troubleshooting]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/a_and_z_motor_actuator_maintenance_guide.pdf A and Z Axis Actuator Maintenance Guide]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/pulley_spacing_and_belt_tension_guide.pdf Pulley Spacing and Belt Tension Guide]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/power_switch_replacement_guide.pdf Power Switch Replacement Guide]<br />
|<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_startup_manual_part1_v4 Dragon A400 Belt Driven Safety and Maintenance]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_startup_manual_part2_v4 Dragon A400 Belt Driven Machine Startup and Walkthrough]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_startup_manual_part3_v4 Dragon A400 Belt Driven Torch Mount and Software Overview]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_startup_manual_part4_v4 Dragon A400 Belt Driven Side Offsets, Angle, Channel & Calibration]<br />
|<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_operators_manual_v2_final1.pdf Operator's Manual]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_plasma_cutting_guide_v3 Plasma Cutting Guide]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/y_motor_mounting_bracket_installation.pdf Y-Motor Mounting Bracket Installation]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/x_motor_set_screw_adjustment_guide.pdf X-Motor Set Screw Adjustment Guide]<br />
|<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | General Maintenance Documents<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/dragon_optimization_guide.pdf Dragon Optimization Guide]<br />
*[[A400 Ethernet Connection Scenarios|Ethernet Connection Scenarios]]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_material_coolant_system_manual_v4 Dragon A400 Cooling System Assembly Manual]<br />
*[http://bend-tech.com/files/a400manual/a400_powered_gate_retrofit_guide_v3.pdf Powered Gate Retrofit Guide]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/dragon_preventative_maint.html Dragon Preventative Maintenance]<br />
|<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/grounding_with_dielectric_grease.pdf Grounding with Dielectric Grease]<br />
*[[Dragon Die Calibration]]<br />
*[[Dragon Rotation Calibration]]<br />
|<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/machine_control_connection_guide.pdf Machine Control Connection Guide]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/lifter_station_adjustment_guide.pdf Lifter Station Adjustment Guide]<br />
*[https://www.bend-tech.com/files/footprint_a400_coolant.pdf A400 Footprint with Coolant System]<br />
|<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Operations<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Drag_Launcher.png|link=Bend-Tech Launcher|40px]] '''[[Bend-Tech Launcher]]''' || [[File:BT_Product_Dragon1.png|link=Dragon Guide|40px]] '''[[Dragon Guide]]'''|| [[File:BT_Product_Dragon_Options.png|link=Dragon Options|40px]] '''[[Dragon Options]]''' || [[File:Dragon-Tips_&_Hints1.png|40px|link=DragonA400 Tips & Hints|Dragon Tips & Hints]] '''[[DragonA400 Tips & Hints|Dragon Tips & Hints]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Tekla_Import_Icon1.png|40px|link=Tekla Import Guide]] '''[[Tekla Import Guide]]''' || [[File:CAD_2_CAM1.png|40px|link=CAD to CAM Part Transfer]] '''[[CAD to CAM Part Transfer]]''' || [[File:Dynatorch_Guide1.png|40px|link=Dynatorch Dragon Guide]] '''[[Dynatorch Dragon Guide]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Tutorials<br />
|-<br />
|[[File:dragon_straight_tut2.png|40px|link=Dragon Straight Part Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Straight Part Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_bent_tut2.png|40px|link=Dragon Bent Part Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Bent Part Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_cust_design_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Custom Design Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Custom Design Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_nesting_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Nesting Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Nesting Tutorial]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:dragon_diamond_notch_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Diamond Notch Bridging Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Diamond Notch Bridging Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_plunge_holes_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Plunge Holes Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Plunge Holes Tutorial]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Video Tutorials<br />
|-<br />
|[[File:Dragon_tut_icon1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vd7Ie84tjZM&]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vd7Ie84tjZM Dragon Parts to Dragon Machine Tutorial]''' || [[File:Dragon_tut_icon2.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h6Dd46GK7wE]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h6Dd46GK7wE Assembly to Dragon Machine Tutorial]''' || [[File:IND_tut_icon1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b7kK7WUMKpM]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b7kK7WUMKpM Industrial Tutorial 1 - Import to Machine]''' || [[File:IND_tut_icon2.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q-1wpELF3Dw]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q-1wpELF3Dw Industrial Tutorial 2 - Design to Machine]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Dragon_S&T_Tut1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Pr0-D2EZL2g]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Pr0-D2EZL2g Dragon Slot and Tab Tutorial]'''</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Module_Activation&diff=9768Module Activation2019-11-18T16:37:21Z<p>Fabcam1: Created page with "==How to activate modules== *1. Download the [http://www.bend-tech.com/support/updates/rel7/manual/bt_patch_module_image_all.exe latest patch for Bend-Tech modules]. *2. Clos..."</p>
<hr />
<div>==How to activate modules==<br />
*1. Download the [http://www.bend-tech.com/support/updates/rel7/manual/bt_patch_module_image_all.exe latest patch for Bend-Tech modules].<br />
<br />
*2. Close any open Bend-Tech windows and run the patch you downloaded in Step 1.<br />
<br />
*3. Run your Bend-Tech software.<br />
<br />
*4. Use the [[Main Menu Bar]] to open the Active Module dialog under Tools.<br />
<br />
*5. Click the Update button located at the bottom of the Module Activation window.<br />
<br />
*6. Restart your Bend-Tech software.<br />
<br />
When Bend-Tech opens, it will check & download any required patches to run your new modules properly.<br />
<br />
IMPORTANT:<br />
Before you use your new modules, if a green download progress bar appears at the upper right corner of the Bend-Tech window, allow it to finish the download and then click "Yes" when a pop-up windows ask to restart for updates.</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=PRO_Single_Part_Interface&diff=9767PRO Single Part Interface2019-07-23T18:34:58Z<p>Fabcam1: /* Tasks */</p>
<hr />
<div>'''[[Main Page|Bend-Tech 7x Wiki]] :: Single Part Interface/General Functions'''<br />
<br />
[[File:single_part_1.png|right|450px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
*Whenever a single part (Template, Custom Part, Custom 3D Part, Harpoon 3D, Sketch 2D or Sketch 3D) is being created, the interface will generally be the same for each with the exception of the part information/creation section below the tabbed menu. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
*The screen is broken up into four sections with a small icon menu near the top of the frame. The top left corner holds the tabbed section, the top right corner holds the results table, the bottom right holds the 3D display area, and the bottom left is the part information/creation section; usually containing value fields to create the user's desired design more easily.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
==Tabs==<br />
<br />
In the top left corner, there is a tabbed section that holds a majority of the design options.<br />
<br />
<br />
==Die & Material==<br />
<br />
Under the Die & Material tab, the material and die can be chosen. <br />
[[File:EZ_single_part_4.png|right]]<br />
'''To select a die''', choose one from the drop down menu below 'Select Material:'. To see more detailed information about each material, click the 'Library' button next to the material menu to view the material library. To the right of the material selection, the diameter, wall thickness, and weight of the selected material will be displayed. <br />
<br />
'''To select a die''', choose one from the drop down menu below 'Select Die:' or click the 'Detailed List' button. Once the 'Detailed List' button has been clicked, a new window containing a chart of every die in the die library along with detailed information about each. To select a die from this list, click on a die and click the 'Select' button or double click on the desired die. To print this list, click the 'Print' button. Click the 'Library' button next to the die menu to view the die library.<br />
<br />
'''To create a custom die CLR''', click the 'Custom CLR' button. Enter the CLR value and click 'OK'. This will add the entered CLR value to the die drop down menus (next to each bend) as 'Custom CLR - (Entered Value). Select the custom CLR from the menu to use it.To the right of the die selection, the CLR, calibrated CLR, and bend location offset of the selected die will be displayed.<br />
<br />
'''Select Machine:''' '''Not available in PRO.'''<br />
<br />
==Part Details==<br />
[[File:single_bend_part1.png|right]]<br />
*Under the Part Details tab, notes, revision information, part description, cut-off start/end values, and the bend order menu can be accessed. <br />
<br />
*To add '''notes''', type in the "'''Notes'''" field below. Any notes shown here will be included on the setup sheet. To set a default note, Select "'''Options'''" under the '''Tools''' menu and go to the '''Single Parts''' tab. If desired, enter any revision information next to "'''Revision'''" and a description next to "'''Description'''". <br />
<br />
*Type in any '''cut-off''' values into the "'''Cut-Off Start'''" and/or "'''Cut-Off End'''" fields. These cut-off values are the amount of extra material needed on either end of the part when bending.<br />
<br />
*Check the "'''Reverse Designed'''" check box to specify whether that part is designed from the opposite end of the current design. <br />
<br />
*Select the "'''Bend Order'''" button [[File:bendorder_1.png]] to access the '''Part Bending Order''' menu. In this window users can view their part being bent in a simulation. This window also contains settings and bending options. See the '''[[Bend Order]]''' page for further information on this feature. <br />
<br />
*Select the "'''Reset Bend Order'''" [[File:bendorder_10.png]] button to reset the bend order back to normal. <br />
<br />
*Select the "'''Part Settings'''" [[File:part_settings.png]] button to adjust the general settings, results/output settings, and reverse design settings for the current part. See the '''[[Part Settings]]''' page for further information on this feature.<br />
<br />
==Display==<br />
[[File:EZ_single_part_6.png|right]]<br />
Under the "'''Display'''" tab, settings specific to the 3D part display can be adjusted. Select the button below "'''Cut-Off Color'''" to change the color that cut-off lengths will be displayed in. This button will display the current color that is in use. To change the size of the Tri-Star or Dimension text, enter values into either of the '''Tri-Star Scale''' or '''Dimension Size''' field.<br />
<br />
The current part's "'''Dimension Location'''" is shown and is available to change in the upper right hand corner as well. In the event that this is changed to anything different from your factory settings (in TOOLS->OPTIONS) there will show an indicator image above notifying you that there is a conflict of settings.<br />
<br />
Check the box next to '''Dimensions''' to have the length measurements and markers displayed in the part display.<br />
<br />
Check the box next to '''Cut-Off''' to have any cut-off lengths that were entered in the 'Cut-Off Start or End' fields in the Part Details tab shown in the part display.<br />
<br />
Check the box next to '''Apex Guides''' to to show lines extending from the bend verification points to the part. <br />
<br />
Check the box next to '''Tri-Star''' to have the XYZ compass/tri-star displayed in the part display. <br />
<br />
Check the box next to '''Wall Thickness''' to have the thickness of the material shown on the part model when in shaded mode.<br />
<br />
Check the box next to the '''Verification Points''' to display blue points on the apex of each bend and the start and end of the part. <br />
<br />
Check the box next to '''Bend Highlight''' to have whichever bend is currently selected (either the cursor is in the design field or selected in the bend list) highlighted on the part model.<br />
<br />
Check the box next to '''Refresh on Keystroke''' to have the part model constantly updated whenever changed are made to the design.<br />
<br />
<br />
While any of these options are unchecked, they will not be shown in the current 3D part display area.<br />
<br />
==Tasks==<br />
[[File:PRO_single_part_3.png|right]]<br />
<br />
*"'''Those below with simple functions that are self-explanatory will not have a link to further explanation for how to use the function.'''"<br />
<br />
'''[[Verify]]'''<br />
*Select the "'''Verify'''" [[File:verify.png]] button to open the '''Part Verify''' window. Using this tool, the dimensions/distances and the angle between two points can be verified. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''[[Flat Layout]]'''<br />
'''Available with the Exhaust Module, Large Radius Module (LR) or in our SE product or higher'''<br />
<br />
*Select the "'''Flat Layout'''" [[File:flatlayout.png]] button to open the '''Flat Layout''' window. Two flat, unbent models of the same part will be displayed and can be labeled and then printed out. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''[[Bump Bending]]'''<br />
'''Available with the Large Radius Module (LR) or in our SE product or higher'''<br />
<br />
*Select the "'''Bump Bending'''" [[File:bumpbending.png]] button to add bump bends to a bend on the current part. Bump bending allows bends to be sectioned off into multiple smaller, equal sized bends. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''[[Price]]'''<br />
'''Not available in PRO.'''<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Display XYZ/LRA''' <br />
'''Not available in PRO.'''<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Move to Origin'''<br />
'''Not available in PRO.'''<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Trim Cuts'''<br />
*If the current part has any cuts applied to the ends (which can be done in the [[Assembly]] interface in the '''Cutting''' tab), the excess material on the end(s) of the part can be removed by selecting the "'''Trim Cuts'''" [[File:trimcuts.png]] button. The shape of the cut will then be visible. '''''Note:''''' For the cuts to be shown, the '''Cut-off''' display option needs to be turned off. This can be done in the [[#Display|Display Tab]].<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Inch vs MM'''<br />
'''Not available in PRO.'''<br />
<br />
<br />
'''[[Print Scale]]''' <br />
*Select the "'''Print Scale'''" [[File:printscale.png]] button to open the print scale feature. Print Scale allows a full size, to scale, 2D version of single part designs to be printed to scale on multiple sheets.<br />
<br />
<br />
'''[[Apex vs. Tangent]]'''<br />
*Select the "'''Apex vs Tangent'''" [[File:apexvstangent1.png]] button to switch the dimension types between apex and tangent for all of the current part's bends.<br />
<br />
<br />
'''[[Adjust Centerline]]'''<br />
*Select the "'''Adjust Centerline'''" [[File:adjustcenterline.png]] button to change how the part measurements are interpreted. In the part designers, parts are assumed to be based on centerline. This tool allows the current part dimensions to be from the inside or outside of the tube instead.<br />
<br />
==Manuf. Warning==<br />
'''Not available in PRO.'''<br />
<br />
==Part Settings Icon==<br />
[[File:single_part_18.png|right|350px]]<br />
*In the upper right corner of the tabbed section, there will be a [[File:part_settings_icon.png]] icon that can be used to access the part settings. For information on the part settings in this menu, see the "'''[[Part Settings]]'''" page.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
==Part Display==<br />
[[File:single_part_11.png|right|400px]]<br />
*On the lower right side of the window is the 3D preview of the part. While creating a Custom or Custom 3D part, the current bend and/or length will be highlighted in red while the bend is either selected or while the bend/start/end coordinate row is selected. <br />
*This preview can be adjusted by zooming, panning, and rotating. <br />
*To zoom, use the scroll wheel on the mouse. Scroll up to zoom out and scroll down to zoom in. <br />
*To pan/move the part preview, click and hold the scroll wheel or both mouse buttons and move the cursor around. The part preview will move with the cursor. <br />
*To rotate, click and hold the right mouse button. Move the cursor around and the part will rotate with the cursor movements. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
==Results Table==<br />
[[File:single_part_9.png|right]]<br />
*In the upper right corner of the window, the results table is shown. <br />
*The top section of the results table shows the die, material, cut length, and weight of the part. <br />
*This entire section's color will indicate if any problems exist. If the section is green, it means the part is complete and there are no problems or manufacturing warnings. If section is orange, the part is complete, but some problems or warnings exist. If the section is red, the part is not complete and/or there are warnings or problems with the part design. <br />
*The results table also holds a chart that lists each bend along with the bend order, location of the bend, amount of rotation needed for the bend, angle of the bend, spring angle value, centerline rotation, bend length, and the orientation of the bend. Double click within this chart to view a full size version in a new window. In this new window, select the "'''Print'''" button to print the chart.<br />
<br />
[[File:single_part_10.png|500px]]</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Auto-Import&diff=9766Auto-Import2019-01-23T16:54:31Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''[[Main Page|Bend-Tech 7x Wiki]] :: [[Main Menu Bar]] :: [[File]] :: Auto-Import'''<br />
__NOTOC__<br />
<br />
*Files can be imported using the '''File -> Import -> Auto-Import''' menu or by selecting Auto-Import on the CAD Import menu available on the [[View#Task Menu|Task Menu]].<br />
<br />
[[File:auto-import_mass_transfer.png|right|500px]]<br />
*After loading, your parts will open in the Industrial Part interface. If your STEP file contains a large number of parts, it may load a temporary container for the parts. The container allows you to transfer smaller groups of parts at a time.</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=File:Auto-import_mass_transfer.png&diff=9765File:Auto-import mass transfer.png2019-01-23T16:50:58Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Auto-Import&diff=9764Auto-Import2019-01-22T23:08:30Z<p>Fabcam1: Created page with "'''Bend-Tech 7x Wiki :: Main Menu Bar :: File :: Auto-Import''' __NOTOC__ *Files can be imported using the '''File -> Import -> Auto-Import''' menu or b..."</p>
<hr />
<div>'''[[Main Page|Bend-Tech 7x Wiki]] :: [[Main Menu Bar]] :: [[File]] :: Auto-Import'''<br />
__NOTOC__<br />
<br />
*Files can be imported using the '''File -> Import -> Auto-Import''' menu or by selecting Auto-Import on the CAD Import menu available on the [[View#Task Menu|Task Menu]].<br />
<br />
*After loading, your files will open in the Industrial Part interface. If your STEP file contains a large number of parts, it may load a temporary container for the parts. The container allows you to transfer smaller groups of parts at a time.</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=File:Dragon_CAM_Guide.png&diff=9763File:Dragon CAM Guide.png2018-10-01T19:54:31Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Options&diff=9762Options2018-09-14T20:21:48Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''[[Main Page|Bend-Tech 7x Wiki]] :: [[Main Menu Bar]] :: [[Tools]] :: Options'''<br />
<br />
[[File:options_1.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:options_16.png|left|150px]]The Options menu contains default settings, visual preferences, and general settings for each area within the software. <br />
<br />
<br />
This menu can be accessed by clicking the '''Tools''' option on the main menu bar and selecting '''Options''' from the drop down menu. <br />
<br />
<br />
Additionally, when adjusting any of these settings, be sure to click the '''Save''' button [[File:options_2.png]] at the bottom of the frame to apply the new defaults or settings. When any default settings are changed, any designs that are currently open will not be affected. Any new designs or designs opened after changes were made will have these settings applied. <br />
<br />
'''To access the options menu''', click on the '''Tools''' menu on the [[Main Menu Bar]] and select '''Options''' in the drop down menu <br />
<br />
...or click on the '''Settings''' link on the [[Task Menu]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>General</h2><br />
[[File:options_1.png|right]]<br />
<h3>Default Items</h3><br />
<br />
*'''Default Die:''' In the Default Die menu, a die can be chosen and set as the default. Once a die is set as the default, it will be the die that is initially selected when a new single part is created. To set a default die, click the drop down menu and select a die from the list.<br />
<br />
*'''Default Tube/Pipe:''' In the Default Tube/Pipe menu, a tube/pipe material can be chosen and set as the default. Once a material is set as the default, it will be the material that is initially selected when a new single part is created.<br />
<br />
*'''Default Plate:''' In the Default Plate menu, a plate material can be chosen and set as the default. Once a plate material is set as the default, it will be the material that is initially selected when a new plate is created.<br />
<br />
*'''Default Machine:''' In the Default Machine menu, a machine can be chosen and set as the default. Once a machine is set as the default, it will be the machine that is initially selected when a new part is created. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>File Storage</h3><br />
The file storage locations will determine where data (die, material, plate, etc.) libraries and part files will be stored. <br />
<br />
*'''Data Libraries:''' To choose a new location for the data libraries, click the "'''Browse"...'''" button [[File:options_4.png]] below the data libraries location. <br />
<br />
*'''Part:''' To choose a default location for part files, click the "'''Browse:...'''" button [[File:options_4.png]] below the parts location. This will be the folder that is initially opened when a part is being saved. <br />
<br />
*"'''It is recommended that you stick with the default file locations for the part and data libraries. It will be easier for our company to find them if there is ever a problem with your computer which affects the software.'''"<br />
<br />
<h3>Tolerances</h3><br />
The decimal tolerance for the lengths, angles, and rotations can be adjusted here. The decimal tolerance controls how many digits will be allowed after decimals points for length, angle, and rotation. In the tolerance options, each digit place is represented by an n. <br />
<br />
(For example, if the angle tolerance is set to '''n.nn''' and the actual angle is '''90.539°''', the angle will be rounded to '''90.54°'''. If the angle tolerance is set to just '''n''', then the angle would be rounded to '''91°'''.) <br />
<br />
*'''Rotation Angle:''' To change the decimal tolerance for part rotation values, click the drop down menu and select a tolerance option from the list. <br />
<br />
*'''Bend Angle:''' To change the decimal tolerance for bend angle values, click the drop down menu and select a tolerance option from the list. <br />
<br />
*'''Lengths:''' Length values can be displayed in either fractional or decimal format. To change the format and/or tolerance for lengths, click the drop down menu and select an option from the list. <br />
<br />
<h3>Unit of Measure</h3><br />
*The measurement units can be set to either "'''Inches:'''" or "'''Millimeters:'''". Once a unit of measure is chosen, it will be the unit of measure that is initially chosen wherever units of measure can be adjusted throughout the software.<br />
<br />
<h3>PickPoint Selection Method</h3><br />
*The "'''PickPoint Selection Method:'''" will determine how pickpoints can be selected in the plate and assembly interfaces. The "'''Selected Point:'''" option will require a point to be directly clicked on in order to be selected. The "'''Closest Point:'''" option will select whichever point is closest to the cursor when it is clicked. <br />
<br />
<h3>Auto-Save Frequency</h3><br />
*Using the "'''Auto-Save Frequency:'''" drop down menu, the time interval between auto-saves can be adjusted or the function can be turned off. This setting will affect any open designs throughout the software. <br />
<br />
<h3>Display Quality</h3><br />
*Using the "'''Display Quality:'''" drop down menu, the quality of the graphical representation of parts, plate designs, or assemblies can be adjusted. To change this setting, click on the drop down menu and choose either Low, Medium, or High. <br />
<br />
<h3>Input/Interface</h3><br />
*The type of input device used with the software can be specified here. For a standard computer and keyboard setup, the "'''Keyboard:'''" option would be appropriate. If a touchscreen computer/computer without a keyboard, select the "'''Touch Screen:'''" option. When this option is chosen, a keyboard/number pad will open on-screen whenever text or a numerical value is needed to be entered. (See the images below.)<br />
<br />
[[File:options_5.png|400px]] [[File:options_6.png|200px]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Undo/Redo</h3><br />
*The number of steps allowed for redo/undos can be adjusted here. For example, if 10 is set as the number of steps, the undo button can be hit 10 times before it no longer has an affect on the plate or assembly design. There is a limit to 100 steps.<br />
<br />
<h3>Invert Mouse Wheel Zoom</h3> <br />
*Check the "'''Invert Mouse Wheel Zoom:'''" checkbox to reverse the zoom direction from the default (scrolling up to zoom out and scrolling down to zoom in) to the inverted setting (scrolling up to zoom in and scrolling down to zoom out).<br />
<br />
<h3>Disable Automatic Updates</h3><br />
*When the "'''Disable Automatic Updates:'''" checkbox is clicked, automatic software updates will be disabled. <br />
<br />
<h3>Disable Wireframe Mode</h3><br />
*When the "'''Disable Wireframe:'''" checkbox is clicked, wireframe mode will not be available.<br />
<br />
<h2>Design Settings</h2><br />
[[File:options_7.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Rotation</h3><br />
The rotation settings control how rotation values are displayed in the results table. Rotation can be measured in incremental or absolute terms. Each rotation angle range can also be chosen. <br />
<br />
*'''Incremental:''' Select the "'''Incremental:'''" option and rotation angles will start from the end of the previous bend's rotation.<br />
<br />
::[[File:options_8.png|450px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Absolute:''' Select the "'''Absolute:'''" option and rotation angles will always start from the very beginning of the angle scale.<br />
<br />
::[[File:options_9.png|460px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Angle Scale:''' The rotation scale will determine what the rotation angles will range between. The rotation scale will show where the angle measurements begin and where they end. Choose a rotation scale by clicking on one of the scale options. The rotation scale values '''0 - 360''' and '''(-180) - 180''' range around the tube in a counterclockwise direction, and the values '''360 - 0''' and '''180 - (-180)''' range around the tube in a clockwise direction. The '''0 - 90 - 0 - 90 - 0''' and '''0 - 90 - 0 - 90 - 0 Reversed''' options are represented as an angle between 0 and 90 degrees and a map quadrant (NW, NE, SE, SW). These options are only available when the '''Absolute''' option is chosen. <br />
<br />
<h3>Display Settings</h3><br />
In the bottom left corner there will be a list of checkbox options to control the display options for the results table on single part designers. <br />
<br />
*'''Display parentheses () for negative values:''' Check this box to have all negative values enclosed in parentheses. <br />
<br />
*'''Display Degree Symbol:''' Check this box for angle values to have degree symbols shown next to them.<br />
<br />
*'''Display Feet/Meters:''' Check this box for large length values to be displayed in terms of feet or meters (feet will be used if inches are used as the units and meters will be used if millimeters are the units.)<br />
<br />
*'''Display Minutes/Seconds:''' Check this box for angle values to be displayed in terms of minutes and seconds instead of decimal degree values. <br />
<br />
*'''Display Fractions and Decimals:''' Check this box to have the total cut length of the part design (displayed above the results table) represented in terms of fractions and decimals. The decimal/fraction tolerance of this value will be determined by the length tolerance which can be set up in the [[Options]] menu in the [[Options#General Tab|General Tab]] or in the '''Part Settings''' menu in the [[Part Settings#Output Results|Output Results]] tab.<br />
<br />
*'''Display Spring Angles:''' Check this box for spring angle values to be included in the results table. <br />
<br />
*'''Display Length of Bend:''' Check this box to have length of bend values included in the results table. <br />
<br />
<h3>Length/Location</h3><br />
The length/location setting will determine how the bend location will be calculated in the results table. <br />
<br />
*'''Distance from Start:''' Bend locations will be measured from the starting edge of the tube. <br />
<br />
*'''Distance from End:''' Bend locations will be measured from the ending edge of the tube. <br />
<br />
*'''Length of Straight Tube:''' Bend location values will be the amount of straight tube between each bend.<br />
<br />
*'''Table Location:''' Bend locations will be based on index table values. If this option is used, the offset distance between the table and the bend will need to be supplied as well as scale length of the table. Check the '''Indexing Begins at Die''' option if the scale begins at the die. <br />
<br />
*'''Dimension Location:''' This option determines where the bend location marks will be placed in reference to the bend. Bend locations can be placed at the start, center, or end of each bend. <br />
<br />
<h3>Reverse Design - Length</h3><br />
This setting will determine how inputted part lengths are interpreted when creating a [[Reverse Design|reverse design]] part.<br />
<br />
*'''Incremental:''' Entered length values start from the previous bend. <br />
<br />
*'''Absolute - Start:''' Entered length values are the distance from the starting edge of the tube to the starting edge of each bend.<br />
<br />
*'''Absolute - End:''' Entered length values are the distance from the ending edge of the tube to the ending edge of each bend. <br />
<br />
*'''Absolute - Center:''' Entered length values are the distance from the starting edge of the tube to the center of each bend. <br />
<br />
*'''Absolute - Start(Reversed):''' Entered length values are the distance from the end of the part to the start of each bend. <br />
<br />
*'''Absolute - End(Reversed):''' Entered length values are the distance from the end of the part to the end of each bend. <br />
<br />
*'''Absolute - Center (Reversed):''' Entered length values are the distance from the end of the part to the center of each bend. <br />
<br />
<h3>Reverse Design - Rotation</h3><br />
This setting will determine how rotations will be calculated in the results table when creating a [[Reverse Design|reverse design]] part.<br />
<br />
*'''Incremental:''' Entered rotation values start from the end of the previous rotation. <br />
<br />
*'''Incremental - Reversed:''' Entered rotation values start from the end of the previous rotation with a reversed direction. <br />
<br />
*'''Absolute: 0 to 360:''' Entered rotation values always start from the beginning of the angle scale (0) at each rotation. <br />
<br />
*'''Absolute: 360 to 0:''' Entered rotation values always start from the beginning of the angle scale (360) at each rotation. <br />
<br />
*'''Absolute: 180 to -180:''' Entered rotation values always start from the beginning of the angle scale (180) at each rotation. <br />
<br />
*'''Absolute: -180 to 180:''' Entered rotation values always start from the beginning of the angle scale (-180) at each rotation. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Single Parts</h2><br />
[[File:options_10.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Features to Display</h3><br />
These settings will determine the kind of features that will be displayed on the part model in any of the single part design interfaces. Click the check boxes next to the features you want to have shown. <br />
<br />
*'''Dimensions:''' Length measurement values will be displayed on the part lengths. <br />
<br />
*'''Cut-Off:''' If any cut-off is added to the part, it will be represented on the part display.<br />
<br />
*'''Apex Guides:''' For each bend, guidelines will extend from the part model to the verification points. <br />
<br />
*'''Tri-Star:''' The axis will be shown on the graphical display.<br />
<br />
*'''Wall Thickness:''' The thickness of the material will be shown on the 3D part model. <br />
<br />
*'''Verification Points:''' Points will be displayed at the apex of each bend. <br />
<br />
*'''Bend Highlight:''' The current bend will be highlighted in red on the 3D part model. <br />
<br />
*'''Orientation Axis:''' The orientation axis will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the part display. <br />
<br />
<h3>Defaults</h3><br />
<br />
*'''Cut-Off Color:''' This will be the default color that will be used to represent the sections of cut-off on the 3D part model. <br />
<br />
*'''Tri-Star Scale:''' The default scaling value for the axis.<br />
<br />
*'''Dimension Size:''' The default dimension size. <br />
<br />
*'''Grid Spacing:''' The default grid spacing size for the [[Sketch 2D]] and [[Sketch 3D]] part interfaces.<br />
<br />
*'''Dim Type:''' The default dimension type that will be selected in the Dim Type menus for each bend. <br />
<br />
*'''Notes:''' The default notes that will be generated in the notes area for new part designs. <br />
<br />
<h3>Setup Sheet</h3><br />
<br />
*'''Print Transitions:''' The transition sheet will include a chart that displays the location, rotation, and bend angle values for each bend on the part. Each location, rotation, and angle will have a image of the 3D part showing what the part will look like at that specific stage. By default, these instructions will be included on the print out while this option is checked.<br />
<br />
*'''Print Design Instructions:''' By default, the design instructions chart will be included on the print out while this option is checked. <br />
<br />
*'''Print Tri-Star:''' By default, the part model will have the tri-star included on the print out while this option is checked. <br />
<br />
*'''Print Dimensions:''' By default, the part model will have the dimension markers and values included while this option is checked. <br />
<br />
<h3>Cut-Off</h3><br />
*The default cut-off start and end values can be defined here. Each new part will automatically have these cut-offs initially applied. <br />
<br />
<h3>Custom Part - Reverse Rotation</h3><br />
*Check this box to reverse the rotation direction while using the [[Custom Part]] design interface. <br />
<br />
<h3>Flat Layout - Abbreviations</h3><br />
*These settings will determine the abbreviations used for angle, rotation, centerline radius, and spring angles in Flat Layout.<br />
<br />
<h3>Flat Layout - Sizes</h3><br />
*These settings will determine the sizes for text, stand-off dimension, angle, rotation, and CLR values in Flat Layout. To change the size, enter a value into the size fields. <br />
<br />
<h3>Flat Layout - Colors</h3><br />
*These settings will determine the colors for tubes, bends, extensions, and text in Flat Layout. To change the colors, click the corresponding button to change the color of a specific feature.<br />
<br />
<h2>Assembly</h2><br />
[[File:options_11.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Dimensions</h3><br />
*Using these settings, the size for the text, line and arrow width, arrow length, and extension offset and stand-off can be determined. '''To change these sizes''', enter a value into the fields. The arrow type determines the kind of arrow that will be used on the dimension markers. '''To change the arrow type''', click the arrow type menu and select a type. The tolerance will determine the format and/or tolerance of the dimension values. '''To change the tolerance''', click the tolerance menu and choose an option. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Tri-Star</h3><br />
*These options will control how the tri-star will appear in the assembly designer. The tri-star can be directional (labeled with ceiling/floor, front/back, left/right), XYZ (labeled with X, Y, and Z), Lines Only, or not shown at all. The default scale value can also be defined here. <br />
<br />
<h3>Printing Scale</h3><br />
*The printing scale for cutting wrapper print outs can be determined here. Enter a value into the vertical and/or horizontal fields to apply a scale. <br />
<br />
<h3>PickPoint Colors</h3><br />
*The colors of the different PickPoint types can be chosen here. To change the color of a PickPoint, click the corresponding button and select a color. <br />
<br />
<h3>Dimension Colors</h3><br />
*The colors of the dimension marker, extensions, and values can be chosen here. To change the colors of any of these features, click on the corresponding button and select a color.<br />
<br />
<h3>Defaults</h3><br />
<br />
*'''Auto Zoom:''' While auto zoom is on, the screen will automatically zoom out if any features being added are outside the current frames boundaries. <br />
<br />
*'''Display Wall Thickness:''' While this option is activated, the wall thickness of the tube will be displayed if the 3D shaded or 3D wireframe options are chosen. <br />
<br />
*'''Display Tubes as Cut:''' <br />
<br />
*'''Display Orientation Axis:''' While this option is enabled, the orientation axis will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the assembly display. <br />
<br />
*'''Auto Switch to Line Mode:''' This option will automatically switch the mode to line mode when PickPoints are being placed. <br />
<br />
*'''Prompt for Part Names:''' While this option is enabled, whenever new parts are added to the assembly, a prompt will appear where the new part can be given a name. <br />
<br />
*'''PickPoint Size:''' The default size of the PickPoints can be chosen here. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Cursor Help Text</h3><br />
*Cursor help text is displayed next to the cursor while the assembly to help guide the user through certain tasks in the interface. Check the box next to '''Display Cursor Help Text''' to have these instructions shown. The text color option will change the color of the cursor help text. Click the color button to adjust this setting. <br />
<br />
<h3>Main Display</h3><br />
*The background of the display frame in the assembly interface can be set to a plain white background, a custom color, or an image. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Plate/Sheet</h2><br />
[[File:options_12.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Graphical Help</h3><br />
*This will determine how and if any help text will be displayed. Choose the '''Off''' option to have no help displayed in the plate designer. Choose the '''Actual''' option to <br />
<br />
*Chose the '''Cursor''' option to have the help text displayed right next to the cursor. <br />
<br />
<h3>Selection Mode</h3><br />
*If confirm is chosen, every time features are to be deleted, moved, scaled, or copied, a window will appear to confirm the action before it is actually executed. Otherwise, the action will be performed immediately. <br />
<br />
<h3>Design Cursor</h3><br />
*The type of cursor used while creating a plate design can be chosen. Default will be the standard cursor, Small is a cross shape, small diagonal is an X shape, and large is a cross-hair style cursor that fills the whole design frame. <br />
<br />
<h3>Dimension Colors</h3><br />
*The colors of the extensions, dimension markers, and dimension text in the plate designer can be determined using these options. To change the color of any of these features, click on the corresponding button and select a color. <br />
<br />
<h3>Dimensions</h3><br />
*Using these settings, the size for the text, line and arrow width, arrow length, and extension offset and stand-off can be determined. '''To change these sizes''', enter a value into the fields. The arrow type determines the kind of arrow that will be used on the dimension markers. '''To change the arrow type''', click the arrow type menu and select a type. The tolerance will determine the format and/or tolerance of the dimension values. '''To change the tolerance''', click the tolerance menu and choose an option. The angle tolerance will determine the decimal places allowed for angle measurements. '''To change the angle tolerance''', click the angle tolerance menu and select an option from the drop down menu. <br />
<br />
<h3>Colors</h3><br />
*The colors of the features and background can be adjusted using these settings. To change the color of either of these, click on the corresponding button and select a color. <br />
<br />
<h3>Default DXF Output</h3><br />
*The output for DXF files can be determined here. These files will be output as PolyLines or as Lines, Arcs, and Text. <br />
<br />
<h3>Scale Printing</h3><br />
*The default value for the width of the line representing the part features in the '''[[Print Scale]]''' tool can be adjusted here. Smaller values will result in thinner lines while larger numbers will result in thicker lines. <br />
<br />
<h3>Abbreviations</h3><br />
*The abbreviations for dimensions in the plate design interface can be determined here. When any of these features are labeled with a dimension, this abbreviation will be used to identify it. <br />
<br />
<h3>Text</h3><br />
*The size, font, and text path precision of dimensions can be determined here. To change the text size, enter a value into the size field. To change the font, click on the drop down menu and select a font from the list. The path text precision can be adjusted by clicking the drop down menu and selecting an option from the list. <br />
<br />
<h3>Holes</h3><br />
*The default width, angles, lengths, corner radii, and maximum number of holes to draw in a grid can be supplied here for each hole type. These are only the default settings and can be changed within the plate interface. <br />
<br />
<h3>Extra Options</h3><br />
<br />
*'''Create Points at Intersections:''' Check this option to have points automatically created at any line intersections in plate designs. <br />
<br />
*'''Allow Selection of End Points:''' This option will allow of the ends of features to be selected. <br />
<br />
*'''Exclude External Holes:''' Check this option to ignore all holes outside the plate's boundary lines while the plate is being defined<br />
<br />
*'''Dim Display for Free Select:''' Check this option to have the display frame dimmed to a grey shade whenever free select is activated.<br />
<br />
*'''Automatically Switch to Design View:''' Check this option to have the display mode automatically switched back to 'Design' if it is in any other mode and any attempts are made to edit the design. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Header Design</h2><br />
[[File:options_13.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Dimensions</h3><br />
*Using these settings, the size for the text, line and arrow width, arrow length, and extension offset and stand-off can be determined. '''To change these sizes''', enter a value into the fields. The arrow type determines the kind of arrow that will be used on the dimension markers. '''To change the arrow type''', click the arrow type menu and select a type. The tolerance will determine the format and/or tolerance of the dimension values. '''To change the tolerance''', click the tolerance menu and choose an option. The angle tolerance will determine the decimal places allowed for angle measurements. '''To change the angle tolerance''', click the angle tolerance menu and select an option from the drop down menu. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Tri-Star</h3><br />
*These options will control how the tri-star will appear in the header designer. The tri-star can be directional (labeled with ceiling/floor, front/back, left/right), XYZ (labeled with X, Y, and Z), Lines Only, or not shown at all. The default scale value can also be defined here. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Main Display</h3><br />
*The background of the display frame in the assembly interface can be set to a plain white background, a custom color, or an image.<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Explode</h3><br />
These settings will determine the default explode amount, explosion type, and explosion settings.<br />
<br />
*'''Amount:''' This amount will determine the distance between sections once the header has been exploded.<br />
<br />
*'''No J-Bends - Complete Explode:''' This option will make it so each J-Bend will be broken into a separate bend section instead of a J shape.<br />
<br />
*'''J-Bends - Start on Header Side:''' This option will make it so the long tail end of each J-Bend will start towards the header end of the tube<br />
<br />
*'''J-Bends - Start on Collector Side:''' This option will make it so the long tail end of each J-Bend will point towards the collector end of the tube.<br />
<br />
*'''Allow J-Bend to flip if zero tail length:''' This option to flip the J-Bend around to point the opposite direction if the tail length of the bend is zero.<br />
<br />
*'''Display Labels:''' Check this box to have each section of the header tubes labeled. The labels will display the part number followed by a hyphen and the J-Bend number. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Defaults</h3><br />
<br />
*'''Auto Zoom:''' While auto zoom is on, the screen will automatically zoom out if any features being added are outside the current frames boundaries. <br />
<br />
*'''Display Wall Thickness:''' While this option is activated, the wall thickness of the tube will be displayed if the 3D shaded or 3D wireframe options are chosen. <br />
<br />
*'''Display Tubes as Cut:''' <br />
<br />
*'''Display Orientation Axis:''' While this option is enabled, the orientation axis will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the assembly display. <br />
<br />
*'''Auto Switch to Line Mode:''' This option will automatically switch the mode to line mode when PickPoints are being placed. <br />
<br />
*'''Prompt for Part Names:''' While this option is enabled, whenever new parts are added to the assembly, a prompt will appear where the new part can be given a name. <br />
<br />
*'''PickPoint Size:''' The default size of the PickPoints can be chosen here. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Dimension Colors</h3><br />
*The colors of the extensions, dimension markers, and dimension text in the header designer can be determined using these options. To change the color of any of these features, click on the corresponding button and select a color.<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>What to Print</h3><br />
*These are the default setup sheet printing options. Check the box next to '''Cover Page'''' to have a front page with general information about the header printed with the setup sheet. Check the box next to '''Tube Details''' to have chart containing details about each tube. Check the box next to '''Current Tube Only''' to only print tube details for the tube that is currently highlighted in the list of tubes. Check the box next to 'Labels' to have each section of the tube labeled. Check the box next to '''Job Cut Instructions''' to have instructions on how to create the header design printed with the setup sheet. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Cursor Help Text</h3><br />
Cursor help text is displayed next to the cursor while the header designer to help guide the user through certain tasks in the interface. Check the box next to '''Display Cursor Help Text''' to have these instructions shown. The text color option will change the color of the cursor help text. Click the color button to adjust this setting.<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Nudge</h3><br />
*The default push and rotate amount can be set here. '''Push Amount''' is how far the tube will be moved when nudged. '''Rotate Amount''' is how many degrees will be tube will be rotated when nudged.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Industrial</h2><br />
[[File:IND_Tools_Optioins(1).png|right]]<br />
<br />
*The '''Industrial Options''' window can be found in the TOOLS->OPTIONS menu and contains options for part rotation indicator options, display options, tolerance and exporting options.<br />
<br />
<h3>Rotational Indicator</h3><br />
"'''The Rotational Indicator section will allow you to place a Tab, Notch or Mark at the Start or End of your tubing in order to keep track of rotation during cutting and bending.'''"<br />
<h4>Type</h4><br />
[[File:Rot_Type_IND(1).png]]<br />
<br />
*The '''None''' option in the type section will ensure that there is no rotational indicator placed on the tubing.<br />
<br />
*The '''Tab''' option in the type section will place a square or triangular tab on the start or end of your tubing in order to keep track of rotation.<br />
<br />
*The '''Notch''' option in the type section will place a square or triangular notch on the start or end of your tubing in order to keep track of rotation.<br />
<br />
*The '''Mark''' option in the type section will place a lined mark on the start, end or along the tube in order to keep track of rotation.<br />
<br />
<h4>Tab/Notch Shape</h4><br />
[[File:Tab_Notch_Shape_IND.png]] [[File:Tab_Notch_Shape_IND(1).png]]<br />
<br />
*When the type is set to '''Tab''', select either the '''Square''' or '''Triangle''' option to indicate the shape of the tab.<br />
<br />
*When the type is set to '''Notch''', select either the '''Square''' or '''Triangle''' option to indicate the shape of the notch.<br />
<br />
<h4>Dimensions</h4><br />
[[File:Dimensions_Options_IND.png]] [[File:Dimensions_Options_IND(1).png]]<br />
<br />
*When the type is set to '''Tab''', you are given options to enter the '''Length''', '''Rotation Offset''' and '''Width''' of the tab.<br />
<br />
*When the type is set to '''Notch''', you are given options to enter the '''Length''', '''Rotation Offset''' and '''Width''' of the notch.<br />
<br />
*When the type is set to '''Mark''', you are given the options to enter the '''Length''', '''Rotation Offset''' and '''Distance from End''' of the mark.<br />
<br />
<h4>Which Side</h4><br />
[[File:Which_Side_IND.png]]<br />
<br />
*When either the '''Tab''', '''Notch''' or '''Mark''' options are selected, you will be given the option to place the rotational indicator at the '''Start''' or '''End''' of the tubing.<br />
<br />
<h3>Precision / Tolerance</h3><br />
[[File:Precision_Tolerance_IND.png]]<br />
<br />
'''These tolerances may be altered due to conflicting polyline resolution values. This will occur when the project is sent to nesting and the polyline resolution will take precedent.''''''<br />
<br />
*The '''Precision (Geometry)''' field is where you can set the tolerance for how small or far away a feature can be from another in order to be defined or be considered as a part of the part as a whole.<br />
<br />
*The '''Precision (Comparison)''' field is where you can set the tolerance for comparing two features to be identical or separate entities.<br />
<br />
*The '''Bend Mark Text Resolution:''' field is where you can set the image resolution of your bend mark text as it appears on the unfolded tubing.<br />
<br />
<h3>Export Options</h3><br />
[[File:Export_Options_IND.png]]<br />
<br />
*Check the '''Always Export Cut Profile (.dxf)''' check box if you'd like your cut profiles exported along with any .dxf file that you export.<br />
<br />
*Check the '''Simple Cut Export (.step/.iges)''' check box if you'd like simple cuts to be exported along with any .stp/.igs file that you export.<br />
<br />
*Check the '''Simple Hole Export (.step/.iges)''' check box if you'd like simple holes to be exported along with any .stp/.igs file that you export.<br />
<br />
<h3>Polyline Resolution</h3><br />
[[File:Polyline_Res_Options_IND1.png]]<br />
<br />
*The '''Max Length:''' field is where you will set the maximum length of a polyline segment that will be converted to a larger line. Think of this a a cap/boundary on the length of your contours. The higher the length value, the less resolution your part will achieve. This will determine the efficiency and precision of your contours.<br />
<br />
*The '''Max Angle:''' field is where you will set the maximum '''inside''' angle between polyline segments that will be converted to a single line. If the angle between two connecting line segments is a lesser angle than the max angle value entered, the connecting lines will not convert. The higher the angle, the less resolution your part will achieve. This will determine the efficiency and precision of your contours.<br />
<br />
*The '''Max Offset:''' field is where you will set a maximum offset on either side of your contours. If a converted line that is created crosses outside the bounds of this offset, polylines will not be converted to a larger segment and remain as they are. The higher the offset value, the less resolution your part will achieve. This will determine the efficiency and precision of your contours.<br />
<br />
<h3>Draw Colors</h3><br />
[[File:Draw_Colors_IND(1).png]]<br />
<br />
*The '''Tube/Part''' color is set to gray by default.<br />
<br />
*The '''Start Profile''' colors are set to dark green and light green by default. Dark green indicates the inner contour of the start profile while the light green indicates the outer contour of the start profile.<br />
<br />
*The '''End Profile''' colors are set to dark blue and light blue by default. Dark blue indicates the inner contour of the end profile while the light blue indicates the outer contour of the end profile.<br />
<br />
*The '''Holes''' colors are set to teal and cyan by default. Teal indicates the inner contour of the hole while the cyan indicates the outer contour of the hole.<br />
<br />
*The '''Saddles''' color is set to gold by default.<br />
<br />
<h3>Misc Options</h3><br />
[[File:Misc_Options_IND(1).png]]<br />
<br />
*Check the '''Normal Cuts (Perpendicular Cutting)''' check box and your cuts will be converted to become located at the perp of the bend it is assigned to.<br />
<br />
*Check the '''Auto-Tack Cut Profiles''' check box and your cut profiles will automatically be tracked when a new part is imported.<br />
<br />
*Check the '''Consolidate Parts (Dragon Export)''' check box and the software will consolidate your parts when exporting to the Dragon CAM software.<br />
<br />
*The '''Default Stock Length:''' field is where you will enter a value (in inches or millimeters: depending on your setup) for your default stock length of tubing as it appears when you open a nesting project.<br />
<br />
*The '''Default Web Size:''' field is where you will enter a value (in inches or millimeters: depending on your setup) for your default web size between cuts when creating a nesting project.<br />
<br />
*The '''Saddle Scale Factor:''' field is where you will enter a value (1=100%) for your saddle scale factor. <br />
<br />
<h2>Simulation</h2><br />
[[File:options_14.png|right]]<br />
In the Simulation tab, the default travel, bend, rotation, and animation speed, as well as the default bender type, simulation quality and POB bracket color can be set. These settings are only defaults and can be adjusted while viewing the simulation.<br />
<br />
<h3>Speeds</h3><br />
*The default speeds of the travel, bending, rotation, and animation can be adjusted independently. To adjust the speeds, click and drag the point back and forth.<br />
<br />
<h3>Bender</h3><br />
*The bender chosen here will determine the type of bender used in simulation. The bender options available are: center compression, rotary compression - clockwise, rotary compression - counter clockwise, rotary compression - vertical, rotary draw - clockwise, rotary draw - counter clockwise, and rotary draw - vertical. <br />
<br />
<h3>Quality</h3><br />
*The display quality of the simulation animation can be adjusted here. To adjust the simulation, click on the drop down menu and choose a quality option. <br />
<br />
<h3>POB Bracket Color</h3><br />
*The default color of the POB bracket shown in the simulation can be determined here. To change the color, click on the button and select a color. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Misc Options</h2><br />
[[File:options_15.png|right]] <br />
<br />
<h3>File Import - dxf/dwg</h3><br />
*These settings will effect any dxf or dwg files that are imported into the software. If the '''Convert Polylines to Arcs''' option is checked, imported files with polylines that meet the minimum number of lines supplied in the field below will be converted to a single arc. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Length/ Location 2</h3><br />
This setting allows a second location type to be defined. This will only affect the [[Export Template]] tool, where the '''Location 2''' option is shown in the Bend Data Table drop down menus. <br />
<br />
*'''Distance from Start:''' Bend locations will be measured from the starting edge of the tube. <br />
<br />
*'''Distance from End:''' Bend locations will be measured from the ending edge of the tube. <br />
<br />
*'''Length of Straight Tube:''' Bend location values will be the amount of straight tube between each bend.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Rotation 2</h3><br />
This setting allows a second rotation type to be defined. This will only affect the [[Export Template]] tool, where the '''Rotation 2''' option is shown in the Bend Data Table drop down menus.<br />
<br />
*'''Incremental:''' Rotation angles will start from the end of the previous bend's rotation. Click the incremental rotation option to select it. <br />
<br />
::[[File:options_8.png|450px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Absolute:''' Rotation angles will always start from the very beginning of the angle scale. Click the absolute rotation option to select it. <br />
<br />
::[[File:options_9.png|460px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Angle Scale:''' The rotation scale will determine what the rotation angles will range between. The rotation scale will show where the angle measurements begin and where they end. Choose a rotation scale by clicking on one of the scale options. The rotation scales available are '''0 - 360, 360 - 0, (-180) - 180, and 180 - (-180)'''. The '''0 - 90 - 0 - 90 - 0''' and '''0 - 90 - 0 - 90 - 0 Reversed''' options will be added when the '''Absolute''' option is chosen. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Calculations</h3><br />
*The decimal rounding precision can be specified in the '''Rounding Precision''' field. This precision value will be used to determine how many decimal places to round converted values (when using the '''Inch vs MM''' function, for example).<br />
<br />
<h3>File Import (Splines)</h3><br />
*The '''Segment Resolution''' is the set resolution of splines. A larger number will result in a higher resolution spline, but also increases the number of entities that are to be processed.<br />
<br />
*The '''Ignore (Non-Solid Model)''' check box can be checked which will cause any splines to be ignored during the import of a .step/.iges file. This only applies to the standard importing options and does not apply to the solid model import.</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Main_Page&diff=9761Main Page2018-09-05T20:25:31Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div><br />
'''<h3>Welcome to the Official Bend-Tech Wiki</h3>'''<br />
<br />
Use the links below for detailed information on all aspects of the Bend-Tech software products.<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|[[File:Wiki_Help_Info1.png|link=https://youtu.be/Vw7UNV_seQg Wiki Guide Help Video|40px]] '''[https://youtu.be/Vw7UNV_seQg Wiki Guide Help Video]''' || <br />
[[File:Comp_Requirements.png|link=Basic Computer Requirements/Information]] '''[[Basic Computer Requirements/Information]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #E0A366; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Training Class Walkthroughs<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
| ||[[File:QS_training_class1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6w7Ozo9u0Jk|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6w7Ozo9u0Jk Training Class I]''' || [[File:QS_training_class2.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5YUxAIxSHXQ]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5YUxAIxSHXQ Training Class II]''' || [[File:QS_training_class3_SE_advanced.png|link=http://www.bend-tech.com/files/7x_training_class_3.pdf]] '''[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/7x_training_class_3.pdf Training Class III (PDF Only)]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #5882FA; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Bend-Tech 7x CAD Main Wiki<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: center; width="100%;" <br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_CAD_Articles.png|link=Bend-Tech Articles]] || [[File:BT_Product_EZ2.png|link=EZ Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_EZ_3D2.png|link=EZ-3D Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_PRO2.png|link=PRO Guide]] || [[File:BT_Product_SE2.png|link=SE Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_IND4.png|link=Industrial / Dragon Guide]] || [[File:YouTube_Link_Icon1.png|link=Bend-Tech YouTube Videos]]<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #f46200; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Bend-Tech Dragon - A Series Main Wiki<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_Dragon_A150_Image1.png|center|link=Bend-Tech Dragon - A150 Series]]<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_Dragon_A400_Image1.png|center|link=Bend-Tech Dragon - A400 Series]]<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #c0c0c0; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Base Product Information Videos<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_EZ1a.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7vESYne3oFw|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7vESYne3oFw EZ]'''<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_EZ_3D1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UOqCLGgt6os|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UOqCLGgt6os EZ-3D]''' <br />
|[[File:BT_Product_PRO1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o2e7MVpVjgo|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o2e7MVpVjgo PRO]''' <br />
|[[File:BT_Product_SE1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jSV7jymGzeY|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jSV7jymGzeY SE]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_IND2.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8_eQCEvd5MQ|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8_eQCEvd5MQ Industrial]''' || [[File:BT_Product1_DragonA400.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9rJ0KFi9qu8]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9rJ0KFi9qu8 Dragon - A150 Series]''' || [[File:BT_Product1_Dragon.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oz1IlPLV4jo]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oz1IlPLV4jo Dragon - A400 Series]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Industrial_/_Dragon_Guide&diff=9760Industrial / Dragon Guide2018-09-05T20:24:45Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''Thank you for purchasing your Industrial Bending Software Product. This page is dedicated to you! Anything that your software is capable of will be addressed on this main page and in its subsequent pages.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:IND_Startup_Screen1.png|center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #F0E68C; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Set Up & Features Information<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:installationicon.png|link=Installation|40px]] '''[[Installation]]''' || [[File:taskmenu.png|link=taskmenu|40px]] '''[[Task Menu]]'''|| [[File:menubaricon.png|40px|link=Main Menu Bar]] '''[[Main Menu Bar]]''' || [[File:Zoom_Rotate_Pan.png|40px|link=Zoom, Rotate & Pan]] '''[[Zoom, Rotate & Pan]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:setting.png|40px|link=Options]] '''[[Options]]''' || [[File:new_cad_import.png|40px|link=Import]] '''[[Import]]''' || [[File:break_part.png|40px|link=Break Part]] '''[[Break Part]]''' || [[File:offset.png|40px|link=Offset Part]] '''[[Offset Part]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:nesting_icon.png|40px|link=Nesting]] '''[[Nesting]]''' || [[File:calibrationicon.png|40px|link=Calibration]] '''[[Calibration]]''' || [[File:singleparticon.png|40px|link=Single Part -Interface/General Functions]] '''[[Single Part -Interface/General Functions|Single Part Interface]]''' || [[File:stairwizardicon.png|40px|link=Stair Wizard]] '''[[Stair Wizard]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:panelguideicon.png|40px|link=Panel]] '''[[Panel]]''' || [[File:cutting1icon.png|40px|link=Cutting]] '''[[Cutting]]''' || [[File:tube_to_assembly1.png|40px|link=Tube to Assembly Transfer]] '''[[Tube to Assembly Transfer]]''' || [[File:Bend_Order_Simulation.png|40px|link=Bend Order/Simulation]] '''[[Bend Order/Simulation]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Hotkeys_icon1.png|40px|link=Hotkeys]] '''[[Hotkeys]]''' || [[File:Backup_And_Restore1.png|40px|link=Backup & Restore]] '''[[Backup & Restore]]''' || [[File:Seat_Manager1.png|40px|link=Seat Manager]] '''[[Seat Manager]]'''<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #B55656; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Libraries Information<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:die_lib.png|40px|link=Die Library]] '''[[Die Library]]''' || [[File:tube_lib.png|40px|link=Tube/Pipe Library]] '''[[Tube/Pipe Library]]''' || [[File:plate_lib.png|40px|link=Plate/Sheet Library]] '''[[Plate/Sheet Library]]''' || [[File:springback_lib.png|40px|link=SpringBack Library]] '''[[SpringBack Library]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:machine_lib.png|40px|link=Machine Library]] '''[[Machine Library]]''' || [[File:j_bend_lib.png|40px|link=J-Bend Library]] '''[[J-Bend Library]]''' || [[File:geometric_lib2.png|40px|link=Plate: Geometric Library]] '''[[Plate: Geometric Library]]''' || [[File:die_references1.png|40px|link=Die References]] '''[[Die References]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:material_references1.png|40px|link=Material References]] '''[[Material References]]''' || [[File:Bend-Mark_Settimgs1.png|40px|link=Bend Mark Settings]] '''[[Bend Mark Settings]]''' || '''[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/die_calibration_and_springback_library_guide.pdf Die and Springback Overview]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #4682B4; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Designer Documentation<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:tempicon.png|link=Template|40px]] '''[[Template]]''' || [[File:customicon.png|link=Custom Part|40px]] '''[[Custom Part]]''' || [[File:custom3dicon.png|link=Custom 3D Part|40px]] '''[[Custom 3D Part]]''' || [[File:harpoon_icon1.png|link=Harpoon 3D|40px]] '''[[Harpoon 3D]]''' <br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:sketch2Dicon.png|link=Sketch 2D|40px]] '''[[Sketch 2D]]''' || [[File:sketch3Dicon.png|link=Sketch 3D|40px]] '''[[Sketch 3D]]''' || [[File:xyzicon.png|link=XYZ Part|40px]] '''[[XYZ Part]]''' || [[File:reverseicon.png|link=Reverse Design|40px]] '''[[Reverse Design]]''' <br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:straightparticon.png|40px|link=Straight Part]] '''[[Straight Part]]''' || [[File:assemblyicon.png|link=Assembly|40px]] '''[[Assembly]]''' || [[File:BT_Product_IND2.png|40px|link=Industrial Guide]] '''[[Industrial Guide]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #87CEFA; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Module Documentation<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:plateicon1.png|link=Plate|40px]] '''[[Plate|Sheet Metal Module]]''' || [[File:headericon1.png|40px|link=Header Design|Header Design Module]] '''[[Header Design|Header Design Module]]''' || [[File:lricon.png|40px|link=Large Radius Module]] '''[[Large Radius Module]]''' || [[File:exhausticon.png|40px|link=Exhaust Design]] '''[[Exhaust Design]]''' <br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|[[File:hricon.png|40px|link=Handrail Module]] '''[[Handrail Module]]''' || [[File:Handrail_3d_Templates1.png|40px|link=3D Templates (HR)]] '''[[3D Templates (HR)]]''' || [[File:MSPtemplateicon3.png|40px|link=MSP Templates]] '''[[MSP Templates]]''' || [[File:MSPtemplateicon3.png|40px|link=Motor Sports Templates II]] '''[[Motor Sports Templates II]]'''<br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|[[File:MSPRCT1icon.png|40px|link=Roll Cage Templates]] '''[[Roll Cage Templates]]''' || [[File:BT_APT_Icon2.png|40px|link=Armor Pack Templates]] '''[[Armor Pack Templates]]''' || [[File:Solidworks2.png|40px|link=SolidWorks]] '''[[SolidWorks|SolidWorks]]'''<br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;" <br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #66CDAA; font-size:160%; text-align: center;" | Tutorials<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:exhausttuticon.PNG|40px|link=Exhaust Tutorial]] '''[[Exhaust Tutorial]]''' || [[File:exhausttuticon2.PNG|40px|link=Exhaust Tutorial II]] '''[[Exhaust Tutorial II]]''' || [[File:assemblytuticon.PNG|40px|link=Assembly Tutorial]] '''[[Assembly Tutorial]]''' || [[File:assemblytrainingicon.png|40px|link=Assembly Tutorial II|Assembly Tutorial II]] '''[[Assembly Tutorial II]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:cutting_tutorial.png|40px|link=Cutting Tutorial]] '''[[Cutting Tutorial]]''' || [[File:cutting_tutorial_adv.png|40px|link=Cutting Tutorial (Advanced)]] '''[[Cutting Tutorial (Advanced)|Cutting Tutorial II]]''' || [[File:headertuticon.png|40px|link=Header Design Tutorial]] '''[[Header Design Tutorial]]''' || [[File:harpoonicon.png|40px|link=Harpoon 3D Tutorial]] '''[[Harpoon 3D Tutorial|Harpoon 3D]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:solidworkstuticon.png|40px|link=SolidWorks Import Tutorial]] '''[[SolidWorks Import Tutorial]]''' || [[File:solidworkstutadvicon.png|40px|link=SolidWorks Import Tutorial II]] '''[[SolidWorks Import Tutorial II]]''' || [[File:dimensionstuticon.png|40px|link=Dimensions Tutorial]] '''[[Dimensions Tutorial]]''' || [[File:templateicon.png|40px|link=Template Tutorial]] '''[[Template Tutorial|Template]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:handrailtuticon.png|40px|link=Handrail Tutorial]] '''[[Handrail Tutorial]]''' || [[File:handrailtutIIicon.png|40px|link=Handrail Tutorial II]] '''[[Handrail Tutorial II]]''' || [[File:xyztuticon.png|40px|link=XYZ Part Tutorial]] '''[[XYZ Part Tutorial|XYZ Part]]''' || [[File:reversetuticon.png|40px|link=Reverse Design Tutorial]] '''[[Reverse Design Tutorial|Reverse Design]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:largeradiustuticon.png|40px|link=Large Radius Tutorial]] '''[[Large Radius Tutorial]]''' || [[File:largeradiustutIIicon.png|40px|link=Large Radius Tutorial II]] '''[[Large Radius Tutorial II]]''' || [[File:custicon.png|40px|link=Custom Part Tutorial]] '''[[Custom Part Tutorial|Custom Part]]''' || [[File:cust3dicon.png|40px|link=Custom 3D Tutorial]] '''[[Custom 3D Tutorial|Custom 3D]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:panelcreateicon.png|40px|link=Panel Tutorial]] '''[[Panel Tutorial]]''' || [[File:bendordericon.png|40px|link=Bend Order Tutorial]] '''[[Bend Order Tutorial|Bend Order]] || [[File:plate_to_assembly_icon.png|40px|link=Plate/Sheet Metal to Assembly Transfer]] '''[[Plate/Sheet Metal to Assembly Transfer]]''' || [[File:platetuticon.png|40px|link=Sheet Metal Text]] '''[[Sheet Metal Text]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:platetuticon.png|40px|link=Plate Tutorial|Sheet Metal Tutorial]] '''[[Plate Tutorial|Sheet Metal Tutorial]] || [[File:platetuticon2.png|40px|link=Sheet Metal Tutorial II]] '''[[Sheet Metal Tutorial II]] || [[File:flange_intersection_icon.png|40px|link=Intersecting Flanges Tutorial]] '''[[Intersecting Flanges Tutorial]]'''<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #87CEFA; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Additional Documentation<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_CAD_Articles.png|center|link=Bend-Tech Articles]] || [[File:Bend-Tech_Dragon_A150_Image1.png|center|link=Bend-Tech Dragon - A150 Series]]<br />
|| [[File:Bend-Tech_Dragon_A400_Image1.png|center|link=Bend-Tech Dragon - A400 Series]]<br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|}</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=IND_Guide&diff=9759IND Guide2018-09-05T20:24:00Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''Thank you for purchasing your Industrial Bending Software Product. This page is dedicated to you! Anything that your software is capable of will be addressed on this main page and in its subsequent pages.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:IND_Startup_Screen1.png|center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #F0E68C; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Set Up & Features Information<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:installationicon.png|link=Installation|40px]] '''[[Installation]]''' || [[File:taskmenu.png|link=taskmenu|40px]] '''[[Task Menu]]'''|| [[File:menubaricon.png|40px|link=Main Menu Bar]] '''[[Main Menu Bar]]''' || [[File:Zoom_Rotate_Pan.png|40px|link=Zoom, Rotate & Pan]] '''[[Zoom, Rotate & Pan]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:setting.png|40px|link=Options]] '''[[Options]]''' || [[File:new_cad_import.png|40px|link=Import]] '''[[Import]]''' || [[File:break_part.png|40px|link=Break Part]] '''[[Break Part]]''' || [[File:offset.png|40px|link=Offset Part]] '''[[Offset Part]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:nesting_icon.png|40px|link=Nesting]] '''[[Nesting]]''' || [[File:calibrationicon.png|40px|link=Calibration]] '''[[Calibration]]''' || [[File:singleparticon.png|40px|link=Single Part -Interface/General Functions]] '''[[Single Part -Interface/General Functions|Single Part Interface]]''' || [[File:stairwizardicon.png|40px|link=Stair Wizard]] '''[[Stair Wizard]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:panelguideicon.png|40px|link=Panel]] '''[[Panel]]''' || [[File:cutting1icon.png|40px|link=Cutting]] '''[[Cutting]]''' || [[File:tube_to_assembly1.png|40px|link=Tube to Assembly Transfer]] '''[[Tube to Assembly Transfer]]''' || [[File:Bend_Order_Simulation.png|40px|link=Bend Order/Simulation]] '''[[Bend Order/Simulation]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Hotkeys_icon1.png|40px|link=Hotkeys]] '''[[Hotkeys]]''' || [[File:Backup_And_Restore1.png|40px|link=Backup & Restore]] '''[[Backup & Restore]]''' || [[File:Seat_Manager1.png|40px|link=Seat Manager]] '''[[Seat Manager]]'''<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #B55656; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Libraries Information<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:die_lib.png|40px|link=Die Library]] '''[[Die Library]]''' || [[File:tube_lib.png|40px|link=Tube/Pipe Library]] '''[[Tube/Pipe Library]]''' || [[File:plate_lib.png|40px|link=Plate/Sheet Library]] '''[[Plate/Sheet Library]]''' || [[File:springback_lib.png|40px|link=SpringBack Library]] '''[[SpringBack Library]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:machine_lib.png|40px|link=Machine Library]] '''[[Machine Library]]''' || [[File:j_bend_lib.png|40px|link=J-Bend Library]] '''[[J-Bend Library]]''' || [[File:geometric_lib2.png|40px|link=Plate: Geometric Library]] '''[[Plate: Geometric Library]]''' || [[File:die_references1.png|40px|link=Die References]] '''[[Die References]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:material_references1.png|40px|link=Material References]] '''[[Material References]]''' || [[File:Bend-Mark_Settimgs1.png|40px|link=Bend Mark Settings]] '''[[Bend Mark Settings]]''' || '''[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/die_calibration_and_springback_library_guide.pdf Die and Springback Overview]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #4682B4; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Designer Documentation<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:tempicon.png|link=Template|40px]] '''[[Template]]''' || [[File:customicon.png|link=Custom Part|40px]] '''[[Custom Part]]''' || [[File:custom3dicon.png|link=Custom 3D Part|40px]] '''[[Custom 3D Part]]''' || [[File:harpoon_icon1.png|link=Harpoon 3D|40px]] '''[[Harpoon 3D]]''' <br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:sketch2Dicon.png|link=Sketch 2D|40px]] '''[[Sketch 2D]]''' || [[File:sketch3Dicon.png|link=Sketch 3D|40px]] '''[[Sketch 3D]]''' || [[File:xyzicon.png|link=XYZ Part|40px]] '''[[XYZ Part]]''' || [[File:reverseicon.png|link=Reverse Design|40px]] '''[[Reverse Design]]''' <br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:straightparticon.png|40px|link=Straight Part]] '''[[Straight Part]]''' || [[File:assemblyicon.png|link=Assembly|40px]] '''[[Assembly]]''' || [[File:BT_Product_IND2.png|40px|link=Industrial Guide]] '''[[Industrial Guide]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #87CEFA; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Module Documentation<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:plateicon1.png|link=Plate|40px]] '''[[Plate|Sheet Metal Module]]''' || [[File:headericon1.png|40px|link=Header Design|Header Design Module]] '''[[Header Design|Header Design Module]]''' || [[File:lricon.png|40px|link=Large Radius Module]] '''[[Large Radius Module]]''' || [[File:exhausticon.png|40px|link=Exhaust Design]] '''[[Exhaust Design]]''' <br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|[[File:hricon.png|40px|link=Handrail Module]] '''[[Handrail Module]]''' || [[File:Handrail_3d_Templates1.png|40px|link=3D Templates (HR)]] '''[[3D Templates (HR)]]''' || [[File:MSPtemplateicon3.png|40px|link=MSP Templates]] '''[[MSP Templates]]''' || [[File:MSPtemplateicon3.png|40px|link=Motor Sports Templates II]] '''[[Motor Sports Templates II]]'''<br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|[[File:MSPRCT1icon.png|40px|link=Roll Cage Templates]] '''[[Roll Cage Templates]]''' || [[File:BT_APT_Icon2.png|40px|link=Armor Pack Templates]] '''[[Armor Pack Templates]]''' || [[File:Solidworks2.png|40px|link=SolidWorks]] '''[[SolidWorks|SolidWorks]]'''<br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;" <br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #66CDAA; font-size:160%; text-align: center;" | Tutorials<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:exhausttuticon.PNG|40px|link=Exhaust Tutorial]] '''[[Exhaust Tutorial]]''' || [[File:exhausttuticon2.PNG|40px|link=Exhaust Tutorial II]] '''[[Exhaust Tutorial II]]''' || [[File:assemblytuticon.PNG|40px|link=Assembly Tutorial]] '''[[Assembly Tutorial]]''' || [[File:assemblytrainingicon.png|40px|link=Assembly Tutorial II|Assembly Tutorial II]] '''[[Assembly Tutorial II]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:cutting_tutorial.png|40px|link=Cutting Tutorial]] '''[[Cutting Tutorial]]''' || [[File:cutting_tutorial_adv.png|40px|link=Cutting Tutorial (Advanced)]] '''[[Cutting Tutorial (Advanced)|Cutting Tutorial II]]''' || [[File:headertuticon.png|40px|link=Header Design Tutorial]] '''[[Header Design Tutorial]]''' || [[File:harpoonicon.png|40px|link=Harpoon 3D Tutorial]] '''[[Harpoon 3D Tutorial|Harpoon 3D]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:solidworkstuticon.png|40px|link=SolidWorks Import Tutorial]] '''[[SolidWorks Import Tutorial]]''' || [[File:solidworkstutadvicon.png|40px|link=SolidWorks Import Tutorial II]] '''[[SolidWorks Import Tutorial II]]''' || [[File:dimensionstuticon.png|40px|link=Dimensions Tutorial]] '''[[Dimensions Tutorial]]''' || [[File:templateicon.png|40px|link=Template Tutorial]] '''[[Template Tutorial|Template]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:handrailtuticon.png|40px|link=Handrail Tutorial]] '''[[Handrail Tutorial]]''' || [[File:handrailtutIIicon.png|40px|link=Handrail Tutorial II]] '''[[Handrail Tutorial II]]''' || [[File:xyztuticon.png|40px|link=XYZ Part Tutorial]] '''[[XYZ Part Tutorial|XYZ Part]]''' || [[File:reversetuticon.png|40px|link=Reverse Design Tutorial]] '''[[Reverse Design Tutorial|Reverse Design]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:largeradiustuticon.png|40px|link=Large Radius Tutorial]] '''[[Large Radius Tutorial]]''' || [[File:largeradiustutIIicon.png|40px|link=Large Radius Tutorial II]] '''[[Large Radius Tutorial II]]''' || [[File:custicon.png|40px|link=Custom Part Tutorial]] '''[[Custom Part Tutorial|Custom Part]]''' || [[File:cust3dicon.png|40px|link=Custom 3D Tutorial]] '''[[Custom 3D Tutorial|Custom 3D]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:panelcreateicon.png|40px|link=Panel Tutorial]] '''[[Panel Tutorial]]''' || [[File:bendordericon.png|40px|link=Bend Order Tutorial]] '''[[Bend Order Tutorial|Bend Order]] || [[File:plate_to_assembly_icon.png|40px|link=Plate/Sheet Metal to Assembly Transfer]] '''[[Plate/Sheet Metal to Assembly Transfer]]''' || [[File:platetuticon.png|40px|link=Sheet Metal Text]] '''[[Sheet Metal Text]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:platetuticon.png|40px|link=Plate Tutorial|Sheet Metal Tutorial]] '''[[Plate Tutorial|Sheet Metal Tutorial]] || [[File:platetuticon2.png|40px|link=Sheet Metal Tutorial II]] '''[[Sheet Metal Tutorial II]] || [[File:flange_intersection_icon.png|40px|link=Intersecting Flanges Tutorial]] '''[[Intersecting Flanges Tutorial]]'''<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #87CEFA; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Additional Documentation<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_CAD_Articles.png|center|link=Bend-Tech Articles]] || [[File:Bend-Tech_Dragon_A150_Image1.png|center|link=Bend-Tech Dragon - A150 Series]]<br />
|| [[File:Bend-Tech_Dragon_A400_Image1.png|center|link=Bend-Tech Dragon - A400 Series]]<br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|}</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Main_Page&diff=9758Main Page2018-09-05T20:22:56Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div><br />
'''<h3>Welcome to the Official Bend-Tech Wiki</h3>'''<br />
<br />
Use the links below for detailed information on all aspects of the Bend-Tech software products.<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|[[File:Wiki_Help_Info1.png|link=https://youtu.be/Vw7UNV_seQg Wiki Guide Help Video|40px]] '''[https://youtu.be/Vw7UNV_seQg Wiki Guide Help Video]''' || <br />
[[File:Comp_Requirements.png|link=Basic Computer Requirements/Information]] '''[[Basic Computer Requirements/Information]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #E0A366; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Training Class Walkthroughs<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
| ||[[File:QS_training_class1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6w7Ozo9u0Jk|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6w7Ozo9u0Jk Training Class I]''' || [[File:QS_training_class2.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5YUxAIxSHXQ]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5YUxAIxSHXQ Training Class II]''' || [[File:QS_training_class3_SE_advanced.png|link=http://www.bend-tech.com/files/7x_training_class_3.pdf]] '''[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/7x_training_class_3.pdf Training Class III (PDF Only)]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #5882FA; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Bend-Tech 7x CAD Main Wiki<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: center; width="100%;" <br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_CAD_Articles.png|link=Bend-Tech Articles]] || [[File:BT_Product_EZ2.png|link=EZ Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_EZ_3D2.png|link=EZ-3D Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_PRO2.png|link=PRO Guide]] || [[File:BT_Product_SE2.png|link=SE Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_IND4.png|link=Industrial / Dragon Guide]] || [[File:YouTube_Link_Icon1.png|link=Bend-Tech YouTube Videos]]<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #f46200; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Bend-Tech Dragon - A Series Main Wiki<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_Dragon_A150_Image1.png|link=Bend-Tech Dragon - A150 Series]]<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_Dragon_A400_Image1.png|link=Bend-Tech Dragon - A400 Series]]<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #c0c0c0; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Base Product Information Videos<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_EZ1a.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7vESYne3oFw|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7vESYne3oFw EZ]'''<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_EZ_3D1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UOqCLGgt6os|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UOqCLGgt6os EZ-3D]''' <br />
|[[File:BT_Product_PRO1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o2e7MVpVjgo|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o2e7MVpVjgo PRO]''' <br />
|[[File:BT_Product_SE1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jSV7jymGzeY|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jSV7jymGzeY SE]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_IND2.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8_eQCEvd5MQ|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8_eQCEvd5MQ Industrial]''' || [[File:BT_Product1_DragonA400.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9rJ0KFi9qu8]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9rJ0KFi9qu8 Dragon - A150 Series]''' || [[File:BT_Product1_Dragon.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oz1IlPLV4jo]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oz1IlPLV4jo Dragon - A400 Series]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Industrial_/_Dragon_Guide&diff=9756Industrial / Dragon Guide2018-09-05T20:21:48Z<p>Fabcam1: Fabcam1 moved page IND Guide to Industrial / Dragon Guide</p>
<hr />
<div>'''Thank you for purchasing your Industrial Bending Software Product. This page is dedicated to you! Anything that your software is capable of will be addressed on this main page and in its subsequent pages.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:IND_Startup_Screen1.png|center]]<br />
<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #F0E68C; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Set Up & Features Information<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:installationicon.png|link=Installation|40px]] '''[[Installation]]''' || [[File:taskmenu.png|link=taskmenu|40px]] '''[[Task Menu]]'''|| [[File:menubaricon.png|40px|link=Main Menu Bar]] '''[[Main Menu Bar]]''' || [[File:Zoom_Rotate_Pan.png|40px|link=Zoom, Rotate & Pan]] '''[[Zoom, Rotate & Pan]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:setting.png|40px|link=Options]] '''[[Options]]''' || [[File:new_cad_import.png|40px|link=Import]] '''[[Import]]''' || [[File:break_part.png|40px|link=Break Part]] '''[[Break Part]]''' || [[File:offset.png|40px|link=Offset Part]] '''[[Offset Part]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:nesting_icon.png|40px|link=Nesting]] '''[[Nesting]]''' || [[File:calibrationicon.png|40px|link=Calibration]] '''[[Calibration]]''' || [[File:singleparticon.png|40px|link=Single Part -Interface/General Functions]] '''[[Single Part -Interface/General Functions|Single Part Interface]]''' || [[File:stairwizardicon.png|40px|link=Stair Wizard]] '''[[Stair Wizard]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:panelguideicon.png|40px|link=Panel]] '''[[Panel]]''' || [[File:cutting1icon.png|40px|link=Cutting]] '''[[Cutting]]''' || [[File:tube_to_assembly1.png|40px|link=Tube to Assembly Transfer]] '''[[Tube to Assembly Transfer]]''' || [[File:Bend_Order_Simulation.png|40px|link=Bend Order/Simulation]] '''[[Bend Order/Simulation]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Hotkeys_icon1.png|40px|link=Hotkeys]] '''[[Hotkeys]]''' || [[File:Backup_And_Restore1.png|40px|link=Backup & Restore]] '''[[Backup & Restore]]''' || [[File:Seat_Manager1.png|40px|link=Seat Manager]] '''[[Seat Manager]]'''<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #B55656; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Libraries Information<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:die_lib.png|40px|link=Die Library]] '''[[Die Library]]''' || [[File:tube_lib.png|40px|link=Tube/Pipe Library]] '''[[Tube/Pipe Library]]''' || [[File:plate_lib.png|40px|link=Plate/Sheet Library]] '''[[Plate/Sheet Library]]''' || [[File:springback_lib.png|40px|link=SpringBack Library]] '''[[SpringBack Library]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:machine_lib.png|40px|link=Machine Library]] '''[[Machine Library]]''' || [[File:j_bend_lib.png|40px|link=J-Bend Library]] '''[[J-Bend Library]]''' || [[File:geometric_lib2.png|40px|link=Plate: Geometric Library]] '''[[Plate: Geometric Library]]''' || [[File:die_references1.png|40px|link=Die References]] '''[[Die References]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:material_references1.png|40px|link=Material References]] '''[[Material References]]''' || [[File:Bend-Mark_Settimgs1.png|40px|link=Bend Mark Settings]] '''[[Bend Mark Settings]]''' || '''[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/die_calibration_and_springback_library_guide.pdf Die and Springback Overview]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #4682B4; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Designer Documentation<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:tempicon.png|link=Template|40px]] '''[[Template]]''' || [[File:customicon.png|link=Custom Part|40px]] '''[[Custom Part]]''' || [[File:custom3dicon.png|link=Custom 3D Part|40px]] '''[[Custom 3D Part]]''' || [[File:harpoon_icon1.png|link=Harpoon 3D|40px]] '''[[Harpoon 3D]]''' <br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:sketch2Dicon.png|link=Sketch 2D|40px]] '''[[Sketch 2D]]''' || [[File:sketch3Dicon.png|link=Sketch 3D|40px]] '''[[Sketch 3D]]''' || [[File:xyzicon.png|link=XYZ Part|40px]] '''[[XYZ Part]]''' || [[File:reverseicon.png|link=Reverse Design|40px]] '''[[Reverse Design]]''' <br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:straightparticon.png|40px|link=Straight Part]] '''[[Straight Part]]''' || [[File:assemblyicon.png|link=Assembly|40px]] '''[[Assembly]]''' || [[File:BT_Product_IND2.png|40px|link=Industrial Guide]] '''[[Industrial Guide]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #87CEFA; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Module Documentation<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:plateicon1.png|link=Plate|40px]] '''[[Plate|Sheet Metal Module]]''' || [[File:headericon1.png|40px|link=Header Design|Header Design Module]] '''[[Header Design|Header Design Module]]''' || [[File:lricon.png|40px|link=Large Radius Module]] '''[[Large Radius Module]]''' || [[File:exhausticon.png|40px|link=Exhaust Design]] '''[[Exhaust Design]]''' <br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|[[File:hricon.png|40px|link=Handrail Module]] '''[[Handrail Module]]''' || [[File:Handrail_3d_Templates1.png|40px|link=3D Templates (HR)]] '''[[3D Templates (HR)]]''' || [[File:MSPtemplateicon3.png|40px|link=MSP Templates]] '''[[MSP Templates]]''' || [[File:MSPtemplateicon3.png|40px|link=Motor Sports Templates II]] '''[[Motor Sports Templates II]]'''<br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|[[File:MSPRCT1icon.png|40px|link=Roll Cage Templates]] '''[[Roll Cage Templates]]''' || [[File:BT_APT_Icon2.png|40px|link=Armor Pack Templates]] '''[[Armor Pack Templates]]''' || [[File:Solidworks2.png|40px|link=SolidWorks]] '''[[SolidWorks|SolidWorks]]'''<br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;" <br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #66CDAA; font-size:160%; text-align: center;" | Tutorials<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:exhausttuticon.PNG|40px|link=Exhaust Tutorial]] '''[[Exhaust Tutorial]]''' || [[File:exhausttuticon2.PNG|40px|link=Exhaust Tutorial II]] '''[[Exhaust Tutorial II]]''' || [[File:assemblytuticon.PNG|40px|link=Assembly Tutorial]] '''[[Assembly Tutorial]]''' || [[File:assemblytrainingicon.png|40px|link=Assembly Tutorial II|Assembly Tutorial II]] '''[[Assembly Tutorial II]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:cutting_tutorial.png|40px|link=Cutting Tutorial]] '''[[Cutting Tutorial]]''' || [[File:cutting_tutorial_adv.png|40px|link=Cutting Tutorial (Advanced)]] '''[[Cutting Tutorial (Advanced)|Cutting Tutorial II]]''' || [[File:headertuticon.png|40px|link=Header Design Tutorial]] '''[[Header Design Tutorial]]''' || [[File:harpoonicon.png|40px|link=Harpoon 3D Tutorial]] '''[[Harpoon 3D Tutorial|Harpoon 3D]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:solidworkstuticon.png|40px|link=SolidWorks Import Tutorial]] '''[[SolidWorks Import Tutorial]]''' || [[File:solidworkstutadvicon.png|40px|link=SolidWorks Import Tutorial II]] '''[[SolidWorks Import Tutorial II]]''' || [[File:dimensionstuticon.png|40px|link=Dimensions Tutorial]] '''[[Dimensions Tutorial]]''' || [[File:templateicon.png|40px|link=Template Tutorial]] '''[[Template Tutorial|Template]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:handrailtuticon.png|40px|link=Handrail Tutorial]] '''[[Handrail Tutorial]]''' || [[File:handrailtutIIicon.png|40px|link=Handrail Tutorial II]] '''[[Handrail Tutorial II]]''' || [[File:xyztuticon.png|40px|link=XYZ Part Tutorial]] '''[[XYZ Part Tutorial|XYZ Part]]''' || [[File:reversetuticon.png|40px|link=Reverse Design Tutorial]] '''[[Reverse Design Tutorial|Reverse Design]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:largeradiustuticon.png|40px|link=Large Radius Tutorial]] '''[[Large Radius Tutorial]]''' || [[File:largeradiustutIIicon.png|40px|link=Large Radius Tutorial II]] '''[[Large Radius Tutorial II]]''' || [[File:custicon.png|40px|link=Custom Part Tutorial]] '''[[Custom Part Tutorial|Custom Part]]''' || [[File:cust3dicon.png|40px|link=Custom 3D Tutorial]] '''[[Custom 3D Tutorial|Custom 3D]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:panelcreateicon.png|40px|link=Panel Tutorial]] '''[[Panel Tutorial]]''' || [[File:bendordericon.png|40px|link=Bend Order Tutorial]] '''[[Bend Order Tutorial|Bend Order]] || [[File:plate_to_assembly_icon.png|40px|link=Plate/Sheet Metal to Assembly Transfer]] '''[[Plate/Sheet Metal to Assembly Transfer]]''' || [[File:platetuticon.png|40px|link=Sheet Metal Text]] '''[[Sheet Metal Text]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:platetuticon.png|40px|link=Plate Tutorial|Sheet Metal Tutorial]] '''[[Plate Tutorial|Sheet Metal Tutorial]] || [[File:platetuticon2.png|40px|link=Sheet Metal Tutorial II]] '''[[Sheet Metal Tutorial II]] || [[File:flange_intersection_icon.png|40px|link=Intersecting Flanges Tutorial]] '''[[Intersecting Flanges Tutorial]]'''<br />
|}</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=IND_Guide&diff=9757IND Guide2018-09-05T20:21:48Z<p>Fabcam1: Fabcam1 moved page IND Guide to Industrial / Dragon Guide</p>
<hr />
<div>#REDIRECT [[Industrial / Dragon Guide]]</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=SE_Guide&diff=9755SE Guide2018-09-05T20:19:03Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''Thank you for purchasing your SE Bending Software Product. This page is dedicated to you! Anything that your software is capable of will be addressed on this main page and in its subsequent pages.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:SE_Startup_Screen1.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #F0E68C; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Set Up & Features Information<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:installationicon.png|link=Installation|40px]] '''[[Installation]]''' || [[File:taskmenu.png|link=taskmenu|40px]] '''[[Task Menu]]'''|| [[File:menubaricon.png|40px|link=SE Main Menu Bar]] '''[[SE Main Menu Bar|Main Menu Bar]]''' || [[File:Zoom_Rotate_Pan.png|40px|link=Zoom, Rotate & Pan]] '''[[Zoom, Rotate & Pan]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:setting.png|40px|link=SE Options]] '''[[SE Options|Options]]''' || [[File:calibrationicon.png|40px|link=Calibration]] '''[[Calibration]]''' || [[File:break_part.png|40px|link=Break Part]] '''[[Break Part]]''' || [[File:offset.png|40px|link=Offset Part]] '''[[Offset Part]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
| [[File:singleparticon.png|40px|link=SE Single Part Interface]] '''[[SE Single Part Interface|Single Part Interface]]''' || [[File:cutting1icon.png|40px|link=Cutting]] '''[[Cutting]]''' || [[File:tube_to_assembly1.png|40px|link=Tube to Assembly Transfer]] '''[[Tube to Assembly Transfer]]''' || [[File:Bend_Order_Simulation.png|40px|link=Bend Order/Simulation]] '''[[Bend Order/Simulation]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:panelguideicon.png|40px|link=Panel]] '''[[Panel]]''' || [[File:Hotkeys_icon1.png|40px|link=Hotkeys]] '''[[Hotkeys]]''' || [[File:Backup_And_Restore1.png|40px|link=Backup & Restore]] '''[[Backup & Restore]]''' || [[File:Seat_Manager1.png|40px|link=Seat Manager]] '''[[Seat Manager]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:new_cad_import.png|40px|link=SE CAD Import|CAD Import]] '''[[SE CAD Import|CAD Import]]''' || [[File:nesting_icon.png|40px|link=Nesting]] '''[[Nesting]]''' || [[File:stairwizardicon.png|40px|link=Stair Wizard]] '''[[Stair Wizard]]'''<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #B55656; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Libraries Information<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:die_lib.png|40px|link=SE Die Library]] '''[[SE Die Library|Die Library]]''' || [[File:tube_lib.png|40px|link=SE Tube/Pipe Library]] '''[[SE Tube/Pipe Library|Tube/Pipe Library]]''' || [[File:plate_lib.png|40px|link=Plate/Sheet Library]] '''[[Plate/Sheet Library]]''' || [[File:springback_lib.png|40px|link=SpringBack Library]] '''[[SpringBack Library]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:machine_lib.png|40px|link=Machine Library]] '''[[Machine Library]]''' || [[File:j_bend_lib.png|40px|link=J-Bend Library]] '''[[J-Bend Library]]''' || [[File:geometric_lib2.png|40px|link=Plate: Geometric Library]] '''[[Plate: Geometric Library]]''' || [[File:die_references1.png|40px|link=Die References]] '''[[Die References]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:material_references1.png|40px|link=Material References]] '''[[Material References]]''' || '''[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/die_calibration_and_springback_library_guide.pdf Die and Springback Overview]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #4682B4; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Designer Documentation<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:tempicon.png|link=Template|40px]] '''[[Template]]''' || [[File:customicon.png|link=Custom Part|40px]] '''[[Custom Part]]''' || [[File:custom3dicon.png|link=Custom 3D Part|40px]] '''[[Custom 3D Part]]''' || [[File:harpoon_icon1.png|link=Harpoon 3D|40px]] '''[[Harpoon 3D]]''' <br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:sketch2Dicon.png|link=Sketch 2D|40px]] '''[[Sketch 2D]]''' || [[File:sketch3Dicon.png|link=Sketch 3D|40px]] '''[[Sketch 3D]]''' || [[File:straightparticon.png|40px|link=Straight Part]] '''[[Straight Part]]''' || [[File:assemblyicon.png|link=Assembly|40px]] '''[[Assembly]]''' || <br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:xyzicon.png|link=XYZ Part|40px]] '''[[XYZ Part]]''' || [[File:reverseicon.png|link=Reverse Design|40px]] '''[[Reverse Design]]'''<br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #87CEFA; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Module Documentation<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:plateicon1.png|link=Plate|40px]] '''[[Plate|Sheet Metal Module]]''' || [[File:headericon1.png|40px|link=Header Design|Header Design Module]] '''[[Header Design|Header Design Module]]''' || [[File:lricon.png|40px|link=Large Radius Module]] '''[[Large Radius Module]]''' || [[File:exhausticon.png|40px|link=Exhaust Design]] '''[[Exhaust Design]]''' <br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|[[File:MSPtemplateicon3.png|40px|link=MSP Templates]] '''[[MSP Templates]]''' || [[File:MSPtemplateicon3.png|40px|link=Motor Sports Templates II]] '''[[Motor Sports Templates II]]''' || [[File:MSPRCT1icon.png|40px|link=Roll Cage Templates]] '''[[Roll Cage Templates]]''' || [[File:BT_APT_Icon2.png|40px|link=Armor Pack Templates]] '''[[Armor Pack Templates]]'''<br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|[[File:hricon.png|40px|link=Handrail Module]] '''[[Handrail Module]]''' || [[File:Handrail_3d_Templates1.png|40px|link=3D Templates (HR)]] '''[[3D Templates (HR)]]''' || [[File:Solidworks2.png|40px|link=SolidWorks]] '''[[SolidWorks|SolidWorks]]''' <br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;" <br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #66CDAA; font-size:160%; text-align: center;" | Tutorials<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:templateicon.png|40px|link=Template Tutorial]] '''[[Template Tutorial|Template]]''' || [[File:custicon.png|40px|link=Custom Part Tutorial]] '''[[Custom Part Tutorial|Custom Part]]''' || [[File:cust3dicon.png|40px|link=Custom 3D Tutorial]] '''[[Custom 3D Tutorial|Custom 3D]]''' || [[File:harpoonicon.png|40px|link=Harpoon 3D Tutorial]] '''[[Harpoon 3D Tutorial|Harpoon 3D]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:assemblytuticon.PNG|40px|link=Assembly Tutorial]] '''[[Assembly Tutorial]]''' || [[File:assemblytrainingicon.png|40px|link=Assembly Tutorial II|Assembly Tutorial II]] '''[[Assembly Tutorial II]] || [[File:cutting_tutorial.png|40px|link=Cutting Tutorial]] '''[[Cutting Tutorial]]''' || [[File:cutting_tutorial_adv.png|40px|link=Cutting Tutorial (Advanced)]] '''[[Cutting Tutorial (Advanced)|Cutting Tutorial II]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:dimensionstuticon.png|40px|link=Dimensions Tutorial]] '''[[Dimensions Tutorial]]''' || [[File:bendordericon.png|40px|link=Bend Order Tutorial]] '''[[Bend Order Tutorial|Bend Order]]''' || [[File:largeradiustuticon.png|40px|link=Large Radius Tutorial]] '''[[Large Radius Tutorial]]''' || [[File:largeradiustutIIicon.png|40px|link=Large Radius Tutorial II]] '''[[Large Radius Tutorial II]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:exhausttuticon.PNG|40px|link=Exhaust Tutorial]] '''[[Exhaust Tutorial]]''' || [[File:exhausttuticon2.PNG|40px|link=Exhaust Tutorial II]] '''[[Exhaust Tutorial II]]''' || [[File:headertuticon.png|40px|link=Header Design Tutorial]] '''[[Header Design Tutorial]]''' || [[File:panelcreateicon.png|40px|link=Panel Tutorial]] '''[[Panel Tutorial]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:platetuticon.png|40px|link=Sheet Metal Text]] '''[[Sheet Metal Text]]''' || [[File:platetuticon.png|40px|link=Plate Tutorial|Sheet Metal Tutorial]] '''[[Plate Tutorial|Sheet Metal Tutorial]] || [[File:platetuticon2.png|40px|link=Sheet Metal Tutorial II]] '''[[Sheet Metal Tutorial II]] || [[File:plate_to_assembly_icon.png|40px|link=Plate/Sheet Metal to Assembly Transfer]] '''[[Plate/Sheet Metal to Assembly Transfer]]'''<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #87CEFA; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Additional Documentation<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_CAD_Articles.png|center|link=Bend-Tech Articles]]<br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|}</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=EZ-3D_Guide&diff=9754EZ-3D Guide2018-09-05T20:18:45Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''Thank you for purchasing your EZ-3D Bending Software Product. This page is dedicated to you! Anything that your software is capable of will be addressed on this main page and in its subsequent pages.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:EZ_3D_Startup_Screen1.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 20px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #F0E68C; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Set Up & Features Information<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:installationicon.png|link=Installation|40px]] '''[[Installation]]''' || [[File:taskmenu.png|link=taskmenu|40px]] '''[[Task Menu]]'''|| [[File:menubaricon.png|40px|link=EZ-3D Main Menu Bar]] '''[[EZ-3D Main Menu Bar|Main Menu Bar]]''' || [[File:Zoom_Rotate_Pan.png|40px|link=Zoom, Rotate & Pan]] '''[[Zoom, Rotate & Pan]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:setting.png|40px|link=EZ-3D Options]] '''[[EZ-3D Options|Options]]''' || [[File:calibrationicon.png|40px|link=Calibration]] '''[[Calibration]]''' || [[File:singleparticon.png|40px|link=EZ-3D Single Part Interface]] '''[[EZ-3D Single Part Interface|Single Part Interface]]''' || <br />
[[File:Hotkeys_icon1.png|40px|link=Hotkeys]] '''[[Hotkeys]]''' <br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Backup_And_Restore1.png|40px|link=Backup & Restore]] '''[[Backup & Restore]]''' || [[File:Seat_Manager1.png|40px|link=Seat Manager]] '''[[Seat Manager]]''' || [[File:Bend_Order_Simulation.png|40px|link=Bend Order/Simulation]] '''[[Bend Order/Simulation]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 20px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #B55656; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Libraries Information<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:die_lib.png|40px|link=EZ-3D Die Library]] '''[[EZ-3D Die Library|Die Library]]''' || [[File:tube_lib.png|40px|link=EZ-3D Tube/Pipe Library]] '''[[EZ-3D Tube/Pipe Library|Tube/Pipe Library]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 20px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #4682B4; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Designer Documentation<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:tempicon.png|link=Template|40px]] '''[[Template]]''' || [[File:customicon.png|link=Custom Part|40px]] '''[[Custom Part]]''' || [[File:custom3dicon.png|link=Custom 3D Part|40px]] '''[[Custom 3D Part]]''' || [[File:harpoon_icon1.png|link=Harpoon 3D|40px]] '''[[Harpoon 3D]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:sketch2Dicon.png|link=Sketch 2D|40px]] '''[[Sketch 2D]]''' || [[File:sketch3Dicon.png|link=Sketch 3D|40px]] '''[[Sketch 3D]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;" <br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #66CDAA; font-size:160%; text-align: center;" | Tutorials<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:templateicon.png|40px|link=Template Tutorial]] '''[[Template Tutorial|Template]]''' || [[File:custicon.png|40px|link=Custom Part Tutorial]] '''[[Custom Part Tutorial|Custom Part]]''' || [[File:cust3dicon.png|40px|link=Custom 3D Tutorial]] '''[[Custom 3D Tutorial|Custom 3D]]''' || [[File:harpoonicon.png|40px|link=Harpoon 3D Tutorial]] '''[[Harpoon 3D Tutorial|Harpoon 3D]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:bendordericon.png|40px|link=Bend Order Tutorial]] '''[[Bend Order Tutorial|Bend Order]]<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #87CEFA; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Additional Documentation<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_CAD_Articles.png|center|link=Bend-Tech Articles]]<br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|}</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=EZ_Guide&diff=9753EZ Guide2018-09-05T20:18:30Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''Thank you for purchasing your EZ Bending Software Product. This page is dedicated to you! Anything that your software is capable of will be addressed on this main page and in its subsequent pages.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:EZ_Startup_Screen1.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 20px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #F0E68C; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Set Up & Features Information<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:installationicon.png|link=Installation|40px]] '''[[Installation]]''' || [[File:taskmenu.png|link=taskmenu|40px]] '''[[Task Menu]]'''|| [[File:menubaricon.png|40px|link=EZ Main Menu Bar]] '''[[EZ Main Menu Bar|Main Menu Bar]]''' || [[File:Zoom_Rotate_Pan.png|40px|link=Zoom, Rotate & Pan]] '''[[Zoom, Rotate & Pan]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:setting.png|40px|link=EZ Options]] '''[[EZ Options|Options]]''' || [[File:calibrationicon.png|40px|link=Calibration]] '''[[Calibration]]''' || [[File:singleparticon.png|40px|link=EZ Single Part Interface]] '''[[EZ Single Part Interface|Single Part Interface]]''' || <br />
[[File:Hotkeys_icon1.png|40px|link=Hotkeys]] '''[[Hotkeys]]''' <br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Backup_And_Restore1.png|40px|link=Backup & Restore]] '''[[Backup & Restore]]''' || [[File:Seat_Manager1.png|40px|link=Seat Manager]] '''[[Seat Manager]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 20px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #B55656; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Libraries Information<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:die_lib.png|40px|link=EZ Die Library]] '''[[EZ Die Library|Die Library]]''' || [[File:tube_lib.png|40px|link=EZ Tube/Pipe Library]] '''[[EZ Tube/Pipe Library|Tube/Pipe Library]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 20px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #4682B4; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Designer Documentation<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:tempicon.png|link=Template|40px]] '''[[Template]]''' || [[File:customicon.png|link=Custom Part|40px]] '''[[Custom Part]]''' || [[File:sketch2Dicon.png|link=Sketch 2D|40px]] '''[[Sketch 2D]]''' <br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;" <br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #66CDAA; font-size:160%; text-align: center;" | Tutorials<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:templateicon.png|40px|link=Template Tutorial]] '''[[Template Tutorial|Template]]''' || [[File:custicon.png|40px|link=Custom Part Tutorial]] '''[[Custom Part Tutorial|Custom Part]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #87CEFA; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Additional Documentation<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_CAD_Articles.png|center|link=Bend-Tech Articles]]<br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|}</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=PRO_Guide&diff=9752PRO Guide2018-09-05T20:17:58Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''Thank you for purchasing your PRO Bending Software Product. This page is dedicated to you! Anything that your software is capable of will be addressed on this main page and in its subsequent pages.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:PRO_Startup_Screen1.png|center]]<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #F0E68C; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Set Up & Features Information<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:installationicon.png|link=Installation|40px]] '''[[Installation]]''' || [[File:taskmenu.png|link=taskmenu|40px]] '''[[Task Menu]]'''|| [[File:menubaricon.png|40px|link=PRO Main Menu Bar]] '''[[PRO Main Menu Bar|Main Menu Bar]]''' || [[File:Zoom_Rotate_Pan.png|40px|link=Zoom, Rotate & Pan]] '''[[Zoom, Rotate & Pan]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:setting.png|40px|link=PRO Options]] '''[[PRO Options|Options]]''' || [[File:calibrationicon.png|40px|link=Calibration]] '''[[Calibration]]''' || [[File:break_part.png|40px|link=Break Part]] '''[[Break Part]]''' || [[File:offset.png|40px|link=Offset Part]] '''[[Offset Part]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
| [[File:singleparticon.png|40px|link=PRO Single Part Interface]] '''[[PRO Single Part Interface|Single Part Interface]]''' || [[File:cutting1icon.png|40px|link=Cutting]] '''[[Cutting]]''' || [[File:tube_to_assembly1.png|40px|link=Tube to Assembly Transfer]] '''[[Tube to Assembly Transfer]]''' || [[File:Bend_Order_Simulation.png|40px|link=Bend Order/Simulation]] '''[[Bend Order/Simulation]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:panelguideicon.png|40px|link=Panel]] '''[[Panel]]''' || [[File:Hotkeys_icon1.png|40px|link=Hotkeys]] '''[[Hotkeys]]''' || [[File:Backup_And_Restore1.png|40px|link=Backup & Restore]] '''[[Backup & Restore]]''' || [[File:Seat_Manager1.png|40px|link=Seat Manager]] '''[[Seat Manager]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #B55656; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Libraries Information<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:die_lib.png|40px|link=PRO Die Library]] '''[[PRO Die Library|Die Library]]''' || [[File:tube_lib.png|40px|link=PRO Tube/Pipe Library]] '''[[PRO Tube/Pipe Library|Tube/Pipe Library]]''' || [[File:plate_lib.png|40px|link=Plate/Sheet Library]] '''[[Plate/Sheet Library]]''' || [[File:springback_lib.png|40px|link=SpringBack Library]] '''[[SpringBack Library]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:j_bend_lib.png|40px|link=J-Bend Library]] '''[[J-Bend Library]]''' || [[File:geometric_lib2.png|40px|link=Plate: Geometric Library]] '''[[Plate: Geometric Library]]''' || '''[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/die_calibration_and_springback_library_guide.pdf Die and Springback Overview]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #4682B4; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Designer Documentation<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:tempicon.png|link=Template|40px]] '''[[Template]]''' || [[File:customicon.png|link=Custom Part|40px]] '''[[Custom Part]]''' || [[File:custom3dicon.png|link=Custom 3D Part|40px]] '''[[Custom 3D Part]]''' || [[File:harpoon_icon1.png|link=Harpoon 3D|40px]] '''[[Harpoon 3D]]''' <br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:sketch2Dicon.png|link=Sketch 2D|40px]] '''[[Sketch 2D]]''' || [[File:sketch3Dicon.png|link=Sketch 3D|40px]] '''[[Sketch 3D]]''' || [[File:straightparticon.png|40px|link=Straight Part]] '''[[Straight Part]]''' || [[File:assemblyicon.png|link=Assembly|40px]] '''[[Assembly]]''' || <br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #87CEFA; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Module Documentation<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:plateicon1.png|link=Plate|40px]] '''[[Plate|Sheet Metal Module]]''' || [[File:headericon1.png|40px|link=Header Design|Header Design Module]] '''[[Header Design|Header Design Module]]''' || [[File:lricon.png|40px|link=Large Radius Module]] '''[[Large Radius Module]]''' || [[File:exhausticon.png|40px|link=Exhaust Design]] '''[[Exhaust Design]]''' <br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|[[File:MSPtemplateicon3.png|40px|link=MSP Templates]] '''[[MSP Templates]]''' || [[File:MSPtemplateicon3.png|40px|link=Motor Sports Templates II]] '''[[Motor Sports Templates II]]''' || [[File:MSPRCT1icon.png|40px|link=Roll Cage Templates]] '''[[Roll Cage Templates]]''' || [[File:BT_APT_Icon2.png|40px|link=Armor Pack Templates]] '''[[Armor Pack Templates]]'''<br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;" <br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #66CDAA; font-size:160%; text-align: center;" | Tutorials<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:templateicon.png|40px|link=Template Tutorial]] '''[[Template Tutorial|Template]]''' || [[File:custicon.png|40px|link=Custom Part Tutorial]] '''[[Custom Part Tutorial|Custom Part]]''' || [[File:cust3dicon.png|40px|link=Custom 3D Tutorial]] '''[[Custom 3D Tutorial|Custom 3D]]''' || [[File:harpoonicon.png|40px|link=Harpoon 3D Tutorial]] '''[[Harpoon 3D Tutorial|Harpoon 3D]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:assemblytuticon.PNG|40px|link=Assembly Tutorial]] '''[[Assembly Tutorial]]''' || [[File:assemblytrainingicon.png|40px|link=Assembly Tutorial II|Assembly Tutorial II]] '''[[Assembly Tutorial II]] || [[File:cutting_tutorial.png|40px|link=Cutting Tutorial]] '''[[Cutting Tutorial]]''' || [[File:cutting_tutorial_adv.png|40px|link=Cutting Tutorial (Advanced)]] '''[[Cutting Tutorial (Advanced)|Cutting Tutorial II]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:dimensionstuticon.png|40px|link=Dimensions Tutorial]] '''[[Dimensions Tutorial]]''' || [[File:bendordericon.png|40px|link=Bend Order Tutorial]] '''[[Bend Order Tutorial|Bend Order]]''' || [[File:largeradiustuticon.png|40px|link=Large Radius Tutorial]] '''[[Large Radius Tutorial]]''' || [[File:largeradiustutIIicon.png|40px|link=Large Radius Tutorial II]] '''[[Large Radius Tutorial II]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:exhausttuticon.PNG|40px|link=Exhaust Tutorial]] '''[[Exhaust Tutorial]]''' || [[File:exhausttuticon2.PNG|40px|link=Exhaust Tutorial II]] '''[[Exhaust Tutorial II]]''' || [[File:headertuticon.png|40px|link=Header Design Tutorial]] '''[[Header Design Tutorial]]''' || [[File:panelcreateicon.png|40px|link=Panel Tutorial]] '''[[Panel Tutorial]]'''<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 60px;"<br />
|[[File:platetuticon.png|40px|link=Sheet Metal Text]] '''[[Sheet Metal Text]]''' || [[File:platetuticon.png|40px|link=Plate Tutorial|Sheet Metal Tutorial]] '''[[Plate Tutorial|Sheet Metal Tutorial]] || [[File:platetuticon2.png|40px|link=Sheet Metal Tutorial II]] '''[[Sheet Metal Tutorial II]] || [[File:plate_to_assembly_icon.png|40px|link=Plate/Sheet Metal to Assembly Transfer]] '''[[Plate/Sheet Metal to Assembly Transfer]]'''<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #87CEFA; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Additional Documentation<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_CAD_Articles.png|center|link=Bend-Tech Articles]]<br />
|- style="height:80px;"<br />
|}</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Bend-Tech_Articles&diff=9751Bend-Tech Articles2018-09-05T19:27:48Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div><br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #A0A0A0; font-size:160%; text-align: center;" | Help Articles<br />
|-<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="3" style="background-color: #A0A0A0; text-align: center;" | General<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[[Finding and Opening Old Part Files]]<br />
*[[How Radius Effects Large Angle Bends]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Importing Old Data Libraries]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Bend-Tech SW Module Installation]]<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="3" style="background-color: #A0A0A0; text-align: center;" | Assembly<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[[Creating PickPoints using Angle & Plane]]<br />
*[[My Bent Part Doesn't Follow my PickPoints]]<br />
*[[PickPoints - Single]]<br />
*[[PickPoints - 2 Points]]<br />
*[[PickPoints - Plane]]<br />
*[[PickPoints - Arc]]<br />
*[[Remove PickPoint]]<br />
*[[Create a Bent Part]]<br />
*[[Using Tangent for Bent Part]]<br />
*[[Paste Part]]<br />
*[[Creating a Straight Part]]<br />
*[[Creating a Horizontal, Vertical, or Linear Dimension]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Creating an Angle Dimension]]<br />
*[[Changing the Text of a Dimension]]<br />
*[[Moving a Dimension]]<br />
*[[Removing or Deleting a Dimension]]<br />
*[[Dimensioning - Setting/Changing Defaults]]<br />
*[[Dimensioning - Views are Overlapping]]<br />
*[[Creating a bmp, jpg, gif, etc...]]<br />
*[[Settings]]<br />
*[[Projection]]<br />
*[[Paste Part is Attached to the Wrong End]]<br />
*[[Mirror a Part]]<br />
*[[Loading a Part into Assembly]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Changing the Color of a Part]]<br />
*[[Changing the Material or Die of a Part]]<br />
*[[Changing the Current Material & Die]]<br />
*[[Changing a "Part" Name]]<br />
*[[Changing a "Master" Part Name]]<br />
*[[Deleting or Removing a Part]]<br />
*[[Moving a Part]]<br />
*[[Moving a Feature]]<br />
*[[Important Issues to Know About Assembly]]<br />
*[[Finding the Cut Length and Bending info. for a Part]]<br />
*[[Using the Cutting Plane Function]]<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #A0A0A0; text-align: center;" | Assembly Cutting<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[[Finding the Length to cut all the Straight Parts]] <br />
*[[Cutting a Tube to Multiple Tubes]] <br />
*[[Cutting the End of a Part]] <br />
|<br />
*[[Hole Saw/Mill vs. Plasma/Grinder]] <br />
*[[Cutting a Tube to a Tangent of a Bend]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Cutting the End of a Straight Tube]]<br />
*[[How To Use Cutting Wrappers]]<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #A0A0A0; text-align: center;" | Results<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[[Dimension Location]] <br />
*[[Rotation]] <br />
*[[Decimal & Fraction]] <br />
|<br />
*[[How to Mark and Run the Material through the Die]] <br />
*[[Using an Angle Level]] <br />
|<br />
*[[Bend Angle & Spring Angle]]<br />
*[[Dial Level use for Rotation]]<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%" <br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #A0A0A0; text-align: center;" | Material & Tooling<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[[Die Edge]] <br />
*[[What does the * (Asterisk) Mean in a Formula]] <br />
*[[Changing the Radius for only 1 Bend]] <br />
|<br />
*[[Using Spring Charts]] <br />
*[[My Software only came with 1 Tool and 1 Material]] <br />
*[[I use the same Die for 2 Different Materials]] <br />
|<br />
*[[Where do I find the Menu to add Material/Tooling?]]<br />
*[[Start using Assembly without Calibrating my Die?]] <br />
*[[My Material or Tooling Library won't Update]]<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%" <br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #A0A0A0; text-align: center;" | Templates<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[[The Template Entry Boxes are Black]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Railing Templates]]<br />
|<br />
*[[My Part isn't coming out with the Dimensions I entered]]<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="3" style="background-color: #A0A0A0; text-align: center;" | Custom Part<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[[Must have some Straight Lengths at Both Ends]]<br />
*[[How do I have a 180 degree Bend?]]<br />
*[[What is Apex?]]<br />
*[[Custom Part uses the Center Line!]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Make a 3D Part in Custom 3D Part]]<br />
*[[Start Angle?]]<br />
*[[I know the Straight Leg Lengths, Angles, and Rotations]]<br />
|<br />
*[[How can the Material Bend the Other Direction?]]<br />
*[[Apex vs. Tangent]]<br />
*[[New Rise & Run Feature]]<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
! colspan="3" style="background-color: #A0A0A0; text-align: center;" | Custom 3D<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[[Making a 180 Degree Bend in Custom 3D]]<br />
*[[I know the Bend Angle and Length]]<br />
*[[How to Make a Stinger]]<br />
*[[Example 1 (90 Degree Bends)]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Example 2 (Under 90 Degree Bends)]]<br />
*[[Example 3 (Over 90 Degree Bends)]]<br />
*[[Example 4 (90 Degree Bends, Move in 2 Directions)]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Example 5 (Under 90 Degree bends, Move in 3 Directions)]]<br />
*[[Rules of Custom 3D]]<br />
*[[Understanding the "Tri-Star"]]<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="3" style="background-color: #A0A0A0; text-align: center;" | XYZ<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[[Creating a Double-Beveled Hoop Using Mirroring]]<br />
*[[Using the Mirror Function]]<br />
*[[Finding Values with only the Bend Angle and Length]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Making a 180 Degree Bend in XYZ]]<br />
*[[XYZ Example 1 (90 Degree Bends)]]<br />
*[[XYZ Example 2 (Under 90 Degree Bend)]]<br />
|<br />
*[[XYZ Example 3 (Over 90 Degree Bends)]]<br />
*[[XYZ Example 4 (90 Degree Bends, Move in 2 Directions)]]<br />
*[[XYZ Example 5 (Under 90 Degree Bends, Move in 3 Directions)]]<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="3" style="background-color: #A0A0A0; text-align: center;" | Calibration<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[[What is Bend Location Offset?]]<br />
*[[What is Calibrated CLR?]]<br />
|<br />
*[[What is CLR?]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Calibration - What Should I Use; Book or Button?]]<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="3" style="background-color: #A0A0A0; text-align: center;" | Simulation<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[[Bend Order Simulation]]<br />
*[[Transitions]]<br />
|<br />
*[[The Simulation Viewer Buttons]]<br />
*[[Preset Bend Order Buttons]]<br />
<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="3" style="background-color: #A0A0A0; text-align: center;" | Import<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[[Import|Importing Files]]<br />
*[[Importing a DXF File]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Exporting a DXF File]]<br />
|<br />
*[[STEP and IGES Import - Part Definition|Importing a STEP or IGES File]]<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="3" style="background-color: #A0A0A0; text-align: center;" | Sheet Metal/Plate<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[[Copy and Paste Flanges]]<br />
*[[Creating a Flat DXF File From a Bent Part]]<br />
*[[Transferring a SM Part Into a Tube Project]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Bridging]]<br />
|}</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Line_Up_the_Templates&diff=9750Line Up the Templates2018-09-05T19:26:32Z<p>Fabcam1: Fabcam1 moved page Line Up the Templates to How To Use Cutting Wrappers</p>
<hr />
<div>#REDIRECT [[How To Use Cutting Wrappers]]</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=How_To_Use_Cutting_Wrappers&diff=9749How To Use Cutting Wrappers2018-09-05T19:26:31Z<p>Fabcam1: Fabcam1 moved page Line Up the Templates to How To Use Cutting Wrappers</p>
<hr />
<div>'''How To Use Cutting Wrappers'''<br />
<br />
The wrappers have 2 calibration lines on them. One is for rotation alignment and the other is for location down the tube.<br />
<br />
[[File:Cutting1.jpg]]<br />
<br />
<br />
There are 3 different setups for the templates:<br />
<br />
'''Straight tube, one end cut'''<br />
<br />
'''Straight tube, both ends cut'''<br />
<br />
'''Bent tube, either end cut'''<br />
<br />
<br />
'''1: Straight Tube, One End Cut:'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Cutting2.jpg]]<br />
<br />
<br />
There is no rotary line up (blue line up line) and the location calibration (red line) needs to be placed the distance labeled from the opposite end. [21 3/16 in our case]<br />
<br />
[[File:Cutting3.jpg]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''2: Straight Tube, Both Ends Cut:'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Cutting4.jpg]]<br />
<br />
'''NOTE: The above pic shows cutting on both ends of the tube in the same picture. This is shown in the software as one end at a time.'''<br />
<br />
<br />
Line the rotary lines down the tube (blue line) and the location calibration (red line) needs to be placed at the distanced labeled from each other. [19 9/16 in our case]<br />
<br />
[[File:Cutting5.jpg]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''3) Bent Tube, Either End Cut:'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Cutting6.jpg]]<br />
<br />
Line the rotary line with the out-most radius of the arc as shown in the following picture. The location line will depend on the check-box value of '''"Distance to Perp of Bend"'''.<br />
<br />
If it is '''Distance to Perp''' is checked then you will come off of the Perp (apex for bends under 90 degrees) for the location line as shown in the following pic.<br />
<br />
[[File:Cutting7.jpg]]<br />
<br />
<br />
If '''Distance to Perp''' is not checked, it will be '''Distance to end.''' You will come off the end of the tube as shown in the next pic.<br />
<br />
[[File:Cutting8.jpg]]</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=How_To_Use_Cutting_Wrappers&diff=9748How To Use Cutting Wrappers2018-09-05T19:25:06Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''How To Use Cutting Wrappers'''<br />
<br />
The wrappers have 2 calibration lines on them. One is for rotation alignment and the other is for location down the tube.<br />
<br />
[[File:Cutting1.jpg]]<br />
<br />
<br />
There are 3 different setups for the templates:<br />
<br />
'''Straight tube, one end cut'''<br />
<br />
'''Straight tube, both ends cut'''<br />
<br />
'''Bent tube, either end cut'''<br />
<br />
<br />
'''1: Straight Tube, One End Cut:'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Cutting2.jpg]]<br />
<br />
<br />
There is no rotary line up (blue line up line) and the location calibration (red line) needs to be placed the distance labeled from the opposite end. [21 3/16 in our case]<br />
<br />
[[File:Cutting3.jpg]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''2: Straight Tube, Both Ends Cut:'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Cutting4.jpg]]<br />
<br />
'''NOTE: The above pic shows cutting on both ends of the tube in the same picture. This is shown in the software as one end at a time.'''<br />
<br />
<br />
Line the rotary lines down the tube (blue line) and the location calibration (red line) needs to be placed at the distanced labeled from each other. [19 9/16 in our case]<br />
<br />
[[File:Cutting5.jpg]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''3) Bent Tube, Either End Cut:'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Cutting6.jpg]]<br />
<br />
Line the rotary line with the out-most radius of the arc as shown in the following picture. The location line will depend on the check-box value of '''"Distance to Perp of Bend"'''.<br />
<br />
If it is '''Distance to Perp''' is checked then you will come off of the Perp (apex for bends under 90 degrees) for the location line as shown in the following pic.<br />
<br />
[[File:Cutting7.jpg]]<br />
<br />
<br />
If '''Distance to Perp''' is not checked, it will be '''Distance to end.''' You will come off the end of the tube as shown in the next pic.<br />
<br />
[[File:Cutting8.jpg]]</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Large_Radius_Tutorial&diff=9747Large Radius Tutorial2018-07-23T16:55:27Z<p>Fabcam1: /* Transferring the Part */</p>
<hr />
<div>'''This tutorial is designed to walk the user through creating an Assembly design and creating a large radius part. See the [[Large Radius Module]] for initial information regarding the Large Radius Module.'''<br />
<br />
==Things To Know==<br />
"'''If you are using a roll bender, then the Bump Bending portion of this tutorial will not be necessary for you. Bump Bending is an alternative to creating a large radius part and is geared towards the needs of users with rotary draw and rotary compression benders.'''"<br />
<br />
*''This tutorial is designed to walk the user through creating an Assembly design and creating a large radius part. As you go through this tutorial, later procedures will assume that you understand all earlier procedures. Because of this, it is very important that you carefully step through this guide, understanding everything along the way and following all steps in order.''<br />
<br />
*'''A few key items need to be addressed before starting the step-by-step instructions of this tutorial. It is very important for Bend-Tech users to completely understand these items:'''<br />
<br />
;1) [[PickPoints]]<br />
:PICKPOINTS ARE USED FOR EVERYTHING. The Assembly part of the software is largely run in full 3D. Because a computer screen is only 2D, there is an unlimited amount of depth behind and in front of the cursor. A PickPoint is a point in 3D space that can be used for creating, editing, and placing parts in Header design. PickPoints can be placed in a 2D environment by having their depth manually entered in the appropriate value fields.<br />
<br />
:*There are 2 types of PickPoints; Those automatically created by the part by default (various colors) and user-defined points (green). In addition, the initial (0,0,0) point is an automatic point that resides at the center of the Tri-Star. The Tri-Star is our directional definition locator. <br />
<br />
;2) Center Line & Apex <br />
:*Center Line: In the Assembly interface environment we are working ''exclusively'' with the center-line of a part, as compared to the inside or outside.<br />
<br />
:*Apex: Most bend locations are created in the Assembly interface with the '''Apex'''. Our definition of apex is the intersection of the straight tubes as if there wasn’t a radius. <br />
:This is demonstrated in the picture below.<br />
<br />
[[File:W5.PNG]]<br />
<br />
<br />
;3) Locational Orientation<br />
:*Designing seems to work the best if users imagine they are standing behind the vehicle at a 45 degree angle. This way left is left and right is right. Take a minute and examine the Tri-Star to get your orientation. <br />
<br />
:Notice how the truck in the picture is setup with the same orientation.<br />
<br />
[[File:W6.JPG|x140px]] [[File:W7.PNG]]<br />
<br />
<br />
;4) Defining Parts<br />
:*It is possible to create parts in the template and custom part interfaces, however, starting out this way tends to get confusing for new users of the software. It appears that there is a higher level of success with customers who start out designing parts directly in the Assembly interface.<br />
<br />
==Start Up==<br />
<br />
1. Start by double clicking the "'''Bend-Tech 7x'''" icon to start up the program.[[File:Bend_tech_icon.png]][[File:Material_Die.png|right]]<br />
<br />
2. Select the "'''Assembly'''" icon [[File:newassembly.png]] in the [[Task Menu]] under the "'''Create New'''" section to open the Assembly interface. The window that opens should be labeled [Assembly - 1].<br />
<br />
3. For the purposes of this tutorial, click the "'''Maximize'''" button [[File:Min_Max_Close_Tab.png]] at the top right of the railing design window.<br />
<br />
4. Also, for the purposes of this tutorial, zoom out significantly by spinning the wheel on your mouse so that the Tri-Star is about the size of a pea in the lower left corner of the display area.<br />
<br />
5. The "'''Die & Material'''" tab is located in the upper left corner of the window. Select the "'''1.00 Material'''" and "'''2.0 Die'''" as seen here. (Selecting a very large die will limit the amount of Bump Bends when dealing with a limited amount of tubing and will not give your part the desired effect.) <br />
<br />
==Creating the Part==<br />
[[File:Largeradius_part3.png|right]]<br />
1. Start by creating a part with '''5''' PickPoints (it will amount to '''3''' bends). Select the "'''PickPoints'''" tab and the "'''Single'''" sub-tab.<br />
<br />
<br />
2. Type "'''18'''" into the red Ceiling value field and make the reference point the Tri-Star in the display area. Click "'''Apply'''" [[File:Apply.png]] to place the first PickPoint 18 inches above it.<br />
<br />
<br />
3. Select the "'''Clear Values'''" button. Type "'''24'''" into the red Ceiling value field and "'''8'''" into the light green Right value field. Don't change the reference point from its location at the Tri-Star and select the "'''Apply'''" [[File:Apply.png]] button. <br />
<br />
<br />
4. Type "'''18'''" into the red Ceiling value field and "'''16'''" into the light green Right value field. Keep the original reference point at the Tri-Star and select the "'''Apply'''" [[File:Apply.png]] button. <br />
<br />
<br />
5. Change the red Ceiling value to "'''0'''" and keep the light green Right value at "'''16'''". Place the last PickPoint exactly 16 inches to the right from the Tri-Star. Select the "'''Apply'''" [[File:Apply.png]] button.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:number_of_bends1.png|right]]<br />
6. Select the "'''Bent'''" [[File:Bent.png]] button at the top of the screen and a window will open titled "'''Number of Bends'''". Type "'''3'''" in the value field and select the "'''OK'''" [[File:Ok.png]] button. <br />
<br />
<br />
7. Starting from the Tri-Star, select each of the 5 PickPoints in clockwise succession.<br />
<br />
<br />
*A window will open prompting you to name the part. "Part 1" will be fine for now.<br />
<br />
<br />
'''The part is now complete and ready for Bump Bending.'''<br />
<br />
==Enlarging the Radius==<br />
[[File:New_3_bend_part.png|right]]<br />
===Adjust Radius===<br />
1. Once you've defined the part, select the "'''Edit'''" tab and the "'''Move'''" sub-tab.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
2. Although users have the option of using the "'''Nudge Bend'''" [[File:Nudge_bend.png]] function, we will be using the "'''Adjust Radius'''" [[File:Adjust_radius.png]] function for this tutorial. Select this button and drag the second bend on the part in the display area downward as far as it will go.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''(Note) The "Nudge Bend" function has the capability to increase or decrease the size of the radius of a single bend by user defined increments typed into the "Amount" value field. Once this button is selected, the user can then use the "Radius" (-,+) pink and green buttons to adjust the bend's radius.'''<br />
<br />
<br />
===[[Bump Bending]]===<br />
[[File:Bumpbendtool1.png|right]] "'''''If you are using a roll bender, then the Bump Bending portion of this tutorial will not be necessary for you. Bump Bending is an alternative to creating a large radius part and is geared towards the needs of users with rotary draw and rotary compression benders.'''''"<br />
1. Select the "'''Misc'''" sub-tab and the "'''Bump Bending'''" [[File:Bumpbending.png]] button to start the bump bending process.<br />
<br />
<br />
2. The Bump Bend Tool window will open and prompt you to "'''Select Die, Select Which Bend, and Number of 'Bumps''''". Choose "'''2.0'''" for a die, "'''2'''" for the bend we wish to work with, and type "'''15'''" in the number of bumps value field.<br />
<br />
<br />
3. 15 bumps will automatically be spaced in increments along the radius of the second bend. To verify this, select the "'''Parts'''" tab and select the yellow "'''Part 1'''" and the part in the display area will show all the bumps that have been created.<br />
<br />
*'''(Note) For accurate measurements of each bend and their angles, the part must be transferred out of the Assembly interface and into another one which provides the option to view the LRA Settings and the values of each individual bend.'''"<br />
<br />
==Transferring the Part==<br />
<br />
1. While "'''Part 1'''" is selected, click on the "'''Transfer'''" drop down menu above the display area and select "'''Custom 3D Part'''" for the purposes of this tutorial. (The part could also be sent to "XYZ and Harpoon" for these purposes.)<br />
<br />
===Adjusting Settings===<br />
[[File:lr_part_settings1.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
1. With the part now in the Custom 3D interface, select the "'''Part Details'''" tab and click on the "'''Part Settings'''" button. (In older versions of the software, this button may be labeled as "LRA Settings"). <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
*The "'''Part Settings'''" window will open. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
2. Select the "'''Output Results'''" tab and select the "'''Bend Angle'''" drop down menu within the far right "'''Tolerance'''" section.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
3. Select the option with the decimal in the hundredths place: "'''n.nn'''". This will give you a much more accurate reading of the bend angles located in the white values box above the display area.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
===Flat Layout=== <br />
"'''''If you are using a roll bender, then the Flat Layout portion shows details before creating a large radius part although it is geared towards the needs of users with rotary draw and rotary compression benders. Flat Layout will offer the starts, mods and ends of the bends.'''''"<br />
<br />
1. Select the "'''Tasks'''" tab and click on the "'''Flat Layout'''" button.<br />
<br />
<br />
*In the Flat Layout window, users can see all dimensions of the part including the start, center and end of each bend, as well as rotations, angles, spring angles and the CLR.<br />
<br />
<br />
2. Here, you have the option to "'''Print'''" out these details.<br />
<br />
<br />
"'''The tutorial is now complete.'''"</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Bend-Tech_Dragon_-_A400_Series&diff=9746Bend-Tech Dragon - A400 Series2018-07-11T15:39:20Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Dragon Information<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Dragon A-400 Setup Documents<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/dragon_optimization_guide.pdf Dragon Optimization Guide]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/dragon_a400_assembly_manual.pdf Dragon A400 Assembly Manual]<br />
*[[Dragon A400 Calibration]]<br />
|<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/dragon_a400_operator_manual.pdf Dragon A400 Operator's Manual]<br />
*[[Machine Control Screen|Dragon A400 Control Screen]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Dragon Material Settings]]<br />
*[[Dragon Die Calibration]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Dragon Rotation Calibration]]<br />
*[[Dragon A400 Side Offsets Calibration]]<br />
*[[Dragon A400 Machine Library|Dragon Machine Library]]<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Troubleshooting and Maintenance Documents<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[[A400 Ethernet Connection Scenarios|Ethernet Connection Scenarios]]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/dragon_preventative_maint.html Dragon Preventative Maintenance]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/a_and_z_motor_actuator_maintenance_guide.pdf A and Z Axis Actuator Maintenance Guide]<br />
|<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/x_motor_set_screw_adjustment_guide.pdf X-Motor Set Screw Adjustment Guide]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/pulley_spacing_and_belt_tension_guide.pdf Pulley Spacing and Belt Tension Guide]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/grounding_with_dielectric_grease.pdf Grounding with Dielectric Grease]<br />
|<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/machine_control_connection_guide.pdf Machine Control Connection Guide]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/lifter_station_adjustment_guide.pdf Lifter Station Adjustment Guide]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/power_switch_replacement_guide.pdf Power Switch Replacement Guide]<br />
|<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/y_motor_mounting_bracket_installation.pdf Y-Motor Mounting Bracket Installation]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/a400_water_system_assembly_guide.pdf Water System Assembly Guide]<br />
|<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Operations<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Drag_Launcher.png|link=Bend-Tech Launcher|40px]] '''[[Bend-Tech Launcher]]''' || [[File:BT_Product_Dragon1.png|link=Dragon Guide|40px]] '''[[Dragon Guide]]'''|| [[File:BT_Product_Dragon_Options.png|link=Dragon Options|40px]] '''[[Dragon Options]]''' || [[File:Dragon-Tips_&_Hints1.png|40px|link=DragonA400 Tips & Hints|Dragon Tips & Hints]] '''[[DragonA400 Tips & Hints|Dragon Tips & Hints]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Tekla_Import_Icon1.png|40px|link=Tekla Import Guide]] '''[[Tekla Import Guide]]''' || [[File:CAD_2_CAM1.png|40px|link=CAD to CAM Part Transfer]] '''[[CAD to CAM Part Transfer]]''' || [[File:Dynatorch_Guide1.png|40px|link=Dynatorch Dragon Guide]] '''[[Dynatorch Dragon Guide]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Tutorials<br />
|-<br />
|[[File:dragon_straight_tut2.png|40px|link=Dragon Straight Part Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Straight Part Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_bent_tut2.png|40px|link=Dragon Bent Part Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Bent Part Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_cust_design_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Custom Design Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Custom Design Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_nesting_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Nesting Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Nesting Tutorial]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:dragon_diamond_notch_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Diamond Notch Bridging Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Diamond Notch Bridging Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_plunge_holes_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Plunge Holes Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Plunge Holes Tutorial]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Video Tutorials<br />
|-<br />
|[[File:Dragon_tut_icon1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vd7Ie84tjZM&]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vd7Ie84tjZM Dragon Parts to Dragon Machine Tutorial]''' || [[File:Dragon_tut_icon2.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h6Dd46GK7wE]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h6Dd46GK7wE Assembly to Dragon Machine Tutorial]''' || [[File:IND_tut_icon1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b7kK7WUMKpM]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b7kK7WUMKpM Industrial Tutorial 1 - Import to Machine]''' || [[File:IND_tut_icon2.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q-1wpELF3Dw]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q-1wpELF3Dw Industrial Tutorial 2 - Design to Machine]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Dragon_S&T_Tut1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Pr0-D2EZL2g]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Pr0-D2EZL2g Dragon Slot and Tab Tutorial]'''</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Assembly&diff=9745Assembly2018-06-25T13:35:54Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''[[Main Page|Bend-Tech 7x Wiki]] :: Assembly''' [[File:assembly_1.png|right|500px]]<br />
<br />
'''Due to its length, the Assembly Guide has a Table of Contents to accommodate the user.'''<br />
<br />
The assembly interface allows a group of different bent and straight parts to be assembled together. Parts created in the single part designers (XYZ, Custom 3D, Sketch 2D, etc.) can be brought into assembly and parts within assembly can be transferred to single part designers. Parts can also be cut and the wrappers for these cuts can be printed out here. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''To open a new assembly design:'''<br />
<br />
1.) Go to the '''File''' menu, select '''New Assembly'''. <br />
<br />
2.) Click the '''New Assembly''' icon [[File:newassembly.png]] at the top of the window. <br />
<br />
'''...OR'''<br />
<br />
3.) Select the '''Assembly''' option from the [[View#Task Menu|Task Menu]] that appears when the software starts up, when all designs are closed, or through the view menu. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
==Icon Toolbar==<br />
<br />
[[File:single_part_2.png]]<br />
<br />
At the top of the frame just below the main menu bar, there is a series of icons. <br />
<br />
Click the '''New Part''' icon [[File:newpart.png]] to open the create new menu. This menu will allow you to choose a new part designer interface and begin a new part design. <br />
<br />
Click the '''New Assembly''' icon [[File:newassembly.png]] to open a new assembly design. <br />
<br />
Click the '''New Plate''' icon [[File:newplate.png]] to open a new plate design. See the [[Plate]] page for further information on designing a plate.<br />
<br />
Click the '''New Header''' icon [[File:newheader.png]] to open a new header design. See the [[Header Design]] page for further information.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Open''' icon [[File:open.png]] to open a part, assembly, plate, or header file. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Save''' icon [[File:save_icon.png]] to save the current active window's progress. If the current window is a new and hasn't been saved previously, the part will need to be given a name and location. Click 'Save' in the Save window to save.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Print''' icon [[File:printer.png]] to print out an image of the current view of the assembly design. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Print Preview''' icon [[File:preview.png]] to view a preview of the assembly design image print out. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Solidworks''' icon [[File:solidworks.png]] to import a part file from Solidworks that has been sent to Bend-Tech. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Display''' menu [[File:display.png]] to alternate between a line or shaded part model.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Refresh''' icon [[File:refresh.png]] to refresh the part display.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Home''' button [[File:home.png]] to reset the 3D part display to its original default view.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Zoom''' button [[File:zoom.png]] to zoom all the way in on the current view of the 3D part display and fit it to the display frame.<br />
<br />
Click on the '''Transfer''' menu [[File:transfer.png]] to send the currently selected part in the [[Parts]] tab to any of the other part designers, a new assembly design, a new or existing [[Nesting]] project, the offset part interface, or the [[Break Part]] interface.<br />
<br />
Click on the '''Projections''' icon [[File:project.png]] to view the current design from a specified plane (top, bottom, left, right, front, or back) or from a certain angle.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Tabs</h2><br />
[[File:assembly_tabs.png]]<br />
<br />
A majority of the assembly features and functions are located in the tabbed section on the right hand side of the window. To find information about how to use these features, see the links below.<br />
<br />
==Main==<br />
[[File:assembly_main.png|left|300px]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Parts List</h3><br />
The Part List is a list of all parts that have been added to the current Assembly project. Select a part in the list to view a preview of it. The Qty (Quantity) column displays the number of times that the part is used in the current Assembly project and the Key column states the key number given to the part to identify it. To remove a part from the list, click the '''Remove''' button. [[File:assembly_remove.png]] To remove all unused parts from the Master Part List, click the '''Flush''' button. [[File:assembly_flush.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Selected Part</h3><br />
<br />
<h3>Paste</h3><br />
To paste a copy of a part from the parts list into the assembly, first select a part. Then click the '''Paste''' button. [[File:assembly_paste.png]] The selected part will then be attached to the cursor. Select a PickPoint in the display to place the part upon.<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Rotate</h3> <br />
[[File:assembly_rotate.png|right|450px]]<br />
Creates a rotated version of an existing part which can be placed into the Assembly project. <br />
<br />
Select a part from the Part List and click the '''Rotate''' button. [[File:rotate.png]]<br />
<br />
Select an axis to rotate the part around in the '''Select Axis of Rotation''' area. <br />
<br />
Enter an amount to rotate the part in the '''Rotation Amount''' field, or left click on the part and drag the cursor left or right to rotate the part. <br />
<br />
Enter a value in the '''Snap Increment''' field and check the '''Snap Rotation''' checkbox in order to use snap rotation. Snap rotation will rotate a part by the amount in the Snap Increment field when the part is rotated using the left mouse button.<br />
<br />
'''To change the amount that the part is rotated''' when not using snap rotation, enter an amount in the Rotation Speed field. By default, the rotation speed will be 1, meaning the part will be rotated one degree at a time. Entering a decimal will allow the part to be rotated by smaller increments. Whenever you rotate a part in a certain axis, you must click the '''Apply Current Rotation button''' before rotating the part in another axis. <br />
<br />
'''To reset the orientation of the part''', click the Reset All button. <br />
<br />
After all rotations have been applied, click the OK button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Coupler</h3><br />
[[File:assembly_coupler.png|right|450px]]<br />
Allows the user to move the coupler (the anchor point of the part). <br />
<br />
Select a part in the Part List and click the '''Coupler''' button. [[File:coupler.png]] The Coupler Location window will appear. <br />
<br />
'''To set the reference point''', click the '''Select Reference Point''' and click a PickPoint in the Coupler Location window display area. <br />
<br />
'''To move the anchor point''', use the Incremental Move fields and enter movement values. <br />
<br />
'''To set all fields to 0''' in the Incremental Move area, click the Clear Values button. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Reset''' button to reset the coupler to its original location. <br />
<br />
'''To toggle between viewing a shaded and wireframe''' version of the part, use the display mode options. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Mirror</h3><br />
[[File:assembly_mirror.png|right|450px]]<br />
Creates a mirrored version of an existing part which can be placed into the Assembly project. <br />
<br />
Select a part from the Part List and click the '''Mirror''' button. [[File:mirror.png]] The Mirror Part window will appear. <br />
<br />
In the Select Mirror Direction area, select an axis to mirror the part across. After a part has been mirrored, you must click '''Apply Mirror''' before mirroring the part again. <br />
<br />
Click '''Reset Current''' to revert the part to the last time you clicked the Apply Mirror button. <br />
<br />
Click '''Reset All''' to reset the part to its original orientation. Click the home button to set the display to the home view. Click OK to create the mirrored part. <br />
<br />
'''To toggle between viewing a shaded and wireframe''' version of the part, use the display mode options. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Edit</h3><br />
<br />
To edit a plate part in the [[Plate]] design interface, first select a plate part from the Part List, then click the '''Edit''' button. [[File:edit.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Open File</h3><br />
<br />
To open a part or plate part and use it in the current assembly design, click the '''Open Part''' [[File:open_part.png]] or '''Open Plate''' button [[File:open_plate.png]] and select a part/plate file. The part will then be added to the Part List and attached to the cursor where it can be placed by clicking on a PickPoint in the part display.<br />
<br />
==PickPoints==<br />
<h3>Single</h3><br />
<h4>Single Point</h4> <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button [[File:set_reference.png]] and click a PickPoint to set it as the reference point. <br />
<br />
*'''Normal Mode:''' Use the fields to enter the incremental distance from the Reference point that the new point will be. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Travel Mode:''' Use the fields to enter the incremental distance from the reference point that the new point will be. Once the Apply button is clicked, this new point will automatically become the new reference point. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Move Mode:''' This mode is used to move points. The selected reference point will be the point that is moved. Enter values into the fields to move this point using it's original location as the reference location. '''''Note:''''' This is the only function in the assembly interface that can be used to relocate PickPoints. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Mirror Mode:''' While in mirror mode, all points placed will have a copy of the point mirrored across all axes. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''''Note:''''' For easier navigation, notice how the harpoon fields axis rotates with the display frame and matches the orientation of the parts/points.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button [[File:apply.png]] to create the PickPoint. To reset all fields in the Single Point area to 0, click the '''Clear Values''' button.<br />
<br />
<h3>Lines</h3><br />
<h4>Line (Two Points)</h4><br />
Creates a PickPoint that is aligned between two other PickPoints. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button and click two PickPoints or a single line. <br />
<br />
In the '''Move Amount''' field, enter the distance from the first PickPoint that the new PickPoint should be. To measure the Move Amount distance from the other point, click the Swap Ends button. To set the new point directly in between the reference points click the Split in Half button. <br />
<br />
To place the point, click the '''Apply''' button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Intersection</h4><br />
Creates a point at the intersection of two user defined lines. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button and click on a line or the start point and end point of the first line. Click the start and end point of the second line. Check the '''Closest Intersection''' option to have the new point created at the intersection to become the reference point after it is created.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place a PickPoint at the intersection of the two lines. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>String</h4><br />
Creates multiple points by specifying the quantity and spacing values.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button and click on a line or the start point and the end point of a line to define the reference points. Define the spacing between the points in the '''Spacing''' field and the number of points in the '''Quantity''' field. These points will begin at the starting end of the reference feature(s). To measure the points from the other end of the reference line, click the '''Swap Ends''' button. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place the PickPoints.<br />
<br />
<h3>Plane/Arc</h3><br />
<h4>Plane</h4><br />
Creates a point by using a line and a plane for reference. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Base Point''' button and click a PickPoint to set it as the center of the plane. Then select which axis the plane should lie on (X, Y, Z Plane or 3 Points). If 3 Points is selected, 3 PickPoints will need to be selected to define the custom plane.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click two PickPoints, a line, or an arc to set them as the feature that the new line will be placed along. The new PickPoint will be at the intersection of the line and the plane. Click the '''Ignore Arc Ends''' to treat arc features as circles. <br />
<br />
To move the new PickPoint up or down along the line, enter a value in the '''Move Amount''' field. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place the new point. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Arc</h4><br />
Creates a PickPoint by using an arc as reference. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Arc''' button and click on an arc to select it. The angle of the arc should appear under Arc Angle in the Arc area. <br />
<br />
Enter the angle along the arc that the new point should be in the '''Sweep Angle''' field. To set a point above or below the selected arc, enter a value in the '''Radius Offset''' field. Negative values will cause the PickPoint to be inside the arc. Click the '''Split in Half''' button to set the PickPoint halfway across the arc. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place the PickPoint.<br />
<br />
<h3>Angle</h3><br />
Creates a PickPoint that is at a specified angle and distance from another PickPoint. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button and click on a PickPoint to set it as the reference point. <br />
<br />
Use the Tri-Globe to select the direction of the new point. Enter an angle, using the Tri-Globe to determine which direction 0° and 90° are. Enter the distance from the reference point that the new point should be in the Length field. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place the PickPoint. <br />
<br />
Alternatively, you can leave the Length and Angle field at 0 and use the two fields below the Length field to enter the distance from the reference point.<br />
<br />
'''Note:''' For easier navigation, notice how the tri-globe rotates with the display frame and matches the orientation of the parts/points.<br />
<br />
<h3>Edit Points</h3><br />
<h4>Change Color</h4><br />
<br />
To change the color of PickPoint(s), first select a color by clicking on the color block icon and choosing a color from the menu. Then click the '''Select Point(s)''' button and click on the point(s) in the display frame to change them to the newly select color.<br />
<br />
To change the color of all PickPoints, first select a color by clicking on the color block icon and choosing a color from the menu. Then click the '''Change All''' button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Display</h4><br />
<br />
Displays or hides PickPoints. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Hide''' button [[File:hide_pickpoints.png]] and click a PickPoint to toggle if it is displayed or hidden. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Display All''' button [[File:displayall_pickpoints.png]] to display all PickPoints. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Hide All''' button [[File:hideall_pickpoints.png]] to hide all PickPoints. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Delete Points</h4><br />
Click the '''Delete''' button [[File:delete_points.png]] and click on a PickPoint to delete it. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Verify Points</h4><br />
Displays the coordinates of up to two PickPoints and their distance from each other. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Verify Mode''' button [[File:verify_mode.png]] and click on a PickPoint. Information on that PickPoint will be displayed. Click on a second PickPoint to see information on both PickPoints and their distance from each other.<br />
<br />
<h2>Design</h2><br />
New parts can be drawn out using the Harpoon design interface or the LRA designer fields.<br />
<br />
[[Harpoon]] || [[LRA]]<br />
<br />
<h2>Edit</h2><br />
[[File:assembly_edit.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Move</h3><br />
<h4>Move Features</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Move Part''' button [[File:move_part.png]] to move full parts to new locations. <br />
<br />
First, click on a PickPoint of a part. If Incremental Move is not checked, you will be asked to choose which PickPoint will be the anchor point. You will then be able to click any PickPoint to place the part there, with its anchor point centered on the point you select. If '''Incremental Move''' is checked, you will only have to click the part you are moving once. You will then be able to enter values into the Front, Back, Left, Right, Ceiling, and Floor fields in order to move the part in that direction by that value. To reset all fields to 0, click the Clear Values button. <br />
<br />
To finalize and move the part to the new location, click the '''Apply''' button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Move Feature''' button [[File:move_feature.png]] to move single features.<br />
<br />
First, click a part and select a feature to move. If Incremental Move is checked, enter values into the Front, Back, Left, Right, Ceiling, and Floor fields and click the Apply button. If Incremental Move is not checked, click a PickPoint to move the feature there. The part will then be adjusted accordingly. See image below for an example of this function.<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_move_1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Move Bend</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Nudge Bend''' button [[File:nudge_bend.png]] to push a bend a given amount in a specific direction. <br />
<br />
Next, select the bend that will be adjusted. Use the green and pink directional buttons to slightly push the bend in a certain direction. The amount that the bend will be nudged is determined by the value in the '''Amount''' field, which can be adjusted by supplying a new amount.<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_move_nudgebend1.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Move Bend''' button [[File:move_bend.png]] to move a bend using the mouse controls. <br />
<br />
First, select the bend to move. Next, the move bend tool will be placed upon this bend and can be used by clicking and dragging any of the arrows to pull the bend in a certain direction.<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_move_2.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Adjust Radius</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Adjust Radius''' button [[File:adjust_radius.png]] to increase/decrease the radius of a selected bend.<br />
<br />
First, select the bend that will be adjusted. Then just click and drag the bend back and forth to adjust the radius. <br />
<br />
[[File:edit_move_3.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_copy.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Copy</h3><br />
<h4>Copy Single Part</h4><br />
Click the '''Select Part''' button [[File:select_part.png]] to copy and paste a single part to a new location.<br />
<br />
First, select the part that will be copied. Next, choose a PickPoint to be the anchor point for the part. This point will be used as the "handle" to drag it to the new location. Last, click on the new location point to place the part.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_copy_1.png|650px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Copy Multiple Parts</h4><br />
<br />
Use the '''Copy Multiple Parts''' tools to copy and paste a specified group of parts or points to a new location.<br />
<br />
First, click the '''Set Base Point''' button [[File:set_base.png]] to define the anchor point of the part/point group. This will be used as the point to attach the group to the new location point.<br />
<br />
Next, select the points or parts that will be copied by clicking on them. Once selected, a part/point will be highlighted in red. Be sure to specify which kind of features will be copied by choosing the '''Parts''' or '''PickPoints''' option. Click the '''Clear All''' button to clear all selections. Click the '''Select All''' button to select all of parts or points currently in the assembly design. Click the '''Complete''' button [[File:complete.png]] to indicate that all the desired parts have been selected.<br />
<br />
Last, click the '''Paste Parts''' button [[File:paste_parts.png]] and select the new location point to place the parts.<br />
<br />
In order to paste the part or group of parts into another file or interface, open the new or existing file, go to the '''Edit-->Copy''' section and select the '''Paste Parts''' button [[File:paste_parts.png]] and select the new location point to place the parts.<br />
<br />
[[File:1edit_copy_2.png]][[File:1edit_rotate.png]][[File:2edit_rotate.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Rotate</h3><br />
Rotate is used to rotate current parts in the assembly design.<br />
<br />
First, select the part to rotate by clicking the '''Select Part''' button [[File:select_part.png]] and click on the part.<br />
<br />
Next, choose which axis the part will rotate about then click on a point on the part to define the rotation point. <br />
<br />
Enter an amount to rotate the part in the '''Rotation Amount''' field, or left click on the part and drag the cursor left/right/up/down to rotate the part. <br />
<br />
Enter a value in the '''Snap Increment''' field and check the '''Snap Rotation''' checkbox in order to use snap rotation. Snap rotation will rotate a part by the amount in the Snap Increment field when the part is rotated using the left mouse button. <br />
<br />
<br />
To change the amount that the part is rotated when not using snap rotation, enter an amount in the '''Rotation Speed''' field. By default, the rotation speed will be 1, meaning the part will be rotated one degree at a time. Entering a decimal will allow the part to be rotated by smaller increments. Whenever you rotate a part in a certain axis, you must click the Apply Current Rotation button before rotating the part in another axis. <br />
<br />
To apply the new rotation to the part, click the '''Apply''' button. [[File:apply_part.png]]<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_mirror.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Mirror</h3><br />
The mirror function can be used to mirror parts in an assembly across a specified axis or a custom defined plane. <br />
<br />
To do so, first click the '''Select Part''' button [[File:select_part.png]] and click on a part in the assembly display frame. <br />
<br />
Next, choose an axis to mirror the part across. If the '''Plane (3 points)''' option is chosen, three PickPoints will need to be chosen in order to define the plane. <br />
<br />
Check the '''Keep Original Part''' to treat the mirror as a copy. While this option is checked, the mirrored version of the part and the original part will remain in the design. Otherwise, the original part will be moved to the new mirrored location.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button [[File:apply_part.png]] to finalize the mirror. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_mirror_1.png]]<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_delete.png|right]]<br />
<br />
Bent and straight parts can be deleted from the current assembly design in this tab. <br />
<br />
'''To delete a part''', first select a part by clicking on it in the list (listed parts will be highlighted in yellow once they are selected) or click directly on a part in the part display (parts will be highlighted in red once they are selected).<br />
<br />
Click the '''Un-Select All''' button [[File:unselect.png]] to un-selected all parts that are currently selected.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Remove Selected''' button [[File:remove_selected.png]] to delete the selected parts.<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_stretch.png|right|300px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Stretch</h3><br />
Stretch moves a selection of PickPoints in a specified direction, adjusting all parts to compensate.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
First '''select a view'''. This will determine which direction the assembly will be viewed from during the stretch process. <br />
<br />
'''Select the parts/PickPoints''' that will be stretched by clicking on any two spots on the display in order to draw a selection rectangle between them (the rectangle will be defined by a light blue line). <br />
<br />
Then select a direction and enter the amount that the selected parts/PickPoints should be moved in the '''Distance''' field. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button [[File:apply_part.png]] to apply the stretch. <br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_stretch_1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_misc.png|right|300px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Misc</h3><br />
<br />
<h4>Add Bend</h4><br />
'''To add a bend to a preexisting part''', click the '''Add Bend''' button [[File:add_bend.png]] and '''select a straight length''' of a part by clicking on it to choose a location for the bend. The bend will be placed at the mid point of the selected part length. <br />
<br />
'''Enter the offset distance''' between the part and the bend. Then click the '''OK''' button to place the bend. Whichever die is currently selected in the Assembly [[Assembly#Die|die menu]] will be used for this bend.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_addbend.png|750px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Scale</h4><br />
'''To scale the size of parts, material, or bend radii''', click the '''Scale''' button. [[File:misc_scale_1.png]]<br />
<br />
In the scale window, scale values for each of these features can be supplied. Provide a percentage value to either increase or decrease the scale of a feature. See image below for an example. <br />
<br />
[[File:misc_scale.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Explode</h4><br />
Exploding an Assembly will move all parts away from each other so that they can be viewed separately. <br />
<br />
<br />
First, click the '''Explode''' button. [[File:explode.png]] <br />
<br />
The click on a PickPoint to set the base point for the assembly, and enter an explode factor to explode an Assembly project. Larger numbers will create greater distances between the parts. Click the '''Explode''' button to reset the assembly back to the normal display.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Clean</h4><br />
Click the '''Clean''' button [[File:clean.png]] to clear the assembly of any zero length tubes that may be in the assembly design. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Copy Radius</h4><br />
Click the '''Copy Radius''' button [[File:copy_radius.png]] to copy the radius of one bend to another. <br />
<br />
First, select the bend with the radius that you want to copy. Next, select the bend that the copied radius will be applied to.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_copyradius.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_adjustcenterline.png|500px|right]]<br />
<h4>Adjust Centerline</h4><br />
Click the '''Adjust Centerline''' button [[File:adjustcenterline.png]] to change how the part measurements are interpreted. In the part designers, parts are assumed to be based on centerline. This tool allows the current part dimensions to be from the inside or outside of the tube instead. <br />
<br />
After clicking the button, '''select''' a part in the display to adjust it. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''To change the Location and/or Location Type''' for a bend, first select the bend by clicking on it in the part display. A menu will appear where the location and location types can be adjusted. Click on either of the drop down menus to choose new options.<br />
<br />
::[[File:adjustcenterline_2.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
Once a new location or location type has been chosen, a red preview reflecting the location changes will appear. The original part will be shown in green (if the Display Original Part is checked). <br />
<br />
Click the '''Home''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_3.png]] to set the part preview to the default location and orientation.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Zoom Fit''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_4.png]] to zoom all the way in on the current view of the 3D part display and fit it to the display frame. <br />
<br />
<br />
The part model can be shown in either wire frame or as a solid shaded model. Click on the '''wireframe''' button [[File:wireframe.png]] to show the model in wireframe. Click on the '''shaded''' button [[File:shaded.png]] to show the model as a shaded part.<br />
<br />
<br />
Check the box next to '''Display Original Part''' to have the original part preview shown in the adjust centerline interface after changes are made to the locations.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Inside''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_5.png]] to set the locations for all of the bends to inside.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Center''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_6.png]] to set the locations for all of the bends back to centerline.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Outside''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_7.png]] to set the locations for all of the bends to outside.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''OK''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_8.png]] to take the location and location type adjustments and apply them to the current part design.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Labels</h3><br />
'''To place labels on the current assembly design''', first click the '''New''' button [[File:new_label.png]] and select a location for the label by clicking on a PickPoint. Next, enter the label text and click '''OK'''.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_label_1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
The size of the label font is determined by the '''Label Size''' value (larger values result in larger labels and vice versa). '''To change the size''', enter a new value in this field. The color of the labels is determined by the Label Color button. '''To change the color''', click this button and select a new color. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''To move a label''', click the '''Move''' button [[File:move_label.png]] and select a new PickPoint to place the label in the new location.<br />
<br />
'''To delete a label''', click the '''Delete''' button [[File:delete_label.png]] and click on a label.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Break or Join Tubes</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''Break Auto''' button [[File:break_auto.png]] to automatically break the part at a specified interval. <br />
<br />
First, define the maximum length of tube required between break points in the '''Max Length''' field. Next click the '''Break Auto''' button and select a part to break it. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Break Point''' button [[File:break_point.png]] to place a break point on a certain part. Break points will define where the part will be separated. After clicking this button, select which part will be broken by clicking on it in the display area. Last, select the PickPoint where the break will occur. <br />
<br />
[[File:misc_breakpoint.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Join Tubes''' button [[File:join_tubes.png]] to connect two tubes together. First, select the first part to join, and then select the other part that will be joined to it. <br />
<br />
[[File:misc_join.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_miter_1.png|right|250px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Miter Trim''' button [[File:miter_trim.png]] to add a miter at the intersection of two tubes.<br />
<br />
First select the first tube that will be mitered. Next, select the other tube that will be mitered. These tubes will be given some extra length to compensate for the mitering cut (''See image to the right''). If the '''Create Cut''' option is checked, a cut will be applied to the part at this point on the part. Cuts can be seen in the '''[[Cutting]]''' tab.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_miter.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Single Bend CLR Change</h3><br />
<br />
'''To adjust the CLR of a single bend''', first select a die in the '''Select Die''' menu in the Single Bend CLR Change area. Next click the '''Select Bend''' button [[File:select_bend.png]] and click on a bend to apply the selected die to it.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_clr.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_panel.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:panel_01.png|left|250px]]<br />
In the panel tab, plate panels can be created by defining their location on an assembly.<br />
<br />
To create a panel, first click the '''Select Tubes''' button [[File:select_tubes.png]]. Next, select sections of tube on the assembly that are on the same plane to define the outline of the panel (a minimum of 2 tubes is required). When selecting tubes, be sure to select the '''''starting end''''' of the tube. Once all the necessary tubes are selected, click the '''Complete''' button. [[File:complete.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:panel_order.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
The parts will then be listed in the chart below. The corner and value specifications will need to be supplied for the corners and the wrap value will need to be given for the edges of the panel. <br />
<br />
<br />
Once these values/options have been defined, click the '''Create Plate''' button. [[File:create_plate.png]] Give the panel and name and choose a plate material. Click the '''OK''' button to create the panel. Once a part is created, it is added to the [[Main#Parts List|parts list]] in the [[Main]] tab.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Opposite Direction''' button to flip the side of the tube that the panel is placed upon.<br />
<br />
[[File:panel_03.png|400px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
To adjust the panel after it has been created, just change any of the options and click the '''Create Plate''' button to update the panel.<br />
<br />
<br />
To do more in depth edits with the plate, such as adding holes, click the '''Edit Plate''' button to bring the plate into the [[Plate]] design interface. Once the edits are complete, the plate can be sent back into the assembly by using the '''Transfer''' menu [[File:transfer.png]] and selecting the current assembly project. The plate will be brought back in and placed in its original location on the tube(s). <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Corner'''<br />
<br />
*'''Connect:''' The corner of the panel will be flat, connecting the ends of the straight lengths on either side of the bend.<br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_connect.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Intersection:''' The corner of the panel will meet at the outside intersections of the tubes, at the apex.<br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_intersection.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Radius:''' The corner of the panel will be rounded according the the radius value given in the '''Value''' field. <br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_radius.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Chamfer:''' The corner of the panel will be cut diagonally back from the corner the distance provided in the '''Value''' field.<br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_chamfer.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Notch:''' The corner of the panel will have a 90 degree notch cut out of it. The size of the notch is determined by the size provided in the '''Value''' field.<br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_notch.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
The '''Wrap''' value determines how far the material will overlap the edge of the tube. This value is given in terms of degrees.<br />
<br />
[[File:panel_02.png]]<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_dimensions.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Dimensions</h2><br />
<h3>Create</h3><br />
<h4>Single</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Single''' button [[File:dimensions_single.png]] to place a single dimension. First, select a line feature or two points that the dimension will be placed between. Then choose a placement location for the dimension text.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_1.png|650px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Multiple</h4><br />
Click the '''Multiple''' button [[File:multiple.png]] to place multiple dimensions along a specified area of an assembly. First, select a line feature where the dimensions will start, then select end point of the dimensions. Between these features, each possible dimension will be placed.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_2.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Inside Angle</h4><br />
Click the '''Inside Angle''' button [[File:inside_angle.png]] to place an angle measure dimension at the inside of the intersection of two lines. First, select a line or reference point to represent the beginning of the dimension. Next, select the inside point of the line and/or the second reference line. Last, choose a location to place the dimension text.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_3.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Outside Angle</h4><br />
Click the '''Outside Angle''' button [[File:outside_angle.png]] to place an angle measure dimension around the outside angle of the reference lines. First, select a line or reference point to represent the beginning of the dimension. Next, select the inside point of the line and/or the second reference line. Last, choose a location to place the dimension text.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_4.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Edit</h3><br />
<br />
<h4>Move</h4><br />
Click the '''Move''' button [[File:move_dimension.png]] to relocate the text and marker of a dimension. First select the dimension that will be moved. Next, using the cursor, click on a new location to place the dimension.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_5.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Delete</h4><br />
To delete dimensions, click the '''Delete''' button [[File:delete_dimension.png]] and click on a dimension(s) to delete them.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Settings</h3><br />
The appearance of dimension text and markers can be adjusted using these settings. <br />
<br />
*'''Text Size:''' The size of the dimension text can be supplied here. Larger values will result in larger dimension font size and vice versa.<br />
<br />
*'''Text Color:''' The color of the dimension text can be chosen here. Click the color button and select a color to adjust text color. <br />
<br />
*'''Line Width:''' The width of the dimension markers can be given here. Larger values will result in thicker dimension lines and vice versa.<br />
<br />
*'''Line Color:''' The color of the dimension marker lines can be chosen here. Click the color button and select a color to adjust line color. <br />
<br />
*'''Tolerance:''' The decimal tolerance for the dimension values can be adjusted here. The decimal tolerance controls how many digits will be allowed after these values. In the tolerance options, each digit place is represented by an n. <br />
<br />
:Dimension values can be displayed in either fractional or decimal format. To change the format and/or tolerance for lengths, click the drop down menu and select an option from the list. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Display Dimensions:''' Check the box next to '''Display Dimensions''' to have the dimensions placed on the assembly design. Uncheck this box to hide the dimension markers and values.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>2D Mode</h3><br />
[[File:2d_dimensions_1.png|right]]<br />
In 2D Mode, the assembly will be shown from the top, left, and right. Dimensions can then be placed on these different views of the assembly. The display can be printed using '''File --> Print''' or by clicking the '''Print''' icon.<br />
<br />
<h4>Create</h4><br />
<br />
*'''Horizontal:''' Click the '''Horizontal''' button [[File:horizontal_dim.png]] to place a horizontal dimension along a selected line or between two selected PickPoints.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Vertical:''' Click the '''Vertical''' button [[File:vertical_dim.png]] to place a vertical dimension on a vertical line or between two selected pickpoints.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Linear:''' Click the '''Linear''' button [[File:linear_dim.png]] to place a dimension along any line or between any two PickPoints.<br />
<br />
*'''Inside Angle:''' Click the '''Inside Angle''' button [[File:inside_angle_dim.png]] to place an inside angle dimension at the intersection of two lines. First, select a line or reference point to represent the beginning of the dimension. Next, select the inside point of the line and/or the second reference line. Last, choose a location to place the dimension text.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Outside Angle:''' Click the '''Outside Angle''' button [[File:outside_angle_dim.png]] to place an outside angle dimension around the intersection of two lines. First, select a line or reference point to represent the beginning of the dimension. Next, select the inside point of the line and/or the second reference line. Last, choose a location to place the dimension text.<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Edit</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Move''' button [[File:2d_move.png]] to relocate the text and marker of a dimension. First select the dimension that will be moved. Next, using the cursor, click on a new location to place the dimension. <br />
<br />
To delete a dimension, click the '''Delete''' button [[File:2d_delete.png]] and click on a dimension.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Edit Value''' button [[File:2d_edit.png]] to change the value of a dimension. First, click on a dimension. Then enter the new value in the edit value window and click the '''OK''' button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Settings</h4><br />
<br />
*'''Arrow Width:''' This is the width of the arrows at the ends of the dimension line. Enter a value in this field to define the arrow width. Larger values will result in wider arrows and vice versa. <br />
<br />
*'''Arrow Length:'''This is the length of the arrows at the ends of a dimension line. Enter a value in this field to define the arrow width. Larger values will result in longer arrows and vice versa. <br />
<br />
*'''Extension Stand-Off:''' This is the distance between the extension lines and the entity that the dimension is measuring. <br />
<br />
*'''Extension Offset:''' This is the distance that the extension lines extend beyond the dimension line. <br />
<br />
*'''Text Size:''' The size of the dimension text can be supplied here. Larger values will result in larger dimension font size and vice versa.<br />
<br />
*'''Line Width:''' The width of the dimension markers can be given here. Larger values will result in thicker dimension lines and vice versa.<br />
<br />
*'''Arrow Type:''' This is the shape of the arrows at the ends of a dimension line. Click on the menu next to Arrow Type in the value column and select an option from the drop down menu.<br />
<br />
*'''Tolerance:''' The decimal tolerance for the dimension values can be adjusted here. The decimal tolerance controls how many digits will be allowed after these values. In the tolerance options, each digit place is represented by an n. <br />
<br />
:Dimension values can be displayed in either fractional or decimal format. To change the format and/or tolerance for lengths, click the drop down menu and select an option from the list. <br />
<br />
[[File:2d_settings.png|right|300px]]<br />
*'''Text, Extension, and Dimension Color:''' The colors of the dimension text, extensions can be changed using these color options. To change the color of a feature, click on the corresponding button and select a color from the menu. (''See the image to the right'')<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Edit Existing</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Select''' [[File:ass_select1.png]] button and click on a dimension to view and/or edit its settings, which will be generated in the Settings area above.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' [[File:ass_select2.png]] button to apply any setting changes made to the currently selected dimension. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply to All''' [[File:Apply_to_ass.png]] button to apply the currently selected dimension settings to every dimension.<br />
<br />
<h2>Cutting</h2><br />
[[File:Cutting_picture12.png|right|]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
The Cutting tab contains the tools necessary for adding cuts to the ends of parts. Wrappers can be printed which, when wrapped around the end of a tube, mark where the tube needs to be cut.<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Make Cuts</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''New Cut''' button [[File:new_cut.png]] and click a part. The cut part will be highlighted in green once selected. Click a second part, plane, or multiple parts that the first part will be cut to fit against. The second and any consecutive selected parts will be highlighted in red. Click the '''Complete''' button. [[File:complete.png]] The cut should appear in the list of cuts on the Cutting tab and shown on the assembly. <br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:cutting_1.png|650px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Auto-Cut''' button [[File:auto_cut.png]] to let the software attempt to generate all cuts in the assembly project. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Cutting Plane</h3><br />
<br />
Using the cutting plane feature, a custom plate can be defined and used to place cuts anywhere on the assembly design. <br />
<br />
To place a cutting plane, click the '''New''' button [[File:new_plane.png]] and click on a PickPoint to define the center/base point of the plane. Then click the first direction and second direction of the plane. Once a plane is place in the assembly, it can be used as a cutting feature and will allow straight cuts to be placed anywhere. <br />
<br />
[[File:cutting_plane.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
To move the plane, click the '''Move''' button. Then click and drag the move tools directly on the plane to move, resize, and rotate the plane. See image below.<br />
<br />
[[File:plane_move.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Slot & Tab</h3><br />
<br />
'''RESERVED FOR DRAGON CUSTOMERS ONLY.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Slot_Tab0_Example1.jpg]]<br />
<br />
'''Use the Slot & Tab function only after you have set up your Slot & Tab settings in the [[Tube/Pipe Library]]. Attempting to use this function without creating valid settings applied to your tubing will not produce results.'''<br />
<br />
*Click the Slot & Tab [[File:Ass_Slot_N_Tab1.png]] button after you've created a cut and click on the green highlighted tube to apply the tab to it. This will also apply the slot to the outer edge of the red highlighted tube.<br />
<br />
*If the tab & slot is not wide or long enough, you can always change the settings in your [[Tube/Pipe Library]] and then click the '''"Complete"''' button to apply the changes to the cut.<br />
<br />
[[File:Slot_Tab1_Example1.png]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Cut Settings</h3><br />
<br />
If the '''Outside Diameter Only''' option is checked, the software will not display the inside diameter cut line for each cut. <br />
Using a hole saw requires the checking of the outside of the material only.''' "Check"''' the option '''"Outside Diameter Only"'''.<br />
<br />
[[File:HoleSaw3.jpg]]<br />
<br />
Using a grinder or plasma cutter requires checking of both sides of the material. '''"Uncheck"''' the option '''"Outside Diameter Only"'''.<br />
<br />
[[File:HoleSaw4.jpg]]<br />
<br />
<br />
If '''Distance to Perp of Bend''' is checked, the red line will indicate the distance to the perpendicular of the bend. The cut wrapper's red line will display the distance to the tangent of the nearest bend combined with the outside radius of the bend.<br />
<br />
If the '''Hide Completed Features''' option is checked, completed features from the new cut will be hidden in the design.<br />
<br />
If the '''Ignore Tube Ends''' option is checked, all new cuts will ignore the excess tubing leftover from all other cuts.<br />
<br />
If '''Mitered Cut''' is checked, all new cuts will be calculated as straight mitered cuts. If you are using a hole saw to cut your tubes leave Mitered Cut unchecked.<br />
<br />
If the '''Add Slot & Tab''' checkbox is checked, all new cuts will contain a tab on the intended cut tube and a slot on the adjoining tube. ''Adding a value into the value field to the right will rotate the tab around the tube by a degree between 0-360.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Cut Chart</h3><br />
[[File:cutting_2.png|right|600px]]<br />
A chart displaying a list of all the cuts currently applied to the assembly will be shown as well. <br />
<br />
Click on a cut to see a preview of the cut on the 3D model of the assembly. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click '''Delete''' [[File:delete_cut.png]] to remove the cut from the tube, or click '''Delete All''' [[File:delete_all_cuts.png]] to remove all cuts from the Assembly project.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click '''Print''' [[File:print_cut.png]] to print the currently selected wrapper, or click '''Print All''' [[File:print_all_cuts.png]] to print out all wrappers for the entire Assembly project.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:cut_wrapper.png|400px|right]]<br />
Click the '''Details''' button [[File:details.png]] to see a preview of the cutting wrapper. On each wrapper, there is a red line with a number on it. This line is used for lining up a wrapper on a tube. The number is the distance from the end of the tube that the red line should be. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Select''' button [[File:select_cut.png]] and click on a cut in the display area to select it from the assembly directly.<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_parts.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<h2>Parts</h2><br />
The Parts tab contains a list of all parts in the current Assembly project, tools that can be used to edit them, and the ability to transfer parts to a single part designer.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click on a part in the part list to select it. Once a part is selected in the list, it will be highlighted in yellow. Parts can also be selected by clicking directly on a part in the assembly. <br />
<br />
Use the drop down menu in the '''Die''' column to change the die for that part or use the drop down in the '''Material''' column to change the material. <br />
<br />
Click on the colored box in the '''Color''' column to change the parts color using the color menu. <br />
<br />
Select a part and use the '''Transfer''' menu [[File:transfer.png]] to bring it into another part design interface. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''Double click''' on this table to open it in a separate window. Click the '''Print''' button to print this chart.<br />
<br />
[[File:parts_2.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
<h2>Details</h2><br />
[[File:assembly_details.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
In the details tab, a list of every material used in the assembly project will be listed along with the material's attributes, such as the name, width, amount used, and weight.<br />
<br />
If '''weight per unit''' values have been given to the materials in the [[Tube/Pipe Library]], the total weight of the assembly will be shown below the table. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Change Die or Material</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''All Dies''' button [[File:all_dies.png]] to change all the dies used in the assembly to one specified die. After clicking the button, select a die from the menu and click the '''OK''' button to confirm the die change. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Match Die''' button [[File:match_die.png]] to replace all bends using a certain die with an alternate die. In the menu, select the die that will be replaced and selected the die that will replace it. Click the '''OK''' button to confirm.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''All Materials''' button [[File:all_materials.png]] to change all the materials used in the assembly to one specific material. After clicking the button, select a material from the menu and click the '''OK''' button to confirm the material change. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Print Details</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''Spreadsheet''' button [[File:spreadsheet.png]] to print out a page with an image of the 3D assembly model, the parts list, the chart shown in the [[Parts]] tab, and the material chart shown in the Details tab.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Setup Pack''' button [[File:setup_pack.png]] to print out multiple setup sheets for the parts in the current assembly. In the Setup Pack menu, the printing options can be selected.<br />
<br />
[[File:setup_pack_1.png|350px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Select Features to Print:''' Select what kind of features will be included on the setup sheet. <br />
<br />
*'''Select Printer:''' Choose the printer that the setup sheets will be printed from.<br />
<br />
*'''Select Parts to Print:''' Choose which part setup sheets will be included in this printing. Click the '''Check All''' button to select all parts. Click the '''Check None''' button to un-check all parts. <br />
<br />
Click the '''OK''' button to print the setup sheets. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_fullscale.png|right|400px]]<br />
Click the '''Full Scale''' button [[File:full_scale.png]] allows a full size, to scale, 2D version of the assembly design viewed from a specific direction to be printed to scale on multiple sheets. Each printed page will display one section of the full size assembly. When these pages are all combined, they will show the entire part design. <br />
<br />
Adjust the settings explained below and click the '''Print''' button to print out a full scale part outline.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Margins:''' The margins of each individual page can be set here in terms of inches. <br />
<br />
*'''Default Orientation:''' The orientation of the pages can be adjusted here by choosing either portrait or landscape.<br />
<br />
*'''Number of Pages:''' The width and height of the block of pages can be adjusted here. A preview of what the full group will be shown below. Each page is represented by a light blue outline. <br />
<br />
*'''Line Width:''' The width of the line representing the part features can be adjusted here. Smaller values will result in thinner lines while larger numbers will result in thicker lines.<br />
<br />
*'''Orientation:''' The angle that the part printout will be viewed from can be chosen here. <br />
<br />
*'''Position... :''' To reposition the part outline on the pages, click the '''Position...''' button. [[File:printscale_3.png]] The part outline will be attached to the cursor. Click to place the part in a new location. Keep in mind, if any of the part extends past the edge of the pages, <br />
<br />
*'''Print Options:''' <br />
<br />
:[[File:printscale_2.png|left]] Select Printer: Choose which printer to print from here.<br />
<br />
Number of Copies: The number of copies to print can be specified here.<br />
<br />
Print Preview: Check this box to have a preview of the pages shown before it is printed.<br />
<br />
Print to File: Check this box to save the pages as a Printer File (.prn).<br />
<br />
Print Page Numbers: Check this box to print page numbers on each page. <br />
<br />
Print Edge Lines: Check this box to include the margin lines on the pages.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Preview:''' At the bottom of the window, a preview of the part outline and the pages will be shown.<br />
<br />
:This preview can be adjusted by zooming, panning, and rotating. To zoom, use the scroll wheel on the mouse. Scroll up to zoom out and scroll down to zoom in. To pan/move the part preview, click and hold the scroll wheel or both mouse buttons and move the cursor around. The part preview will move with the cursor. To rotate, click and hold the right mouse button. Move the cursor around and the part will rotate with the cursor movements.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Assembly Tools</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''Nesting''' button [[File:nesting.png]] to <br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_price_1.png|right|400px]]<br />
Click the '''Price''' button [[File:assembly_price.png]] to view a chart containing the assembly's materials, quantity, and cost and time. These cost settings can be set up in the [[Tools]] Menu under [[Tools#Pricing Settings|Pricing Settings]].<br />
<br />
'''To add another column''' that will calculate the price for a specified amount of the part, enter a value into the Quantity First Field area or adjust the amount using the up and down arrows. Up to two extra columns can be added. <br />
<br />
'''To add a second column''', enter a value into the Quantity Second Field or adjust the amount using the up and down arrows. <br />
<br />
To '''print''' the current view of the Price List chart, click the '''Print''' button. [[File:print.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Assembly Menu</h2><br />
<br />
When a new assembly window is open, there will be a '''menu area''' located above the tabbed section and display frame.<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_2.png]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Material</h3><br />
<br />
[[File:material.png]] In the material menu, the material for the parts in the assembly can be selected. '''To select a material''', click the drop down menu and choose a material from the list. This material can be changed for each individual part later, this is just the material that is initially applied to new parts. Tube/pipe materials are defined in the [[Tube/Pipe Library]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Die</h3><br />
<br />
[[File:die.png]] In the die menu, the die used to bend the parts in the assembly can be selected. '''To select a die''', click the drop down menu and choose a die from the list. This can be changed for each individual part later, this is just the die that is initially applied to new parts. Dies are defined in the [[Die Library]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Straight</h3><br />
'''To create a straight tube between two PickPoints''', click the Straight button [[File:straight.png]] and click any two PickPoints or Auto points (points that are automatically generated along parts, such as mid points, apex point, or start and end of bend points ) in the display window. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Bent</h3><br />
'''To create a new bent part''', click the Bent button. [[File:bent.png]] In the Number of Bends window that appears, enter the number of bends that the part will have and click the OK button. To create the part, you must select the start point and the location of each bend, and the end point of the part. You cannot create a bend that is 180° or more by using the Bent Part tool. In order to create such a bend, you would need to create two separate parts. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Delete</h3><br />
'''To remove a part from the assembly''', first click on the '''Delete''' button. Then in the design frame, click on a part to delete it. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:entities_12.png|right]]<br />
<h3>Entities</h3> <br />
The Entities tool controls which parts and points are displayed in the assembly. Click the '''Entities''' button [[File:entities.png]] to open up this menu. Each row will represent straight part, bent part, and PickPoint. To hide a certain feature, click in the green box to remove the '''X'''. To have all features shown, click '''Display All''' button. [[File:display_all2.png]] To hide all PickPoints, click the '''Hide Points''' [[File:hide_points2.png]] button. To hide all parts, click the '''Hide Parts''' button. [[File:hide_parts2.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Bend Mode</h3><br />
[[File:bend_mode.png|left]]<br />
This option controls the type of bend location for the very next bend-point selecting during the creation of a bent part. In other words, this setting will only affect the part being built. After selecting a bend-point, this setting will revert back to APEX, meaning you will need to select the right setting for each bend-point in the part (unless the points are APEX).<br />
<br />
The type selected under this menu indicates what the bend-point represents:<br />
<br />
'''Apex:''' The bend-point is the apex of the bend, which is the intersection point of the two legs on either side of the bend.<br />
<br />
'''Tangent (Start):''' The bend-point is at the very start of the bend; where the straight leg meets the bend. (no bent material will be included in the measurement)<br />
<br />
'''Tangent (End):''' The bend-point is at the very end of the bend; where the bend meets the straight leg. (no bent material will be included in the measurement)<br />
<br />
'''Perpendicular (Start):''' The bend-point is at the perpendicular point on the first leg (start side). See image below. This location can also be measured as the start of the bend plus the radius; along the first leg.<br />
<br />
'''Perpendicular (End):''' The bend-point is at the perpendicular point on the second leg (end side). See image below. This location can also be measured as the end of the bend plus the radius; along the second leg.<br />
<br />
'''Mid:''' The bend-point is the exact mid point of the bend (middle of the bend).<br />
<br />
'''Direction -> Any Point:''' This option requires the selection of TWO bend-points for a single bend. The first bend-point represents a location on the first leg of the bend (before the bend). This point can be located anywhere on the leg. The second point represents a location on the bend. This point can be located anywhere on the bend.<br />
<br />
'''Any Point -> Direction:''' This option requires the selection of TWO bend-points for a single bend. The first point represents a location on the bend. This point can be located anywhere on the bend. The second bend-point represents a location on the second leg of the bend (after the bend). This point can be located anywhere on the leg. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''As always when working in the assembly, the points represent the centerline of the part.'''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Settings</h4><br />
[[File:assembly_settings.png|right|500px]]<br />
These settings are used to control the display and general options within the current assembly.<br />
<br />
'''Main Display'''<br />
<br />
The main display settings control the part display and part model appears in the assembly interface. The background of the main display can be shown.<br />
<br />
:*'''Background:''' Select the '''Normal''' option for the part display background to be shown with the normal blue to white gradient. Select the '''Custom Color''' option to choose a custom solid color. Select the '''Image''' option to select an image file to display as the background. <br />
<br />
:*'''Auto Zoom:''' Check this option to automatically zoom all the way in on the current view of the 3D part display and fit it to the display frame. <br />
<br />
:*'''Display Wall Thickness:''' Check this option to have the thickness of the material shown on the part model when in shaded mode.<br />
<br />
:*'''Display Tubes as Cut:''' Check this option to have the profiles of any cuts on the tubes represented on the part model.<br />
<br />
:*'''Model Quality:''' To adjust the graphic quality of the part model, select an option from this menu. Parts can be shown in high, medium, and low quality.<br />
<br />
:*'''PickPoint Size:''' To adjust the size of all the pickpoints shown in the display frame, select an option from this menu. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Help Text:''' Check the box next to '''Display Cursor Help Text''' to toggle the help text on and off in assembly. This help text will help guide certain processes within assembly. The color of this text can be adjusted using the '''Text Color''' option.<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Tri Star'''<br />
[[File:tri_star.png|left|100px]]<br />
These options will control how the tri-star will appear in the current assembly design. The tri-star can be '''Directional''' (labeled with ceiling/floor, front/back, left/right), '''XYZ''' (labeled with X, Y, and Z), '''Lines Only''', or '''None''' (not shown at all). The default scale value can also be defined here, which will control how large the tri-star will appear. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Color of New PickPoints:''' The default color of new PickPoints can be adjusted here. Click the '''color''' button and select a color from the menu to choose a new PickPoint color. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Prompt for Straight Part Names:''' While this option is checked, every time a new [[#Straight|straight part]] is added to the assembly, a window will prompt for a name to be given to this part instead of defaulting to "Straight 1" for example. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Overwrite Master Parts when Changed:'''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Auto Switch to Line Mode:''' Check this option to have the display mode automatically switched to line mode whenever new points or parts are being added/edited in the current assembly design. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Auto-Save Frequency:''' The time interval between the automatic saves can be adjusted using this menu. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''Set Defaults:''' Click the '''Set Defaults''' button [[File:set_default.png]] to use these settings as the defaults for future assembly designs.<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Restore Defaults:''' Click the '''Restore Defaults''' button [[File:restore_defaults.png]] to reset all the settings to the default selections.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Manufacture Warnings</h3> <br />
[[File:manufacture_warnings_1.png|right|400px]]<br />
If any problems are found with a part, a '''warning icon''' [[File:manufacture_warnings.png]] will appear at the top of the assembly window. If this icon is clicked, manufacturing warnings will be listed. These warnings are based on the die limitations applied to the current die used to bend the part(s). These limitations can be defined in the [[Die Library#Die Limitations - Minimum Distances|Die Library]]. The part name, a short description of the problem, location, and fix (if available). If an auto-fix is available, double-click on the auto-fix description to execute the auto-fix. Click the '''Fix All''' button [[File:fix_all.png]] to fix all problems with a fix option available.</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Assembly&diff=9744Assembly2018-06-25T13:33:31Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''[[Main Page|Bend-Tech 7x Wiki]] :: Assembly''' [[File:assembly_1.png|right|500px]]<br />
<br />
'''Due to its length, the Assembly Guide has a Table of Contents to accommodate the user.'''<br />
<br />
The assembly interface allows a group of different bent and straight parts to be assembled together. Parts created in the single part designers (XYZ, Custom 3D, Sketch 2D, etc.) can be brought into assembly and parts within assembly can be transferred to single part designers. Parts can also be cut and the wrappers for these cuts can be printed out here. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''To open a new assembly design:'''<br />
<br />
1.) Go to the '''File''' menu, select '''New Assembly'''. <br />
<br />
2.) Click the '''New Assembly''' icon [[File:newassembly.png]] at the top of the window. <br />
<br />
'''...OR'''<br />
<br />
3.) Select the '''Assembly''' option from the [[View#Task Menu|Task Menu]] that appears when the software starts up, when all designs are closed, or through the view menu. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
==Icon Toolbar==<br />
<br />
[[File:single_part_2.png]]<br />
<br />
At the top of the frame just below the main menu bar, there is a series of icons. <br />
<br />
Click the '''New Part''' icon [[File:newpart.png]] to open the create new menu. This menu will allow you to choose a new part designer interface and begin a new part design. <br />
<br />
Click the '''New Assembly''' icon [[File:newassembly.png]] to open a new assembly design. <br />
<br />
Click the '''New Plate''' icon [[File:newplate.png]] to open a new plate design. See the [[Plate]] page for further information on designing a plate.<br />
<br />
Click the '''New Header''' icon [[File:newheader.png]] to open a new header design. See the [[Header Design]] page for further information.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Open''' icon [[File:open.png]] to open a part, assembly, plate, or header file. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Save''' icon [[File:save_icon.png]] to save the current active window's progress. If the current window is a new and hasn't been saved previously, the part will need to be given a name and location. Click 'Save' in the Save window to save.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Print''' icon [[File:printer.png]] to print out an image of the current view of the assembly design. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Print Preview''' icon [[File:preview.png]] to view a preview of the assembly design image print out. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Solidworks''' icon [[File:solidworks.png]] to import a part file from Solidworks that has been sent to Bend-Tech. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Display''' menu [[File:display.png]] to alternate between a line or shaded part model.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Refresh''' icon [[File:refresh.png]] to refresh the part display.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Home''' button [[File:home.png]] to reset the 3D part display to its original default view.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Zoom''' button [[File:zoom.png]] to zoom all the way in on the current view of the 3D part display and fit it to the display frame.<br />
<br />
Click on the '''Transfer''' menu [[File:transfer.png]] to send the currently selected part in the [[Parts]] tab to any of the other part designers, a new assembly design, a new or existing [[Nesting]] project, the offset part interface, or the [[Break Part]] interface.<br />
<br />
Click on the '''Projections''' icon [[File:project.png]] to view the current design from a specified plane (top, bottom, left, right, front, or back) or from a certain angle.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Tabs</h2><br />
[[File:assembly_tabs.png]]<br />
<br />
A majority of the assembly features and functions are located in the tabbed section on the right hand side of the window. To find information about how to use these features, see the links below.<br />
<br />
==Main==<br />
[[File:assembly_main.png|left|300px]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Parts List</h3><br />
The Part List is a list of all parts that have been added to the current Assembly project. Select a part in the list to view a preview of it. The Qty (Quantity) column displays the number of times that the part is used in the current Assembly project and the Key column states the key number given to the part to identify it. To remove a part from the list, click the '''Remove''' button. [[File:assembly_remove.png]] To remove all unused parts from the Master Part List, click the '''Flush''' button. [[File:assembly_flush.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Selected Part</h3><br />
<br />
<h3>Paste</h3><br />
To paste a copy of a part from the parts list into the assembly, first select a part. Then click the '''Paste''' button. [[File:assembly_paste.png]] The selected part will then be attached to the cursor. Select a PickPoint in the display to place the part upon.<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Rotate</h3> <br />
[[File:assembly_rotate.png|right|450px]]<br />
Creates a rotated version of an existing part which can be placed into the Assembly project. <br />
<br />
Select a part from the Part List and click the '''Rotate''' button. [[File:rotate.png]]<br />
<br />
Select an axis to rotate the part around in the '''Select Axis of Rotation''' area. <br />
<br />
Enter an amount to rotate the part in the '''Rotation Amount''' field, or left click on the part and drag the cursor left or right to rotate the part. <br />
<br />
Enter a value in the '''Snap Increment''' field and check the '''Snap Rotation''' checkbox in order to use snap rotation. Snap rotation will rotate a part by the amount in the Snap Increment field when the part is rotated using the left mouse button.<br />
<br />
'''To change the amount that the part is rotated''' when not using snap rotation, enter an amount in the Rotation Speed field. By default, the rotation speed will be 1, meaning the part will be rotated one degree at a time. Entering a decimal will allow the part to be rotated by smaller increments. Whenever you rotate a part in a certain axis, you must click the '''Apply Current Rotation button''' before rotating the part in another axis. <br />
<br />
'''To reset the orientation of the part''', click the Reset All button. <br />
<br />
After all rotations have been applied, click the OK button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Coupler</h3><br />
[[File:assembly_coupler.png|right|450px]]<br />
Allows the user to move the coupler (the anchor point of the part). <br />
<br />
Select a part in the Part List and click the '''Coupler''' button. [[File:coupler.png]] The Coupler Location window will appear. <br />
<br />
'''To set the reference point''', click the '''Select Reference Point''' and click a PickPoint in the Coupler Location window display area. <br />
<br />
'''To move the anchor point''', use the Incremental Move fields and enter movement values. <br />
<br />
'''To set all fields to 0''' in the Incremental Move area, click the Clear Values button. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Reset''' button to reset the coupler to its original location. <br />
<br />
'''To toggle between viewing a shaded and wireframe''' version of the part, use the display mode options. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Mirror</h3><br />
[[File:assembly_mirror.png|right|450px]]<br />
Creates a mirrored version of an existing part which can be placed into the Assembly project. <br />
<br />
Select a part from the Part List and click the '''Mirror''' button. [[File:mirror.png]] The Mirror Part window will appear. <br />
<br />
In the Select Mirror Direction area, select an axis to mirror the part across. After a part has been mirrored, you must click '''Apply Mirror''' before mirroring the part again. <br />
<br />
Click '''Reset Current''' to revert the part to the last time you clicked the Apply Mirror button. <br />
<br />
Click '''Reset All''' to reset the part to its original orientation. Click the home button to set the display to the home view. Click OK to create the mirrored part. <br />
<br />
'''To toggle between viewing a shaded and wireframe''' version of the part, use the display mode options. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Edit</h3><br />
<br />
To edit a plate part in the [[Plate]] design interface, first select a plate part from the Part List, then click the '''Edit''' button. [[File:edit.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Open File</h3><br />
<br />
To open a part or plate part and use it in the current assembly design, click the '''Open Part''' [[File:open_part.png]] or '''Open Plate''' button [[File:open_plate.png]] and select a part/plate file. The part will then be added to the Part List and attached to the cursor where it can be placed by clicking on a PickPoint in the part display.<br />
<br />
==PickPoints==<br />
<h3>Single</h3><br />
<h4>Single Point</h4> <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button [[File:set_reference.png]] and click a PickPoint to set it as the reference point. <br />
<br />
*'''Normal Mode:''' Use the fields to enter the incremental distance from the Reference point that the new point will be. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Travel Mode:''' Use the fields to enter the incremental distance from the reference point that the new point will be. Once the Apply button is clicked, this new point will automatically become the new reference point. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Move Mode:''' This mode is used to move points. The selected reference point will be the point that is moved. Enter values into the fields to move this point using it's original location as the reference location. '''''Note:''''' This is the only function in the assembly interface that can be used to relocate PickPoints. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Mirror Mode:''' While in mirror mode, all points placed will have a copy of the point mirrored across all axes. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''''Note:''''' For easier navigation, notice how the harpoon fields axis rotates with the display frame and matches the orientation of the parts/points.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button [[File:apply.png]] to create the PickPoint. To reset all fields in the Single Point area to 0, click the '''Clear Values''' button.<br />
<br />
<h3>Lines</h3><br />
<h4>Line (Two Points)</h4><br />
Creates a PickPoint that is aligned between two other PickPoints. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button and click two PickPoints or a single line. <br />
<br />
In the '''Move Amount''' field, enter the distance from the first PickPoint that the new PickPoint should be. To measure the Move Amount distance from the other point, click the Swap Ends button. To set the new point directly in between the reference points click the Split in Half button. <br />
<br />
To place the point, click the '''Apply''' button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Intersection</h4><br />
Creates a point at the intersection of two user defined lines. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button and click on a line or the start point and end point of the first line. Click the start and end point of the second line. Check the '''Closest Intersection''' option to have the new point created at the intersection to become the reference point after it is created.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place a PickPoint at the intersection of the two lines. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>String</h4><br />
Creates multiple points by specifying the quantity and spacing values.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button and click on a line or the start point and the end point of a line to define the reference points. Define the spacing between the points in the '''Spacing''' field and the number of points in the '''Quantity''' field. These points will begin at the starting end of the reference feature(s). To measure the points from the other end of the reference line, click the '''Swap Ends''' button. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place the PickPoints.<br />
<br />
<h3>Plane/Arc</h3><br />
<h4>Plane</h4><br />
Creates a point by using a line and a plane for reference. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Base Point''' button and click a PickPoint to set it as the center of the plane. Then select which axis the plane should lie on (X, Y, Z Plane or 3 Points). If 3 Points is selected, 3 PickPoints will need to be selected to define the custom plane.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click two PickPoints, a line, or an arc to set them as the feature that the new line will be placed along. The new PickPoint will be at the intersection of the line and the plane. Click the '''Ignore Arc Ends''' to treat arc features as circles. <br />
<br />
To move the new PickPoint up or down along the line, enter a value in the '''Move Amount''' field. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place the new point. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Arc</h4><br />
Creates a PickPoint by using an arc as reference. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Arc''' button and click on an arc to select it. The angle of the arc should appear under Arc Angle in the Arc area. <br />
<br />
Enter the angle along the arc that the new point should be in the '''Sweep Angle''' field. To set a point above or below the selected arc, enter a value in the '''Radius Offset''' field. Negative values will cause the PickPoint to be inside the arc. Click the '''Split in Half''' button to set the PickPoint halfway across the arc. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place the PickPoint.<br />
<br />
<h3>Angle</h3><br />
Creates a PickPoint that is at a specified angle and distance from another PickPoint. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button and click on a PickPoint to set it as the reference point. <br />
<br />
Use the Tri-Globe to select the direction of the new point. Enter an angle, using the Tri-Globe to determine which direction 0° and 90° are. Enter the distance from the reference point that the new point should be in the Length field. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place the PickPoint. <br />
<br />
Alternatively, you can leave the Length and Angle field at 0 and use the two fields below the Length field to enter the distance from the reference point.<br />
<br />
'''Note:''' For easier navigation, notice how the tri-globe rotates with the display frame and matches the orientation of the parts/points.<br />
<br />
<h3>Edit Points</h3><br />
<h4>Change Color</h4><br />
<br />
To change the color of PickPoint(s), first select a color by clicking on the color block icon and choosing a color from the menu. Then click the '''Select Point(s)''' button and click on the point(s) in the display frame to change them to the newly select color.<br />
<br />
To change the color of all PickPoints, first select a color by clicking on the color block icon and choosing a color from the menu. Then click the '''Change All''' button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Display</h4><br />
<br />
Displays or hides PickPoints. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Hide''' button [[File:hide_pickpoints.png]] and click a PickPoint to toggle if it is displayed or hidden. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Display All''' button [[File:displayall_pickpoints.png]] to display all PickPoints. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Hide All''' button [[File:hideall_pickpoints.png]] to hide all PickPoints. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Delete Points</h4><br />
Click the '''Delete''' button [[File:delete_points.png]] and click on a PickPoint to delete it. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Verify Points</h4><br />
Displays the coordinates of up to two PickPoints and their distance from each other. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Verify Mode''' button [[File:verify_mode.png]] and click on a PickPoint. Information on that PickPoint will be displayed. Click on a second PickPoint to see information on both PickPoints and their distance from each other.<br />
<br />
<h2>Design</h2><br />
New parts can be drawn out using the Harpoon design interface or the LRA designer fields.<br />
<br />
[[Harpoon]] || [[LRA]]<br />
<br />
<h2>Edit</h2><br />
[[File:assembly_edit.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Move</h3><br />
<h4>Move Features</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Move Part''' button [[File:move_part.png]] to move full parts to new locations. <br />
<br />
First, click on a PickPoint of a part. If Incremental Move is not checked, you will be asked to choose which PickPoint will be the anchor point. You will then be able to click any PickPoint to place the part there, with its anchor point centered on the point you select. If '''Incremental Move''' is checked, you will only have to click the part you are moving once. You will then be able to enter values into the Front, Back, Left, Right, Ceiling, and Floor fields in order to move the part in that direction by that value. To reset all fields to 0, click the Clear Values button. <br />
<br />
To finalize and move the part to the new location, click the '''Apply''' button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Move Feature''' button [[File:move_feature.png]] to move single features.<br />
<br />
First, click a part and select a feature to move. If Incremental Move is checked, enter values into the Front, Back, Left, Right, Ceiling, and Floor fields and click the Apply button. If Incremental Move is not checked, click a PickPoint to move the feature there. The part will then be adjusted accordingly. See image below for an example of this function.<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_move_1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Move Bend</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Nudge Bend''' button [[File:nudge_bend.png]] to push a bend a given amount in a specific direction. <br />
<br />
Next, select the bend that will be adjusted. Use the green and pink directional buttons to slightly push the bend in a certain direction. The amount that the bend will be nudged is determined by the value in the '''Amount''' field, which can be adjusted by supplying a new amount.<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_move_nudgebend1.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Move Bend''' button [[File:move_bend.png]] to move a bend using the mouse controls. <br />
<br />
First, select the bend to move. Next, the move bend tool will be placed upon this bend and can be used by clicking and dragging any of the arrows to pull the bend in a certain direction.<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_move_2.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Adjust Radius</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Adjust Radius''' button [[File:adjust_radius.png]] to increase/decrease the radius of a selected bend.<br />
<br />
First, select the bend that will be adjusted. Then just click and drag the bend back and forth to adjust the radius. <br />
<br />
[[File:edit_move_3.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_copy.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Copy</h3><br />
<h4>Copy Single Part</h4><br />
Click the '''Select Part''' button [[File:select_part.png]] to copy and paste a single part to a new location.<br />
<br />
First, select the part that will be copied. Next, choose a PickPoint to be the anchor point for the part. This point will be used as the "handle" to drag it to the new location. Last, click on the new location point to place the part.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_copy_1.png|650px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Copy Multiple Parts</h4><br />
<br />
Use the '''Copy Multiple Parts''' tools to copy and paste a specified group of parts or points to a new location.<br />
<br />
First, click the '''Set Base Point''' button [[File:set_base.png]] to define the anchor point of the part/point group. This will be used as the point to attach the group to the new location point.<br />
<br />
Next, select the points or parts that will be copied by clicking on them. Once selected, a part/point will be highlighted in red. Be sure to specify which kind of features will be copied by choosing the '''Parts''' or '''PickPoints''' option. Click the '''Clear All''' button to clear all selections. Click the '''Select All''' button to select all of parts or points currently in the assembly design. Click the '''Complete''' button [[File:complete.png]] to indicate that all the desired parts have been selected.<br />
<br />
Last, click the '''Paste Parts''' button [[File:paste_parts.png]] and select the new location point to place the parts.<br />
<br />
In order to paste the part or group of parts into another file or interface, open the new or existing file, go to the '''Edit-->Copy''' section and select the '''Paste Parts''' button [[File:paste_parts.png]] and select the new location point to place the parts.<br />
<br />
[[File:1edit_copy_2.png]][[File:1edit_rotate.png]][[File:2edit_rotate.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Rotate</h3><br />
Rotate is used to rotate current parts in the assembly design.<br />
<br />
First, select the part to rotate by clicking the '''Select Part''' button [[File:select_part.png]] and click on the part.<br />
<br />
Next, choose which axis the part will rotate about then click on a point on the part to define the rotation point. <br />
<br />
Enter an amount to rotate the part in the '''Rotation Amount''' field, or left click on the part and drag the cursor left/right/up/down to rotate the part. <br />
<br />
Enter a value in the '''Snap Increment''' field and check the '''Snap Rotation''' checkbox in order to use snap rotation. Snap rotation will rotate a part by the amount in the Snap Increment field when the part is rotated using the left mouse button. <br />
<br />
<br />
To change the amount that the part is rotated when not using snap rotation, enter an amount in the '''Rotation Speed''' field. By default, the rotation speed will be 1, meaning the part will be rotated one degree at a time. Entering a decimal will allow the part to be rotated by smaller increments. Whenever you rotate a part in a certain axis, you must click the Apply Current Rotation button before rotating the part in another axis. <br />
<br />
To apply the new rotation to the part, click the '''Apply''' button. [[File:apply_part.png]]<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_mirror.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Mirror</h3><br />
The mirror function can be used to mirror parts in an assembly across a specified axis or a custom defined plane. <br />
<br />
To do so, first click the '''Select Part''' button [[File:select_part.png]] and click on a part in the assembly display frame. <br />
<br />
Next, choose an axis to mirror the part across. If the '''Plane (3 points)''' option is chosen, three PickPoints will need to be chosen in order to define the plane. <br />
<br />
Check the '''Keep Original Part''' to treat the mirror as a copy. While this option is checked, the mirrored version of the part and the original part will remain in the design. Otherwise, the original part will be moved to the new mirrored location.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button [[File:apply_part.png]] to finalize the mirror. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_mirror_1.png]]<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_delete.png|right]]<br />
<br />
Bent and straight parts can be deleted from the current assembly design in this tab. <br />
<br />
'''To delete a part''', first select a part by clicking on it in the list (listed parts will be highlighted in yellow once they are selected) or click directly on a part in the part display (parts will be highlighted in red once they are selected).<br />
<br />
Click the '''Un-Select All''' button [[File:unselect.png]] to un-selected all parts that are currently selected.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Remove Selected''' button [[File:remove_selected.png]] to delete the selected parts.<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_stretch.png|right|300px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Stretch</h3><br />
Stretch moves a selection of PickPoints in a specified direction, adjusting all parts to compensate.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
First '''select a view'''. This will determine which direction the assembly will be viewed from during the stretch process. <br />
<br />
'''Select the parts/PickPoints''' that will be stretched by clicking on any two spots on the display in order to draw a selection rectangle between them (the rectangle will be defined by a light blue line). <br />
<br />
Then select a direction and enter the amount that the selected parts/PickPoints should be moved in the '''Distance''' field. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button [[File:apply_part.png]] to apply the stretch. <br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_stretch_1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_misc.png|right|300px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Misc</h3><br />
<br />
<h4>Add Bend</h4><br />
'''To add a bend to a preexisting part''', click the '''Add Bend''' button [[File:add_bend.png]] and '''select a straight length''' of a part by clicking on it to choose a location for the bend. The bend will be placed at the mid point of the selected part length. <br />
<br />
'''Enter the offset distance''' between the part and the bend. Then click the '''OK''' button to place the bend. Whichever die is currently selected in the Assembly [[Assembly#Die|die menu]] will be used for this bend.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_addbend.png|750px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Scale</h4><br />
'''To scale the size of parts, material, or bend radii''', click the '''Scale''' button. [[File:misc_scale_1.png]]<br />
<br />
In the scale window, scale values for each of these features can be supplied. Provide a percentage value to either increase or decrease the scale of a feature. See image below for an example. <br />
<br />
[[File:misc_scale.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Explode</h4><br />
Exploding an Assembly will move all parts away from each other so that they can be viewed separately. <br />
<br />
<br />
First, click the '''Explode''' button. [[File:explode.png]] <br />
<br />
The click on a PickPoint to set the base point for the assembly, and enter an explode factor to explode an Assembly project. Larger numbers will create greater distances between the parts. Click the '''Explode''' button to reset the assembly back to the normal display.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Clean</h4><br />
Click the '''Clean''' button [[File:clean.png]] to clear the assembly of any zero length tubes that may be in the assembly design. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Copy Radius</h4><br />
Click the '''Copy Radius''' button [[File:copy_radius.png]] to copy the radius of one bend to another. <br />
<br />
First, select the bend with the radius that you want to copy. Next, select the bend that the copied radius will be applied to.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_copyradius.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_adjustcenterline.png|500px|right]]<br />
<h4>Adjust Centerline</h4><br />
Click the '''Adjust Centerline''' button [[File:adjustcenterline.png]] to change how the part measurements are interpreted. In the part designers, parts are assumed to be based on centerline. This tool allows the current part dimensions to be from the inside or outside of the tube instead. <br />
<br />
After clicking the button, '''select''' a part in the display to adjust it. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''To change the Location and/or Location Type''' for a bend, first select the bend by clicking on it in the part display. A menu will appear where the location and location types can be adjusted. Click on either of the drop down menus to choose new options.<br />
<br />
::[[File:adjustcenterline_2.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
Once a new location or location type has been chosen, a red preview reflecting the location changes will appear. The original part will be shown in green (if the Display Original Part is checked). <br />
<br />
Click the '''Home''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_3.png]] to set the part preview to the default location and orientation.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Zoom Fit''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_4.png]] to zoom all the way in on the current view of the 3D part display and fit it to the display frame. <br />
<br />
<br />
The part model can be shown in either wire frame or as a solid shaded model. Click on the '''wireframe''' button [[File:wireframe.png]] to show the model in wireframe. Click on the '''shaded''' button [[File:shaded.png]] to show the model as a shaded part.<br />
<br />
<br />
Check the box next to '''Display Original Part''' to have the original part preview shown in the adjust centerline interface after changes are made to the locations.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Inside''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_5.png]] to set the locations for all of the bends to inside.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Center''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_6.png]] to set the locations for all of the bends back to centerline.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Outside''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_7.png]] to set the locations for all of the bends to outside.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''OK''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_8.png]] to take the location and location type adjustments and apply them to the current part design.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Labels</h3><br />
'''To place labels on the current assembly design''', first click the '''New''' button [[File:new_label.png]] and select a location for the label by clicking on a PickPoint. Next, enter the label text and click '''OK'''.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_label_1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
The size of the label font is determined by the '''Label Size''' value (larger values result in larger labels and vice versa). '''To change the size''', enter a new value in this field. The color of the labels is determined by the Label Color button. '''To change the color''', click this button and select a new color. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''To move a label''', click the '''Move''' button [[File:move_label.png]] and select a new PickPoint to place the label in the new location.<br />
<br />
'''To delete a label''', click the '''Delete''' button [[File:delete_label.png]] and click on a label.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Break or Join Tubes</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''Break Auto''' button [[File:break_auto.png]] to automatically break the part at a specified interval. <br />
<br />
First, define the maximum length of tube required between break points in the '''Max Length''' field. Next click the '''Break Auto''' button and select a part to break it. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Break Point''' button [[File:break_point.png]] to place a break point on a certain part. Break points will define where the part will be separated. After clicking this button, select which part will be broken by clicking on it in the display area. Last, select the PickPoint where the break will occur. <br />
<br />
[[File:misc_breakpoint.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Join Tubes''' button [[File:join_tubes.png]] to connect two tubes together. First, select the first part to join, and then select the other part that will be joined to it. <br />
<br />
[[File:misc_join.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_miter_1.png|right|250px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Miter Trim''' button [[File:miter_trim.png]] to add a miter at the intersection of two tubes.<br />
<br />
First select the first tube that will be mitered. Next, select the other tube that will be mitered. These tubes will be given some extra length to compensate for the mitering cut (''See image to the right''). If the '''Create Cut''' option is checked, a cut will be applied to the part at this point on the part. Cuts can be seen in the '''[[Cutting]]''' tab.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_miter.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Single Bend CLR Change</h3><br />
<br />
'''To adjust the CLR of a single bend''', first select a die in the '''Select Die''' menu in the Single Bend CLR Change area. Next click the '''Select Bend''' button [[File:select_bend.png]] and click on a bend to apply the selected die to it.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_clr.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_panel.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:panel_01.png|left|250px]]<br />
In the panel tab, plate panels can be created by defining their location on an assembly.<br />
<br />
To create a panel, first click the '''Select Tubes''' button [[File:select_tubes.png]]. Next, select sections of tube on the assembly that are on the same plane to define the outline of the panel (a minimum of 2 tubes is required). When selecting tubes, be sure to select the '''''starting end''''' of the tube. Once all the necessary tubes are selected, click the '''Complete''' button. [[File:complete.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:panel_order.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
The parts will then be listed in the chart below. The corner and value specifications will need to be supplied for the corners and the wrap value will need to be given for the edges of the panel. <br />
<br />
<br />
Once these values/options have been defined, click the '''Create Plate''' button. [[File:create_plate.png]] Give the panel and name and choose a plate material. Click the '''OK''' button to create the panel. Once a part is created, it is added to the [[Main#Parts List|parts list]] in the [[Main]] tab.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Opposite Direction''' button to flip the side of the tube that the panel is placed upon.<br />
<br />
[[File:panel_03.png|400px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
To adjust the panel after it has been created, just change any of the options and click the '''Create Plate''' button to update the panel.<br />
<br />
<br />
To do more in depth edits with the plate, such as adding holes, click the '''Edit Plate''' button to bring the plate into the [[Plate]] design interface. Once the edits are complete, the plate can be sent back into the assembly by using the '''Transfer''' menu [[File:transfer.png]] and selecting the current assembly project. The plate will be brought back in and placed in its original location on the tube(s). <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Corner'''<br />
<br />
*'''Connect:''' The corner of the panel will be flat, connecting the ends of the straight lengths on either side of the bend.<br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_connect.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Intersection:''' The corner of the panel will meet at the outside intersections of the tubes, at the apex.<br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_intersection.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Radius:''' The corner of the panel will be rounded according the the radius value given in the '''Value''' field. <br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_radius.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Chamfer:''' The corner of the panel will be cut diagonally back from the corner the distance provided in the '''Value''' field.<br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_chamfer.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Notch:''' The corner of the panel will have a 90 degree notch cut out of it. The size of the notch is determined by the size provided in the '''Value''' field.<br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_notch.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
The '''Wrap''' value determines how far the material will overlap the edge of the tube. This value is given in terms of degrees.<br />
<br />
[[File:panel_02.png]]<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_dimensions.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Dimensions</h2><br />
<h3>Create</h3><br />
<h4>Single</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Single''' button [[File:dimensions_single.png]] to place a single dimension. First, select a line feature or two points that the dimension will be placed between. Then choose a placement location for the dimension text.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_1.png|650px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Multiple</h4><br />
Click the '''Multiple''' button [[File:multiple.png]] to place multiple dimensions along a specified area of an assembly. First, select a line feature where the dimensions will start, then select end point of the dimensions. Between these features, each possible dimension will be placed.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_2.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Inside Angle</h4><br />
Click the '''Inside Angle''' button [[File:inside_angle.png]] to place an angle measure dimension at the inside of the intersection of two lines. First, select a line or reference point to represent the beginning of the dimension. Next, select the inside point of the line and/or the second reference line. Last, choose a location to place the dimension text.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_3.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Outside Angle</h4><br />
Click the '''Outside Angle''' button [[File:outside_angle.png]] to place an angle measure dimension around the outside angle of the reference lines. First, select a line or reference point to represent the beginning of the dimension. Next, select the inside point of the line and/or the second reference line. Last, choose a location to place the dimension text.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_4.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Edit</h3><br />
<br />
<h4>Move</h4><br />
Click the '''Move''' button [[File:move_dimension.png]] to relocate the text and marker of a dimension. First select the dimension that will be moved. Next, using the cursor, click on a new location to place the dimension.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_5.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Delete</h4><br />
To delete dimensions, click the '''Delete''' button [[File:delete_dimension.png]] and click on a dimension(s) to delete them.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Settings</h3><br />
The appearance of dimension text and markers can be adjusted using these settings. <br />
<br />
*'''Text Size:''' The size of the dimension text can be supplied here. Larger values will result in larger dimension font size and vice versa.<br />
<br />
*'''Text Color:''' The color of the dimension text can be chosen here. Click the color button and select a color to adjust text color. <br />
<br />
*'''Line Width:''' The width of the dimension markers can be given here. Larger values will result in thicker dimension lines and vice versa.<br />
<br />
*'''Line Color:''' The color of the dimension marker lines can be chosen here. Click the color button and select a color to adjust line color. <br />
<br />
*'''Tolerance:''' The decimal tolerance for the dimension values can be adjusted here. The decimal tolerance controls how many digits will be allowed after these values. In the tolerance options, each digit place is represented by an n. <br />
<br />
:Dimension values can be displayed in either fractional or decimal format. To change the format and/or tolerance for lengths, click the drop down menu and select an option from the list. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Display Dimensions:''' Check the box next to '''Display Dimensions''' to have the dimensions placed on the assembly design. Uncheck this box to hide the dimension markers and values.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>2D Mode</h3><br />
[[File:2d_dimensions_1.png|right]]<br />
In 2D Mode, the assembly will be shown from the top, left, and right. Dimensions can then be placed on these different views of the assembly. The display can be printed using '''File --> Print''' or by clicking the '''Print''' icon.<br />
<br />
<h4>Create</h4><br />
<br />
*'''Horizontal:''' Click the '''Horizontal''' button [[File:horizontal_dim.png]] to place a horizontal dimension along a selected line or between two selected PickPoints.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Vertical:''' Click the '''Vertical''' button [[File:vertical_dim.png]] to place a vertical dimension on a vertical line or between two selected pickpoints.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Linear:''' Click the '''Linear''' button [[File:linear_dim.png]] to place a dimension along any line or between any two PickPoints.<br />
<br />
*'''Inside Angle:''' Click the '''Inside Angle''' button [[File:inside_angle_dim.png]] to place an inside angle dimension at the intersection of two lines. First, select a line or reference point to represent the beginning of the dimension. Next, select the inside point of the line and/or the second reference line. Last, choose a location to place the dimension text.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Outside Angle:''' Click the '''Outside Angle''' button [[File:outside_angle_dim.png]] to place an outside angle dimension around the intersection of two lines. First, select a line or reference point to represent the beginning of the dimension. Next, select the inside point of the line and/or the second reference line. Last, choose a location to place the dimension text.<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Edit</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Move''' button [[File:2d_move.png]] to relocate the text and marker of a dimension. First select the dimension that will be moved. Next, using the cursor, click on a new location to place the dimension. <br />
<br />
To delete a dimension, click the '''Delete''' button [[File:2d_delete.png]] and click on a dimension.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Edit Value''' button [[File:2d_edit.png]] to change the value of a dimension. First, click on a dimension. Then enter the new value in the edit value window and click the '''OK''' button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Settings</h4><br />
<br />
*'''Arrow Width:''' This is the width of the arrows at the ends of the dimension line. Enter a value in this field to define the arrow width. Larger values will result in wider arrows and vice versa. <br />
<br />
*'''Arrow Length:'''This is the length of the arrows at the ends of a dimension line. Enter a value in this field to define the arrow width. Larger values will result in longer arrows and vice versa. <br />
<br />
*'''Extension Stand-Off:''' This is the distance between the extension lines and the entity that the dimension is measuring. <br />
<br />
*'''Extension Offset:''' This is the distance that the extension lines extend beyond the dimension line. <br />
<br />
*'''Text Size:''' The size of the dimension text can be supplied here. Larger values will result in larger dimension font size and vice versa.<br />
<br />
*'''Line Width:''' The width of the dimension markers can be given here. Larger values will result in thicker dimension lines and vice versa.<br />
<br />
*'''Arrow Type:''' This is the shape of the arrows at the ends of a dimension line. Click on the menu next to Arrow Type in the value column and select an option from the drop down menu.<br />
<br />
*'''Tolerance:''' The decimal tolerance for the dimension values can be adjusted here. The decimal tolerance controls how many digits will be allowed after these values. In the tolerance options, each digit place is represented by an n. <br />
<br />
:Dimension values can be displayed in either fractional or decimal format. To change the format and/or tolerance for lengths, click the drop down menu and select an option from the list. <br />
<br />
[[File:2d_settings.png|right|300px]]<br />
*'''Text, Extension, and Dimension Color:''' The colors of the dimension text, extensions can be changed using these color options. To change the color of a feature, click on the corresponding button and select a color from the menu. (''See the image to the right'')<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Edit Existing</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Select''' [[File:ass_select1.png]] button and click on a dimension to view and/or edit its settings, which will be generated in the Settings area above.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' [[File:ass_select2.png]] button to apply any setting changes made to the currently selected dimension. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply to All''' [[File:Apply_to_ass.png]] button to apply the currently selected dimension settings to every dimension.<br />
<br />
<h2>Cutting</h2><br />
[[File:Cutting_picture12.png|right|]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
The Cutting tab contains the tools necessary for adding cuts to the ends of parts. Wrappers can be printed which, when wrapped around the end of a tube, mark where the tube needs to be cut.<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Make Cuts</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''New Cut''' button [[File:new_cut.png]] and click a part. The cut part will be highlighted in green once selected. Click a second part, plane, or multiple parts that the first part will be cut to fit against. The second and any consecutive selected parts will be highlighted in red. Click the '''Complete''' button. [[File:complete.png]] The cut should appear in the list of cuts on the Cutting tab and shown on the assembly. <br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:cutting_1.png|650px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Auto-Cut''' button [[File:auto_cut.png]] to let the software attempt to generate all cuts in the assembly project. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Cutting Plane</h3><br />
<br />
Using the cutting plane feature, a custom plate can be defined and used to place cuts anywhere on the assembly design. <br />
<br />
To place a cutting plane, click the '''New''' button [[File:new_plane.png]] and click on a PickPoint to define the center/base point of the plane. Then click the first direction and second direction of the plane. Once a plane is place in the assembly, it can be used as a cutting feature and will allow straight cuts to be placed anywhere. <br />
<br />
[[File:cutting_plane.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
To move the plane, click the '''Move''' button. Then click and drag the move tools directly on the plane to move, resize, and rotate the plane. See image below.<br />
<br />
[[File:plane_move.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Slot & Tab</h3><br />
<br />
'''RESERVED FOR DRAGON CUSTOMERS ONLY.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Slot_Tab0_Example1.jpg]]<br />
<br />
'''Use the Slot & Tab function only after you have set up your Slot & Tab settings in the [[Tube/Pipe Library]]. Attempting to use this function without creating valid settings applied to your tubing will not produce results.'''<br />
<br />
*Click the Slot & Tab [[File:Ass_Slot_N_Tab1.png]] button after you've created a cut and click on the green highlighted tube to apply the tab to it. This will also apply the slot to the outer edge of the red highlighted tube.<br />
<br />
*If the tab & slot is not wide or long enough, you can always change the settings in your [[Tube/Pipe Library]] and then click the '''"Complete"''' button to apply the changes to the cut.<br />
<br />
[[File:Slot_Tab1_Example1.png]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Cut Settings</h3><br />
<br />
If the '''Outside Diameter Only''' option is checked, the software will not display the inside diameter cut line for each cut. <br />
Using a hole saw requires the checking of the outside of the material only.''' "Check"''' the option '''"Outside Diameter Only"'''.<br />
<br />
[[File:HoleSaw3.jpg]]<br />
<br />
Using a grinder or plasma cutter requires checking of both sides of the material. '''"Uncheck"''' the option '''"Outside Diameter Only"'''.<br />
<br />
[[File:HoleSaw4.jpg]]<br />
<br />
<br />
If '''Distance to Perp of Bend''' is checked, the red line will indicate the distance to the perpendicular of the bend. The cut wrapper's red line will display the distance to the tangent of the nearest bend combined with the outside radius of the bend.<br />
<br />
If the '''Hide Completed Features''' option is checked, completed features from the new cut will be hidden in the design.<br />
<br />
If the '''Ignore Tube Ends''' option is checked, all new cuts will ignore the excess tubing leftover from all other cuts.<br />
<br />
If '''Mitered Cut''' is checked, all new cuts will be calculated as straight mitered cuts. If you are using a hole saw to cut your tubes leave Mitered Cut unchecked.<br />
<br />
If the '''Add Slot & Tab''' checkbox is checked, all new cuts will contain a tab on the intended cut tube and a slot on the adjoining tube. ''Adding a value into the value field to the right will rotate the tab around the tube by a degree between 0-360.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Cut Chart</h3><br />
[[File:cutting_2.png|right|600px]]<br />
A chart displaying a list of all the cuts currently applied to the assembly will be shown as well. <br />
<br />
Click on a cut to see a preview of the cut on the 3D model of the assembly. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click '''Delete''' [[File:delete_cut.png]] to remove the cut from the tube, or click '''Delete All''' [[File:delete_all_cuts.png]] to remove all cuts from the Assembly project.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click '''Print''' [[File:print_cut.png]] to print the currently selected wrapper, or click '''Print All''' [[File:print_all_cuts.png]] to print out all wrappers for the entire Assembly project.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:cut_wrapper.png|400px|right]]<br />
Click the '''Details''' button [[File:details.png]] to see a preview of the cutting wrapper. On each wrapper, there is a red line with a number on it. This line is used for lining up a wrapper on a tube. The number is the distance from the end of the tube that the red line should be. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Select''' button [[File:select_cut.png]] and click on a cut in the display area to select it from the assembly directly.<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_parts.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<h2>Parts</h2><br />
The Parts tab contains a list of all parts in the current Assembly project, tools that can be used to edit them, and the ability to transfer parts to a single part designer.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click on a part in the part list to select it. Once a part is selected in the list, it will be highlighted in yellow. Parts can also be selected by clicking directly on a part in the assembly. <br />
<br />
Use the drop down menu in the '''Die''' column to change the die for that part or use the drop down in the '''Material''' column to change the material. <br />
<br />
Click on the colored box in the '''Color''' column to change the parts color using the color menu. <br />
<br />
Select a part and use the '''Transfer''' menu [[File:transfer.png]] to bring it into another part design interface. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''Double click''' on this table to open it in a separate window. Click the '''Print''' button to print this chart.<br />
<br />
[[File:parts_2.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
<h2>Details</h2><br />
[[File:assembly_details.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
In the details tab, a list of every material used in the assembly project will be listed along with the material's attributes, such as the name, width, amount used, and weight.<br />
<br />
If '''weight per unit''' values have been given to the materials in the [[Tube/Pipe Library]], the total weight of the assembly will be shown below the table. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Change Die or Material</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''All Dies''' button [[File:all_dies.png]] to change all the dies used in the assembly to one specified die. After clicking the button, select a die from the menu and click the '''OK''' button to confirm the die change. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Match Die''' button [[File:match_die.png]] to replace all bends using a certain die with an alternate die. In the menu, select the die that will be replaced and selected the die that will replace it. Click the '''OK''' button to confirm.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''All Materials''' button [[File:all_materials.png]] to change all the materials used in the assembly to one specific material. After clicking the button, select a material from the menu and click the '''OK''' button to confirm the material change. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Print Details</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''Spreadsheet''' button [[File:spreadsheet.png]] to print out a page with an image of the 3D assembly model, the parts list, the chart shown in the [[Parts]] tab, and the material chart shown in the Details tab.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Setup Pack''' button [[File:setup_pack.png]] to print out multiple setup sheets for the parts in the current assembly. In the Setup Pack menu, the printing options can be selected.<br />
<br />
[[File:setup_pack_1.png|350px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Select Features to Print:''' Select what kind of features will be included on the setup sheet. <br />
<br />
*'''Select Printer:''' Choose the printer that the setup sheets will be printed from.<br />
<br />
*'''Select Parts to Print:''' Choose which part setup sheets will be included in this printing. Click the '''Check All''' button to select all parts. Click the '''Check None''' button to un-check all parts. <br />
<br />
Click the '''OK''' button to print the setup sheets. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_fullscale.png|right|400px]]<br />
Click the '''Full Scale''' button [[File:full_scale.png]] allows a full size, to scale, 2D version of the assembly design viewed from a specific direction to be printed to scale on multiple sheets. Each printed page will display one section of the full size assembly. When these pages are all combined, they will show the entire part design. <br />
<br />
Adjust the settings explained below and click the '''Print''' button to print out a full scale part outline.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Margins:''' The margins of each individual page can be set here in terms of inches. <br />
<br />
*'''Default Orientation:''' The orientation of the pages can be adjusted here by choosing either portrait or landscape.<br />
<br />
*'''Number of Pages:''' The width and height of the block of pages can be adjusted here. A preview of what the full group will be shown below. Each page is represented by a light blue outline. <br />
<br />
*'''Line Width:''' The width of the line representing the part features can be adjusted here. Smaller values will result in thinner lines while larger numbers will result in thicker lines.<br />
<br />
*'''Orientation:''' The angle that the part printout will be viewed from can be chosen here. <br />
<br />
*'''Position... :''' To reposition the part outline on the pages, click the '''Position...''' button. [[File:printscale_3.png]] The part outline will be attached to the cursor. Click to place the part in a new location. Keep in mind, if any of the part extends past the edge of the pages, <br />
<br />
*'''Print Options:''' <br />
<br />
:[[File:printscale_2.png|left]] Select Printer: Choose which printer to print from here.<br />
<br />
Number of Copies: The number of copies to print can be specified here.<br />
<br />
Print Preview: Check this box to have a preview of the pages shown before it is printed.<br />
<br />
Print to File: Check this box to save the pages as a Printer File (.prn).<br />
<br />
Print Page Numbers: Check this box to print page numbers on each page. <br />
<br />
Print Edge Lines: Check this box to include the margin lines on the pages.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Preview:''' At the bottom of the window, a preview of the part outline and the pages will be shown.<br />
<br />
:This preview can be adjusted by zooming, panning, and rotating. To zoom, use the scroll wheel on the mouse. Scroll up to zoom out and scroll down to zoom in. To pan/move the part preview, click and hold the scroll wheel or both mouse buttons and move the cursor around. The part preview will move with the cursor. To rotate, click and hold the right mouse button. Move the cursor around and the part will rotate with the cursor movements.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Assembly Tools</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''Nesting''' button [[File:nesting.png]] to <br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_price_1.png|right|400px]]<br />
Click the '''Price''' button [[File:assembly_price.png]] to view a chart containing the assembly's materials, quantity, and cost and time. These cost settings can be set up in the [[Tools]] Menu under [[Tools#Pricing Settings|Pricing Settings]].<br />
<br />
'''To add another column''' that will calculate the price for a specified amount of the part, enter a value into the Quantity First Field area or adjust the amount using the up and down arrows. Up to two extra columns can be added. <br />
<br />
'''To add a second column''', enter a value into the Quantity Second Field or adjust the amount using the up and down arrows. <br />
<br />
To '''print''' the current view of the Price List chart, click the '''Print''' button. [[File:print.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Assembly Menu</h2><br />
<br />
When a new assembly window is open, there will be a '''menu area''' located above the tabbed section and display frame.<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_2.png]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Material</h3><br />
<br />
[[File:material.png]] In the material menu, the material for the parts in the assembly can be selected. '''To select a material''', click the drop down menu and choose a material from the list. This material can be changed for each individual part later, this is just the material that is initially applied to new parts. Tube/pipe materials are defined in the [[Tube/Pipe Library]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Die</h3><br />
<br />
[[File:die.png]] In the die menu, the die used to bend the parts in the assembly can be selected. '''To select a die''', click the drop down menu and choose a die from the list. This can be changed for each individual part later, this is just the die that is initially applied to new parts. Dies are defined in the [[Die Library]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Straight</h3><br />
'''To create a straight tube between two PickPoints''', click the Straight button [[File:straight.png]] and click any two PickPoints or Auto points (points that are automatically generated along parts, such as mid points, apex point, or start and end of bend points ) in the display window. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Bent</h3><br />
'''To create a new bent part''', click the Bent button. [[File:bent.png]] In the Number of Bends window that appears, enter the number of bends that the part will have and click the OK button. To create the part, you must select the start point and the location of each bend, and the end point of the part. You cannot create a bend that is 180° or more by using the Bent Part tool. In order to create such a bend, you would need to create two separate parts. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Delete</h3><br />
'''To remove a part from the assembly''', first click on the '''Delete''' button. Then in the design frame, click on a part to delete it. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:entities_12.png|right]]<br />
<h3>Entities</h3> <br />
The Entities tool controls which parts and points are displayed in the assembly. Click the '''Entities''' button [[File:entities.png]] to open up this menu. Each row will represent straight part, bent part, and PickPoint. To hide a certain feature, click in the green box to remove the '''X'''. To have all features shown, click '''Display All''' button. [[File:display_all2.png]] To hide all PickPoints, click the '''Hide Points''' [[File:hide_points2.png]] button. To hide all parts, click the '''Hide Parts''' button. [[File:hide_parts2.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Bend Mode</h3><br />
This option controls the type of bend location for the very next bend-point selecting during the creation of a bent part. In other words, this setting will only affect the part being built. After selecting a bend-point, this setting will revert back to APEX, meaning you will need to select the right setting for each bend-point in the part (unless the points are APEX).<br />
<br />
The type selected under this menu indicates what the bend-point represents:<br />
<br />
[[File:bend_mode.png|left]]<br />
'''Apex:''' The bend-point is the apex of the bend, which is the intersection point of the two legs on either side of the bend.<br />
<br />
'''Tangent (Start):''' The bend-point is at the very start of the bend; where the straight leg meets the bend. (no bent material will be included in the measurements)<br />
<br />
'''Tangent (End):''' The bend-point is at the very end of the bend; where the bend meets the straight leg.<br />
<br />
'''Perpendicular (Start):''' The bend-point is at the perpendicular point on the first leg (start side). See image below. This location can also be measured as the start of the bend plus the radius; along the first leg.<br />
<br />
'''Perpendicular (End):''' The bend-point is at the perpendicular point on the second leg (end side). See image below. This location can also be measured as the end of the bend plus the radius; along the second leg.<br />
<br />
'''Mid:''' The bend-point is the exact mid point of the bend (middle of the bend).<br />
<br />
'''Direction -> Any Point:''' This option requires the selection of TWO bend-points for a single bend. The first bend-point represents a location on the first leg of the bend (before the bend). This point can be located anywhere on the leg. The second point represents a location on the bend. This point can be located anywhere on the bend.<br />
<br />
'''Any Point -> Direction:''' This option requires the selection of TWO bend-points for a single bend. The first point represents a location on the bend. This point can be located anywhere on the bend. The second bend-point represents a location on the second leg of the bend (after the bend). This point can be located anywhere on the leg. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''As always when working in the assembly, the points represent the centerline of the part.'''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Settings</h4><br />
[[File:assembly_settings.png|right|500px]]<br />
These settings are used to control the display and general options within the current assembly.<br />
<br />
'''Main Display'''<br />
<br />
The main display settings control the part display and part model appears in the assembly interface. The background of the main display can be shown.<br />
<br />
:*'''Background:''' Select the '''Normal''' option for the part display background to be shown with the normal blue to white gradient. Select the '''Custom Color''' option to choose a custom solid color. Select the '''Image''' option to select an image file to display as the background. <br />
<br />
:*'''Auto Zoom:''' Check this option to automatically zoom all the way in on the current view of the 3D part display and fit it to the display frame. <br />
<br />
:*'''Display Wall Thickness:''' Check this option to have the thickness of the material shown on the part model when in shaded mode.<br />
<br />
:*'''Display Tubes as Cut:''' Check this option to have the profiles of any cuts on the tubes represented on the part model.<br />
<br />
:*'''Model Quality:''' To adjust the graphic quality of the part model, select an option from this menu. Parts can be shown in high, medium, and low quality.<br />
<br />
:*'''PickPoint Size:''' To adjust the size of all the pickpoints shown in the display frame, select an option from this menu. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Help Text:''' Check the box next to '''Display Cursor Help Text''' to toggle the help text on and off in assembly. This help text will help guide certain processes within assembly. The color of this text can be adjusted using the '''Text Color''' option.<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Tri Star'''<br />
[[File:tri_star.png|left|100px]]<br />
These options will control how the tri-star will appear in the current assembly design. The tri-star can be '''Directional''' (labeled with ceiling/floor, front/back, left/right), '''XYZ''' (labeled with X, Y, and Z), '''Lines Only''', or '''None''' (not shown at all). The default scale value can also be defined here, which will control how large the tri-star will appear. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Color of New PickPoints:''' The default color of new PickPoints can be adjusted here. Click the '''color''' button and select a color from the menu to choose a new PickPoint color. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Prompt for Straight Part Names:''' While this option is checked, every time a new [[#Straight|straight part]] is added to the assembly, a window will prompt for a name to be given to this part instead of defaulting to "Straight 1" for example. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Overwrite Master Parts when Changed:'''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Auto Switch to Line Mode:''' Check this option to have the display mode automatically switched to line mode whenever new points or parts are being added/edited in the current assembly design. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Auto-Save Frequency:''' The time interval between the automatic saves can be adjusted using this menu. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''Set Defaults:''' Click the '''Set Defaults''' button [[File:set_default.png]] to use these settings as the defaults for future assembly designs.<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Restore Defaults:''' Click the '''Restore Defaults''' button [[File:restore_defaults.png]] to reset all the settings to the default selections.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Manufacture Warnings</h3> <br />
[[File:manufacture_warnings_1.png|right|400px]]<br />
If any problems are found with a part, a '''warning icon''' [[File:manufacture_warnings.png]] will appear at the top of the assembly window. If this icon is clicked, manufacturing warnings will be listed. These warnings are based on the die limitations applied to the current die used to bend the part(s). These limitations can be defined in the [[Die Library#Die Limitations - Minimum Distances|Die Library]]. The part name, a short description of the problem, location, and fix (if available). If an auto-fix is available, double-click on the auto-fix description to execute the auto-fix. Click the '''Fix All''' button [[File:fix_all.png]] to fix all problems with a fix option available.</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Bend-Tech_Dragon_-_A400_Series&diff=9743Bend-Tech Dragon - A400 Series2018-05-17T21:37:04Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Dragon Information<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Dragon A-400 Setup Documents<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/dragon_optimization_guide.pdf Dragon Optimization Guide]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/dragon_a400_assembly_manual.pdf Dragon A400 Assembly Manual]<br />
*[[Dragon A400 Calibration]]<br />
|<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/dragon_a400_operator_manual.pdf Dragon A400 Operator's Manual]<br />
*[[Machine Control Screen|Dragon A400 Control Screen]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Dragon Material Settings]]<br />
*[[Dragon Die Calibration]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Dragon Rotation Calibration]]<br />
*[[Dragon A400 Side Offsets Calibration]]<br />
*[[Dragon A400 Machine Library|Dragon Machine Library]]<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Troubleshooting and Maintenance Documents<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[[A400 Ethernet Connection Scenarios|Ethernet Connection Scenarios]]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/dragon_preventative_maint.html Dragon Preventative Maintenance]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/a_and_z_motor_actuator_maintenance_guide.pdf A and Z Axis Actuator Maintenance Guide]<br />
|<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/x_motor_set_screw_adjustment_guide.pdf X-Motor Set Screw Adjustment Guide]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/pulley_spacing_and_belt_tension_guide.pdf Pulley Spacing and Belt Tension Guide]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/grounding_with_dielectric_grease.pdf Grounding with Dielectric Grease]<br />
|<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/grounding_wire_fix_for_arcing_out.pdf Grounding Wire Fix for Arcing Out]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/machine_control_connection_guide.pdf Machine Control Connection Guide]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/lifter_station_adjustment_guide.pdf Lifter Station Adjustment Guide]<br />
|<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/power_switch_replacement_guide.pdf Power Switch Replacement Guide]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/y_motor_mounting_bracket_installation.pdf Y-Motor Mounting Bracket Installation]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/a400_water_system_assembly_guide.pdf Water System Assembly Guide]<br />
|<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Operations<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Drag_Launcher.png|link=Bend-Tech Launcher|40px]] '''[[Bend-Tech Launcher]]''' || [[File:BT_Product_Dragon1.png|link=Dragon Guide|40px]] '''[[Dragon Guide]]'''|| [[File:BT_Product_Dragon_Options.png|link=Dragon Options|40px]] '''[[Dragon Options]]''' || [[File:Dragon-Tips_&_Hints1.png|40px|link=DragonA400 Tips & Hints|Dragon Tips & Hints]] '''[[DragonA400 Tips & Hints|Dragon Tips & Hints]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Tekla_Import_Icon1.png|40px|link=Tekla Import Guide]] '''[[Tekla Import Guide]]''' || [[File:CAD_2_CAM1.png|40px|link=CAD to CAM Part Transfer]] '''[[CAD to CAM Part Transfer]]''' || [[File:Dynatorch_Guide1.png|40px|link=Dynatorch Dragon Guide]] '''[[Dynatorch Dragon Guide]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Tutorials<br />
|-<br />
|[[File:dragon_straight_tut2.png|40px|link=Dragon Straight Part Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Straight Part Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_bent_tut2.png|40px|link=Dragon Bent Part Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Bent Part Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_cust_design_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Custom Design Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Custom Design Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_nesting_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Nesting Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Nesting Tutorial]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:dragon_diamond_notch_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Diamond Notch Bridging Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Diamond Notch Bridging Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_plunge_holes_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Plunge Holes Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Plunge Holes Tutorial]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Video Tutorials<br />
|-<br />
|[[File:Dragon_tut_icon1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vd7Ie84tjZM&]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vd7Ie84tjZM Dragon Parts to Dragon Machine Tutorial]''' || [[File:Dragon_tut_icon2.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h6Dd46GK7wE]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h6Dd46GK7wE Assembly to Dragon Machine Tutorial]''' || [[File:IND_tut_icon1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b7kK7WUMKpM]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b7kK7WUMKpM Industrial Tutorial 1 - Import to Machine]''' || [[File:IND_tut_icon2.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q-1wpELF3Dw]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q-1wpELF3Dw Industrial Tutorial 2 - Design to Machine]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Dragon_S&T_Tut1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Pr0-D2EZL2g]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Pr0-D2EZL2g Dragon Slot and Tab Tutorial]'''</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=File:BT_Product_IND4.png&diff=9742File:BT Product IND4.png2018-05-11T13:01:22Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Main_Page&diff=9741Main Page2018-05-11T12:59:20Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div><br />
'''<h3>Welcome to the Official Bend-Tech Wiki</h3>'''<br />
<br />
Use the links below for detailed information on all aspects of the Bend-Tech software products.<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|[[File:Wiki_Help_Info1.png|link=https://youtu.be/Vw7UNV_seQg Wiki Guide Help Video|40px]] '''[https://youtu.be/Vw7UNV_seQg Wiki Guide Help Video]''' || <br />
[[File:Comp_Requirements.png|link=Basic Computer Requirements/Information]] '''[[Basic Computer Requirements/Information]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #E0A366; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Training Class Walkthroughs<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
| ||[[File:QS_training_class1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6w7Ozo9u0Jk|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6w7Ozo9u0Jk Training Class I]''' || [[File:QS_training_class2.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5YUxAIxSHXQ]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5YUxAIxSHXQ Training Class II]''' || [[File:QS_training_class3_SE_advanced.png|link=http://www.bend-tech.com/files/7x_training_class_3.pdf]] '''[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/7x_training_class_3.pdf Training Class III (PDF Only)]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #5882FA; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Bend-Tech 7x CAD Main Wiki<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: center; width="100%;" <br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_CAD_Articles.png|link=Bend-Tech Articles]] || [[File:BT_Product_EZ2.png|link=EZ Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_EZ_3D2.png|link=EZ-3D Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_PRO2.png|link=PRO Guide]] || [[File:BT_Product_SE2.png|link=SE Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_IND4.png|link=IND Guide]] || [[File:YouTube_Link_Icon1.png|link=Bend-Tech YouTube Videos]]<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #f46200; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Bend-Tech Dragon - A Series Main Wiki<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_Dragon_A150_Image1.png|link=Bend-Tech Dragon - A150 Series]]<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_Dragon_A400_Image1.png|link=Bend-Tech Dragon - A400 Series]]<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #c0c0c0; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Base Product Information Videos<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_EZ1a.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7vESYne3oFw|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7vESYne3oFw EZ]'''<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_EZ_3D1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UOqCLGgt6os|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UOqCLGgt6os EZ-3D]''' <br />
|[[File:BT_Product_PRO1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o2e7MVpVjgo|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o2e7MVpVjgo PRO]''' <br />
|[[File:BT_Product_SE1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jSV7jymGzeY|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jSV7jymGzeY SE]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_IND2.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8_eQCEvd5MQ|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8_eQCEvd5MQ Industrial]''' || [[File:BT_Product1_DragonA400.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9rJ0KFi9qu8]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9rJ0KFi9qu8 Dragon - A150 Series]''' || [[File:BT_Product1_Dragon.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oz1IlPLV4jo]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oz1IlPLV4jo Dragon - A400 Series]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=File:Slot_Tab0_Example1.jpg&diff=9740File:Slot Tab0 Example1.jpg2018-05-10T20:18:59Z<p>Fabcam1: Fabcam1 uploaded a new version of &quot;File:Slot Tab0 Example1.jpg&quot;</p>
<hr />
<div></div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Bend-Tech_Dragon_-_A150_Series&diff=9739Bend-Tech Dragon - A150 Series2018-05-10T19:00:03Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #CC6600; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Dragon Information<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #FF9102; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Dragon A-150 Setup Documents<br />
|-<br />
<br />
|<br />
*[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/dragon_optimization_guide.pdf Dragon Optimization Guide]<br />
*[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/dragon_assembly_manual.pdf Dragon A150 Assembly Manual]<br />
*[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/dragon_electronic_connections.pdf Dragon A150 Electronic Connections]<br />
|<br />
*[[Ethernet Connection Scenarios]]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/machine_control_connection_guide.pdf Machine Control Connection Guide]<br />
*[[Dragon Machine Library]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Dragon Calibration|Dragon A150 Calibration]]<br />
*[[Dragon Material Settings]]<br />
*[[Dragon Die Calibration]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Dragon Rotation Calibration]]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/dragon_preventative_maint.html Dragon Preventative Maintenance]<br />
|-<br />
<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #FF9102; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Operations<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Drag_Launcher.png|link=Bend-Tech Launcher|40px]] '''[[Bend-Tech Launcher]]''' || [[File:BT_Product_Dragon1.png|link=Dragon Guide|40px]] '''[[Dragon Guide]]'''|| [[File:BT_Product_Dragon_Options.png|link=Dragon Options|40px]] '''[[Dragon Options]]''' || [[File:Dragon-Tips_&_Hints1.png|40px|link=Dragon Tips & Hints]] '''[[Dragon Tips & Hints]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Tekla_Import_Icon1.png|40px|link=Tekla Import Guide]] '''[[Tekla Import Guide]]''' || [[File:CAD_2_CAM1.png|40px|link=CAD to CAM Part Transfer]] '''[[CAD to CAM Part Transfer]]''' || [[File:Machine_Controller1.png|40px|link=Dragon A150 Machine Control]] '''[[Machine Control|Dragon A150 Machine Control]]''' || [[File:Dynatorch_Guide1.png|40px|link=Dynatorch Dragon Guide]] '''[[Dynatorch Dragon Guide]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Dragon_Operation_List_Icon1.png|40px|link=Dragon General Operation]] '''[[Dragon General Operation|Dragon A150 General Operations]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #FF9102; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Tutorials<br />
|-<br />
|[[File:dragon_straight_tut2.png|40px|link=Dragon Straight Part Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Straight Part Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_bent_tut2.png|40px|link=Dragon Bent Part Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Bent Part Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_cust_design_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Custom Design Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Custom Design Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_nesting_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Nesting Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Nesting Tutorial]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:dragon_diamond_notch_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Diamond Notch Bridging Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Diamond Notch Bridging Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_plunge_holes_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Plunge Holes Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Plunge Holes Tutorial]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #FF9102; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Video Tutorials<br />
|-<br />
|[[File:Dragon_tut_icon1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vd7Ie84tjZM&]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vd7Ie84tjZM Dragon Parts to Dragon Machine Tutorial]''' || [[File:Dragon_tut_icon2.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h6Dd46GK7wE]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h6Dd46GK7wE Assembly to Dragon Machine Tutorial]''' || [[File:IND_tut_icon1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b7kK7WUMKpM]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b7kK7WUMKpM Industrial Tutorial 1 - Import to Machine]''' || [[File:IND_tut_icon2.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q-1wpELF3Dw]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q-1wpELF3Dw Industrial Tutorial 2 - Design to Machine]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Dragon_S&T_Tut1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Pr0-D2EZL2g]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Pr0-D2EZL2g Dragon Slot and Tab Tutorial]'''</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Bend-Tech_Dragon_-_A400_Series&diff=9738Bend-Tech Dragon - A400 Series2018-05-10T18:58:13Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Dragon Information<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Dragon A-400 Setup Documents<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/dragon_optimization_guide.pdf Dragon Optimization Guide]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/dragon_a400_assembly_manual.pdf Dragon A400 Assembly Manual]<br />
*[[Dragon A400 Calibration]]<br />
|<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/dragon_a400_operator_manual.pdf Dragon A400 Operator's Manual]<br />
*[[Machine Control Screen|Dragon A400 Control Screen]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Dragon Material Settings]]<br />
*[[Dragon Die Calibration]]<br />
|<br />
*[[Dragon Rotation Calibration]]<br />
*[[Dragon A400 Side Offsets Calibration]]<br />
*[[Dragon A400 Machine Library|Dragon Machine Library]]<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Troubleshooting and Maintenance Documents<br />
|-<br />
|<br />
*[[A400 Ethernet Connection Scenarios|Ethernet Connection Scenarios]]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/dragon_preventative_maint.html Dragon Preventative Maintenance]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/a_and_z_motor_actuator_maintenance_guide.pdf A and Z Axis Actuator Maintenance Guide]<br />
|<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/x_motor_set_screw_adjustment_guide.pdf X-Motor Set Screw Adjustment Guide]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/pulley_spacing_and_belt_tension_guide.pdf Pulley Spacing and Belt Tension Guide]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/grounding_with_dielectric_grease.pdf Grounding with Dielectric Grease]<br />
|<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/grounding_wire_fix_for_arcing_out.pdf Grounding Wire Fix for Arcing Out]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/machine_control_connection_guide.pdf Machine Control Connection Guide]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/lifter_station_adjustment_guide.pdf Lifter Station Adjustment Guide]<br />
|<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/power_switch_replacement_guide.pdf Power Switch Replacement Guide]<br />
*[http://www.bendtechdragon.com/files/y_motor_mounting_bracket_installation.pdf Y-Motor Mounting Bracket Installation]<br />
|<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Operations<br />
|-<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Drag_Launcher.png|link=Bend-Tech Launcher|40px]] '''[[Bend-Tech Launcher]]''' || [[File:BT_Product_Dragon1.png|link=Dragon Guide|40px]] '''[[Dragon Guide]]'''|| [[File:BT_Product_Dragon_Options.png|link=Dragon Options|40px]] '''[[Dragon Options]]''' || [[File:Dragon-Tips_&_Hints1.png|40px|link=DragonA400 Tips & Hints|Dragon Tips & Hints]] '''[[DragonA400 Tips & Hints|Dragon Tips & Hints]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Tekla_Import_Icon1.png|40px|link=Tekla Import Guide]] '''[[Tekla Import Guide]]''' || [[File:CAD_2_CAM1.png|40px|link=CAD to CAM Part Transfer]] '''[[CAD to CAM Part Transfer]]''' || [[File:Dynatorch_Guide1.png|40px|link=Dynatorch Dragon Guide]] '''[[Dynatorch Dragon Guide]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Tutorials<br />
|-<br />
|[[File:dragon_straight_tut2.png|40px|link=Dragon Straight Part Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Straight Part Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_bent_tut2.png|40px|link=Dragon Bent Part Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Bent Part Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_cust_design_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Custom Design Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Custom Design Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_nesting_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Nesting Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Nesting Tutorial]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:dragon_diamond_notch_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Diamond Notch Bridging Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Diamond Notch Bridging Tutorial]]''' || [[File:dragon_plunge_holes_tut1.png|40px|link=Dragon Plunge Holes Tutorial]] '''[[Dragon Plunge Holes Tutorial]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
{| style="text-align: left" width="100%"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #ed2020; font-size:120%; text-align: center;" | Video Tutorials<br />
|-<br />
|[[File:Dragon_tut_icon1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vd7Ie84tjZM&]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vd7Ie84tjZM Dragon Parts to Dragon Machine Tutorial]''' || [[File:Dragon_tut_icon2.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h6Dd46GK7wE]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h6Dd46GK7wE Assembly to Dragon Machine Tutorial]''' || [[File:IND_tut_icon1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b7kK7WUMKpM]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b7kK7WUMKpM Industrial Tutorial 1 - Import to Machine]''' || [[File:IND_tut_icon2.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q-1wpELF3Dw]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q-1wpELF3Dw Industrial Tutorial 2 - Design to Machine]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Dragon_S&T_Tut1.png|40px|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Pr0-D2EZL2g]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Pr0-D2EZL2g Dragon Slot and Tab Tutorial]'''</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Tube/Pipe_Library&diff=9737Tube/Pipe Library2018-05-10T16:41:12Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''[[Main Page|Bend-Tech 7x Wiki]] :: [[Main Menu Bar]] :: [[Tools]] :: Tube/Pipe Library'''<br />
__NOTOC__<br />
<br />
[[File:tube_library_1.png|right]]<br />
[[File:tube_library_3.png|left|150px]]The Tube/Pipe Library holds all the materials that can be used to create single parts. On the right side of the Tube/Pipe Library window, under 'Material List', is the list of each available material. To the right of this list is the area where tube/pipe material information will be shown. <br />
<br />
Each material is defined by supplying custom dimensions, a shape, and units of measure. <br />
<br />
'''To access the tube/pipe library''', click on the '''Tools menu''' and click on the '''Tube Library''' option in the drop down menu or click on the '''Tube Library''' option on the [[Task Menu]]. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Material Details </h2><br />
<br />
*'''Material Name:''' This title will be used to refer to the material throughout the software. It is recommended to give each a unique, descriptive name to more easily identify each material. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Weight:''' The weight of the material ''per unit'' can be supplied here. This value is completely optional, but it will be used to calculate the total weight of the part in the part designer interfaces above the results table. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Type:''' Tube material can be either round, square, or rectangle. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Units:''' Parts can be measured in either inches or millimeters. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Wall Thickness, Diameter, and Height:''' Depending on the type of material chosen, there will be different dimensions that will need to be supplied. If the material is round or square, the wall thickness and diameter measurements will be required. These values will be entered into the fields on the material diagram. If the material is rectangular, the wall thickness, diameter/width, and height will need to be provided. Note: The diameter/width and height of all materials are measured from the outside edges. <br />
<br />
[[File:mat_lib_1.png]] [[File:mat_lib_2.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Color:''' The color of the material can be chosen using the '''Color''' button. [[File:color_button.png]] This color will be used to shade the material in various areas throughout the software.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Add Tube/Pipe</h3><br />
<br />
:<h4>Manual</h4><br />
<br />
'''To manually add a material to the library''', click the '''Add New''' button. [[File:add_die.png]] After this button is clicked, all the attribute fields will be available to enter data into. Once all the required details are provided, click the '''Save''' button [[File:save_die.png]] to add the tube/pipe to the library.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:tube_library_2.png|right|500px]]<br />
:<h4>Import</h4><br />
<br />
Tube/Pipe libraries from previous versions of the software can be imported into the current tube/pipe library. To do so, a valid '''tube library.txt''' file must be located on the desktop of the computer being used to run the software. If done correctly, the import library window will open when the '''Import''' button [[File:import_library.png]] is clicked. On the left side, there will be a list of the current tubes in the die library. On the right, a list of tubes from the imported library will be shown.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''To add a tube/pipe''', select a tube in the Imported Library list by clicking on it and then hit the '''Add''' button. [[File:add_import.png]] Click the '''OK''' button to finalize. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''To add all tube/pipes''', click the '''Add All''' button. [[File:add_all_import.png]] Every tube/pipe from the Imported Library list will be added to the current die library. Click the '''OK''' button to finalize. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''To remove a recently imported die''', select the plate from the Current Library list and click the '''Remove''' button. [[File:remove_import.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Delete Tube/Pipe</h3><br />
<br />
'''To remove a tube/pipe from the die library''', select a tube in the list and click the '''Delete''' button. [[File:delete_die.png]]<br />
<br />
<h2>Slot & Tab Settings</h2><br />
[[File:Tube_Library_Slot_N_Tab1.png|right]]<br />
'''Reserved for Dragon machine owners only, this will be the default widths, heights and lengths of all tabs and slots created in the software with this selected material.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Slot_Tab0_Example1.jpg|right]]<br />
<br />
*'''Tab Width:''' Enter the width of the intended tab in this value field.<br />
<br />
*'''Slot Minimum Height:''' Enter the minimum height of the intended slot in this value field.<br />
<br />
*'''Tab Length Offset:''' Enter the length the tab as it will extend past the adjoining slot's inner wall (may be negative). This value is an offset for the length of the tab. With no offset (zero) the tab will extend into the adjoining tube until it is flush with the inner wall. If you do not wish for the tab to extend that far, you can use a negative offset. A positive offset would mean the tab would extend beyond the inside wall. <br />
<br />
*'''Slot Width Offset:''' Enter the amount to oversize the slot in reference to the adjoining tube's tab. This value will allow you to oversize the width of the hole (slot) on the adjoining tube. With no offset, the hole will be that same width as the tab. By adding a positive offset, the hole can be enlarged to allow an easier fit. This value will only affect the width of the hole, not the height.<br />
<br />
'''These values will vary depending on the material's OD and wall thickness. Some values require trial and error to achieve optimal results.'''</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Tube/Pipe_Library&diff=9736Tube/Pipe Library2018-05-10T16:40:46Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''[[Main Page|Bend-Tech 7x Wiki]] :: [[Main Menu Bar]] :: [[Tools]] :: Tube/Pipe Library'''<br />
__NOTOC__<br />
<br />
[[File:tube_library_1.png|right]]<br />
[[File:tube_library_3.png|left|150px]]The Tube/Pipe Library holds all the materials that can be used to create single parts. On the right side of the Tube/Pipe Library window, under 'Material List', is the list of each available material. To the right of this list is the area where tube/pipe material information will be shown. <br />
<br />
Each material is defined by supplying custom dimensions, a shape, and units of measure. <br />
<br />
'''To access the tube/pipe library''', click on the '''Tools menu''' and click on the '''Tube Library''' option in the drop down menu or click on the '''Tube Library''' option on the [[Task Menu]]. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Material Details </h2><br />
<br />
*'''Material Name:''' This title will be used to refer to the material throughout the software. It is recommended to give each a unique, descriptive name to more easily identify each material. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Weight:''' The weight of the material ''per unit'' can be supplied here. This value is completely optional, but it will be used to calculate the total weight of the part in the part designer interfaces above the results table. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Type:''' Tube material can be either round, square, or rectangle. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Units:''' Parts can be measured in either inches or millimeters. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Wall Thickness, Diameter, and Height:''' Depending on the type of material chosen, there will be different dimensions that will need to be supplied. If the material is round or square, the wall thickness and diameter measurements will be required. These values will be entered into the fields on the material diagram. If the material is rectangular, the wall thickness, diameter/width, and height will need to be provided. Note: The diameter/width and height of all materials are measured from the outside edges. <br />
<br />
[[File:mat_lib_1.png]] [[File:mat_lib_2.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Color:''' The color of the material can be chosen using the '''Color''' button. [[File:color_button.png]] This color will be used to shade the material in various areas throughout the software.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Add Tube/Pipe</h3><br />
<br />
:<h4>Manual</h4><br />
<br />
'''To manually add a material to the library''', click the '''Add New''' button. [[File:add_die.png]] After this button is clicked, all the attribute fields will be available to enter data into. Once all the required details are provided, click the '''Save''' button [[File:save_die.png]] to add the tube/pipe to the library.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:tube_library_2.png|right|500px]]<br />
:<h4>Import</h4><br />
<br />
Tube/Pipe libraries from previous versions of the software can be imported into the current tube/pipe library. To do so, a valid '''tube library.txt''' file must be located on the desktop of the computer being used to run the software. If done correctly, the import library window will open when the '''Import''' button [[File:import_library.png]] is clicked. On the left side, there will be a list of the current tubes in the die library. On the right, a list of tubes from the imported library will be shown.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''To add a tube/pipe''', select a tube in the Imported Library list by clicking on it and then hit the '''Add''' button. [[File:add_import.png]] Click the '''OK''' button to finalize. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''To add all tube/pipes''', click the '''Add All''' button. [[File:add_all_import.png]] Every tube/pipe from the Imported Library list will be added to the current die library. Click the '''OK''' button to finalize. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''To remove a recently imported die''', select the plate from the Current Library list and click the '''Remove''' button. [[File:remove_import.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Delete Tube/Pipe</h3><br />
<br />
'''To remove a tube/pipe from the die library''', select a tube in the list and click the '''Delete''' button. [[File:delete_die.png]]<br />
<br />
<h2>Slot & Tab Settings</h2><br />
[[File:Tube_Library_Slot_N_Tab1.png|right]]<br />
'''Reserved for Dragon machine owners only, this will be the default widths, heights and lengths of all tabs and slots created in the software with this selected material.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Slot_Tab0_Example1.jpg|500px|left]]<br />
<br />
*'''Tab Width:''' Enter the width of the intended tab in this value field.<br />
<br />
*'''Slot Minimum Height:''' Enter the minimum height of the intended slot in this value field.<br />
<br />
*'''Tab Length Offset:''' Enter the length the tab as it will extend past the adjoining slot's inner wall (may be negative). This value is an offset for the length of the tab. With no offset (zero) the tab will extend into the adjoining tube until it is flush with the inner wall. If you do not wish for the tab to extend that far, you can use a negative offset. A positive offset would mean the tab would extend beyond the inside wall. <br />
<br />
*'''Slot Width Offset:''' Enter the amount to oversize the slot in reference to the adjoining tube's tab. This value will allow you to oversize the width of the hole (slot) on the adjoining tube. With no offset, the hole will be that same width as the tab. By adding a positive offset, the hole can be enlarged to allow an easier fit. This value will only affect the width of the hole, not the height.<br />
<br />
'''These values will vary depending on the material's OD and wall thickness. Some values require trial and error to achieve optimal results.'''</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Tube/Pipe_Library&diff=9735Tube/Pipe Library2018-05-10T16:40:14Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''[[Main Page|Bend-Tech 7x Wiki]] :: [[Main Menu Bar]] :: [[Tools]] :: Tube/Pipe Library'''<br />
__NOTOC__<br />
<br />
[[File:tube_library_1.png|right]]<br />
[[File:tube_library_3.png|left|150px]]The Tube/Pipe Library holds all the materials that can be used to create single parts. On the right side of the Tube/Pipe Library window, under 'Material List', is the list of each available material. To the right of this list is the area where tube/pipe material information will be shown. <br />
<br />
Each material is defined by supplying custom dimensions, a shape, and units of measure. <br />
<br />
'''To access the tube/pipe library''', click on the '''Tools menu''' and click on the '''Tube Library''' option in the drop down menu or click on the '''Tube Library''' option on the [[Task Menu]]. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Material Details </h2><br />
<br />
*'''Material Name:''' This title will be used to refer to the material throughout the software. It is recommended to give each a unique, descriptive name to more easily identify each material. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Weight:''' The weight of the material ''per unit'' can be supplied here. This value is completely optional, but it will be used to calculate the total weight of the part in the part designer interfaces above the results table. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Type:''' Tube material can be either round, square, or rectangle. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Units:''' Parts can be measured in either inches or millimeters. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Wall Thickness, Diameter, and Height:''' Depending on the type of material chosen, there will be different dimensions that will need to be supplied. If the material is round or square, the wall thickness and diameter measurements will be required. These values will be entered into the fields on the material diagram. If the material is rectangular, the wall thickness, diameter/width, and height will need to be provided. Note: The diameter/width and height of all materials are measured from the outside edges. <br />
<br />
[[File:mat_lib_1.png]] [[File:mat_lib_2.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Color:''' The color of the material can be chosen using the '''Color''' button. [[File:color_button.png]] This color will be used to shade the material in various areas throughout the software.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Add Tube/Pipe</h3><br />
<br />
:<h4>Manual</h4><br />
<br />
'''To manually add a material to the library''', click the '''Add New''' button. [[File:add_die.png]] After this button is clicked, all the attribute fields will be available to enter data into. Once all the required details are provided, click the '''Save''' button [[File:save_die.png]] to add the tube/pipe to the library.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:tube_library_2.png|right|500px]]<br />
:<h4>Import</h4><br />
<br />
Tube/Pipe libraries from previous versions of the software can be imported into the current tube/pipe library. To do so, a valid '''tube library.txt''' file must be located on the desktop of the computer being used to run the software. If done correctly, the import library window will open when the '''Import''' button [[File:import_library.png]] is clicked. On the left side, there will be a list of the current tubes in the die library. On the right, a list of tubes from the imported library will be shown.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''To add a tube/pipe''', select a tube in the Imported Library list by clicking on it and then hit the '''Add''' button. [[File:add_import.png]] Click the '''OK''' button to finalize. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''To add all tube/pipes''', click the '''Add All''' button. [[File:add_all_import.png]] Every tube/pipe from the Imported Library list will be added to the current die library. Click the '''OK''' button to finalize. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''To remove a recently imported die''', select the plate from the Current Library list and click the '''Remove''' button. [[File:remove_import.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Delete Tube/Pipe</h3><br />
<br />
'''To remove a tube/pipe from the die library''', select a tube in the list and click the '''Delete''' button. [[File:delete_die.png]]<br />
<br />
<h2>Slot & Tab Settings</h2><br />
[[File:Tube_Library_Slot_N_Tab1.png|right]]<br />
'''Reserved for Dragon machine owners only, this will be the default widths, heights and lengths of all tabs and slots created in the software with this selected material.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Slot_Tab0_Example1.jpg]]<br />
<br />
*'''Tab Width:''' Enter the width of the intended tab in this value field.<br />
<br />
*'''Slot Minimum Height:''' Enter the minimum height of the intended slot in this value field.<br />
<br />
*'''Tab Length Offset:''' Enter the length the tab as it will extend past the adjoining slot's inner wall (may be negative). This value is an offset for the length of the tab. With no offset (zero) the tab will extend into the adjoining tube until it is flush with the inner wall. If you do not wish for the tab to extend that far, you can use a negative offset. A positive offset would mean the tab would extend beyond the inside wall. <br />
<br />
*'''Slot Width Offset:''' Enter the amount to oversize the slot in reference to the adjoining tube's tab. This value will allow you to oversize the width of the hole (slot) on the adjoining tube. With no offset, the hole will be that same width as the tab. By adding a positive offset, the hole can be enlarged to allow an easier fit. This value will only affect the width of the hole, not the height.<br />
<br />
'''These values will vary depending on the material's OD and wall thickness. Some values require trial and error to achieve optimal results.'''</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Assembly&diff=9734Assembly2018-05-10T16:39:15Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''[[Main Page|Bend-Tech 7x Wiki]] :: Assembly''' [[File:assembly_1.png|right|500px]]<br />
<br />
'''Due to its length, the Assembly Guide has a Table of Contents to accommodate the user.'''<br />
<br />
The assembly interface allows a group of different bent and straight parts to be assembled together. Parts created in the single part designers (XYZ, Custom 3D, Sketch 2D, etc.) can be brought into assembly and parts within assembly can be transferred to single part designers. Parts can also be cut and the wrappers for these cuts can be printed out here. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''To open a new assembly design:'''<br />
<br />
1.) Go to the '''File''' menu, select '''New Assembly'''. <br />
<br />
2.) Click the '''New Assembly''' icon [[File:newassembly.png]] at the top of the window. <br />
<br />
'''...OR'''<br />
<br />
3.) Select the '''Assembly''' option from the [[View#Task Menu|Task Menu]] that appears when the software starts up, when all designs are closed, or through the view menu. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
==Icon Toolbar==<br />
<br />
[[File:single_part_2.png]]<br />
<br />
At the top of the frame just below the main menu bar, there is a series of icons. <br />
<br />
Click the '''New Part''' icon [[File:newpart.png]] to open the create new menu. This menu will allow you to choose a new part designer interface and begin a new part design. <br />
<br />
Click the '''New Assembly''' icon [[File:newassembly.png]] to open a new assembly design. <br />
<br />
Click the '''New Plate''' icon [[File:newplate.png]] to open a new plate design. See the [[Plate]] page for further information on designing a plate.<br />
<br />
Click the '''New Header''' icon [[File:newheader.png]] to open a new header design. See the [[Header Design]] page for further information.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Open''' icon [[File:open.png]] to open a part, assembly, plate, or header file. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Save''' icon [[File:save_icon.png]] to save the current active window's progress. If the current window is a new and hasn't been saved previously, the part will need to be given a name and location. Click 'Save' in the Save window to save.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Print''' icon [[File:printer.png]] to print out an image of the current view of the assembly design. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Print Preview''' icon [[File:preview.png]] to view a preview of the assembly design image print out. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Solidworks''' icon [[File:solidworks.png]] to import a part file from Solidworks that has been sent to Bend-Tech. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Display''' menu [[File:display.png]] to alternate between a line or shaded part model.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Refresh''' icon [[File:refresh.png]] to refresh the part display.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Home''' button [[File:home.png]] to reset the 3D part display to its original default view.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Zoom''' button [[File:zoom.png]] to zoom all the way in on the current view of the 3D part display and fit it to the display frame.<br />
<br />
Click on the '''Transfer''' menu [[File:transfer.png]] to send the currently selected part in the [[Parts]] tab to any of the other part designers, a new assembly design, a new or existing [[Nesting]] project, the offset part interface, or the [[Break Part]] interface.<br />
<br />
Click on the '''Projections''' icon [[File:project.png]] to view the current design from a specified plane (top, bottom, left, right, front, or back) or from a certain angle.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Tabs</h2><br />
[[File:assembly_tabs.png]]<br />
<br />
A majority of the assembly features and functions are located in the tabbed section on the right hand side of the window. To find information about how to use these features, see the links below.<br />
<br />
==Main==<br />
[[File:assembly_main.png|left|300px]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Parts List</h3><br />
The Part List is a list of all parts that have been added to the current Assembly project. Select a part in the list to view a preview of it. The Qty (Quantity) column displays the number of times that the part is used in the current Assembly project and the Key column states the key number given to the part to identify it. To remove a part from the list, click the '''Remove''' button. [[File:assembly_remove.png]] To remove all unused parts from the Master Part List, click the '''Flush''' button. [[File:assembly_flush.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Selected Part</h3><br />
<br />
<h3>Paste</h3><br />
To paste a copy of a part from the parts list into the assembly, first select a part. Then click the '''Paste''' button. [[File:assembly_paste.png]] The selected part will then be attached to the cursor. Select a PickPoint in the display to place the part upon.<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Rotate</h3> <br />
[[File:assembly_rotate.png|right|450px]]<br />
Creates a rotated version of an existing part which can be placed into the Assembly project. <br />
<br />
Select a part from the Part List and click the '''Rotate''' button. [[File:rotate.png]]<br />
<br />
Select an axis to rotate the part around in the '''Select Axis of Rotation''' area. <br />
<br />
Enter an amount to rotate the part in the '''Rotation Amount''' field, or left click on the part and drag the cursor left or right to rotate the part. <br />
<br />
Enter a value in the '''Snap Increment''' field and check the '''Snap Rotation''' checkbox in order to use snap rotation. Snap rotation will rotate a part by the amount in the Snap Increment field when the part is rotated using the left mouse button.<br />
<br />
'''To change the amount that the part is rotated''' when not using snap rotation, enter an amount in the Rotation Speed field. By default, the rotation speed will be 1, meaning the part will be rotated one degree at a time. Entering a decimal will allow the part to be rotated by smaller increments. Whenever you rotate a part in a certain axis, you must click the '''Apply Current Rotation button''' before rotating the part in another axis. <br />
<br />
'''To reset the orientation of the part''', click the Reset All button. <br />
<br />
After all rotations have been applied, click the OK button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Coupler</h3><br />
[[File:assembly_coupler.png|right|450px]]<br />
Allows the user to move the coupler (the anchor point of the part). <br />
<br />
Select a part in the Part List and click the '''Coupler''' button. [[File:coupler.png]] The Coupler Location window will appear. <br />
<br />
'''To set the reference point''', click the '''Select Reference Point''' and click a PickPoint in the Coupler Location window display area. <br />
<br />
'''To move the anchor point''', use the Incremental Move fields and enter movement values. <br />
<br />
'''To set all fields to 0''' in the Incremental Move area, click the Clear Values button. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Reset''' button to reset the coupler to its original location. <br />
<br />
'''To toggle between viewing a shaded and wireframe''' version of the part, use the display mode options. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Mirror</h3><br />
[[File:assembly_mirror.png|right|450px]]<br />
Creates a mirrored version of an existing part which can be placed into the Assembly project. <br />
<br />
Select a part from the Part List and click the '''Mirror''' button. [[File:mirror.png]] The Mirror Part window will appear. <br />
<br />
In the Select Mirror Direction area, select an axis to mirror the part across. After a part has been mirrored, you must click '''Apply Mirror''' before mirroring the part again. <br />
<br />
Click '''Reset Current''' to revert the part to the last time you clicked the Apply Mirror button. <br />
<br />
Click '''Reset All''' to reset the part to its original orientation. Click the home button to set the display to the home view. Click OK to create the mirrored part. <br />
<br />
'''To toggle between viewing a shaded and wireframe''' version of the part, use the display mode options. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Edit</h3><br />
<br />
To edit a plate part in the [[Plate]] design interface, first select a plate part from the Part List, then click the '''Edit''' button. [[File:edit.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Open File</h3><br />
<br />
To open a part or plate part and use it in the current assembly design, click the '''Open Part''' [[File:open_part.png]] or '''Open Plate''' button [[File:open_plate.png]] and select a part/plate file. The part will then be added to the Part List and attached to the cursor where it can be placed by clicking on a PickPoint in the part display.<br />
<br />
==PickPoints==<br />
<h3>Single</h3><br />
<h4>Single Point</h4> <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button [[File:set_reference.png]] and click a PickPoint to set it as the reference point. <br />
<br />
*'''Normal Mode:''' Use the fields to enter the incremental distance from the Reference point that the new point will be. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Travel Mode:''' Use the fields to enter the incremental distance from the reference point that the new point will be. Once the Apply button is clicked, this new point will automatically become the new reference point. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Move Mode:''' This mode is used to move points. The selected reference point will be the point that is moved. Enter values into the fields to move this point using it's original location as the reference location. '''''Note:''''' This is the only function in the assembly interface that can be used to relocate PickPoints. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Mirror Mode:''' While in mirror mode, all points placed will have a copy of the point mirrored across all axes. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''''Note:''''' For easier navigation, notice how the harpoon fields axis rotates with the display frame and matches the orientation of the parts/points.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button [[File:apply.png]] to create the PickPoint. To reset all fields in the Single Point area to 0, click the '''Clear Values''' button.<br />
<br />
<h3>Lines</h3><br />
<h4>Line (Two Points)</h4><br />
Creates a PickPoint that is aligned between two other PickPoints. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button and click two PickPoints or a single line. <br />
<br />
In the '''Move Amount''' field, enter the distance from the first PickPoint that the new PickPoint should be. To measure the Move Amount distance from the other point, click the Swap Ends button. To set the new point directly in between the reference points click the Split in Half button. <br />
<br />
To place the point, click the '''Apply''' button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Intersection</h4><br />
Creates a point at the intersection of two user defined lines. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button and click on a line or the start point and end point of the first line. Click the start and end point of the second line. Check the '''Closest Intersection''' option to have the new point created at the intersection to become the reference point after it is created.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place a PickPoint at the intersection of the two lines. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>String</h4><br />
Creates multiple points by specifying the quantity and spacing values.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button and click on a line or the start point and the end point of a line to define the reference points. Define the spacing between the points in the '''Spacing''' field and the number of points in the '''Quantity''' field. These points will begin at the starting end of the reference feature(s). To measure the points from the other end of the reference line, click the '''Swap Ends''' button. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place the PickPoints.<br />
<br />
<h3>Plane/Arc</h3><br />
<h4>Plane</h4><br />
Creates a point by using a line and a plane for reference. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Base Point''' button and click a PickPoint to set it as the center of the plane. Then select which axis the plane should lie on (X, Y, Z Plane or 3 Points). If 3 Points is selected, 3 PickPoints will need to be selected to define the custom plane.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click two PickPoints, a line, or an arc to set them as the feature that the new line will be placed along. The new PickPoint will be at the intersection of the line and the plane. Click the '''Ignore Arc Ends''' to treat arc features as circles. <br />
<br />
To move the new PickPoint up or down along the line, enter a value in the '''Move Amount''' field. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place the new point. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Arc</h4><br />
Creates a PickPoint by using an arc as reference. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Arc''' button and click on an arc to select it. The angle of the arc should appear under Arc Angle in the Arc area. <br />
<br />
Enter the angle along the arc that the new point should be in the '''Sweep Angle''' field. To set a point above or below the selected arc, enter a value in the '''Radius Offset''' field. Negative values will cause the PickPoint to be inside the arc. Click the '''Split in Half''' button to set the PickPoint halfway across the arc. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place the PickPoint.<br />
<br />
<h3>Angle</h3><br />
Creates a PickPoint that is at a specified angle and distance from another PickPoint. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button and click on a PickPoint to set it as the reference point. <br />
<br />
Use the Tri-Globe to select the direction of the new point. Enter an angle, using the Tri-Globe to determine which direction 0° and 90° are. Enter the distance from the reference point that the new point should be in the Length field. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place the PickPoint. <br />
<br />
Alternatively, you can leave the Length and Angle field at 0 and use the two fields below the Length field to enter the distance from the reference point.<br />
<br />
'''Note:''' For easier navigation, notice how the tri-globe rotates with the display frame and matches the orientation of the parts/points.<br />
<br />
<h3>Edit Points</h3><br />
<h4>Change Color</h4><br />
<br />
To change the color of PickPoint(s), first select a color by clicking on the color block icon and choosing a color from the menu. Then click the '''Select Point(s)''' button and click on the point(s) in the display frame to change them to the newly select color.<br />
<br />
To change the color of all PickPoints, first select a color by clicking on the color block icon and choosing a color from the menu. Then click the '''Change All''' button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Display</h4><br />
<br />
Displays or hides PickPoints. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Hide''' button [[File:hide_pickpoints.png]] and click a PickPoint to toggle if it is displayed or hidden. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Display All''' button [[File:displayall_pickpoints.png]] to display all PickPoints. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Hide All''' button [[File:hideall_pickpoints.png]] to hide all PickPoints. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Delete Points</h4><br />
Click the '''Delete''' button [[File:delete_points.png]] and click on a PickPoint to delete it. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Verify Points</h4><br />
Displays the coordinates of up to two PickPoints and their distance from each other. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Verify Mode''' button [[File:verify_mode.png]] and click on a PickPoint. Information on that PickPoint will be displayed. Click on a second PickPoint to see information on both PickPoints and their distance from each other.<br />
<br />
<h2>Design</h2><br />
New parts can be drawn out using the Harpoon design interface or the LRA designer fields.<br />
<br />
[[Harpoon]] || [[LRA]]<br />
<br />
<h2>Edit</h2><br />
[[File:assembly_edit.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Move</h3><br />
<h4>Move Features</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Move Part''' button [[File:move_part.png]] to move full parts to new locations. <br />
<br />
First, click on a PickPoint of a part. If Incremental Move is not checked, you will be asked to choose which PickPoint will be the anchor point. You will then be able to click any PickPoint to place the part there, with its anchor point centered on the point you select. If '''Incremental Move''' is checked, you will only have to click the part you are moving once. You will then be able to enter values into the Front, Back, Left, Right, Ceiling, and Floor fields in order to move the part in that direction by that value. To reset all fields to 0, click the Clear Values button. <br />
<br />
To finalize and move the part to the new location, click the '''Apply''' button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Move Feature''' button [[File:move_feature.png]] to move single features.<br />
<br />
First, click a part and select a feature to move. If Incremental Move is checked, enter values into the Front, Back, Left, Right, Ceiling, and Floor fields and click the Apply button. If Incremental Move is not checked, click a PickPoint to move the feature there. The part will then be adjusted accordingly. See image below for an example of this function.<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_move_1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Move Bend</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Nudge Bend''' button [[File:nudge_bend.png]] to push a bend a given amount in a specific direction. <br />
<br />
Next, select the bend that will be adjusted. Use the green and pink directional buttons to slightly push the bend in a certain direction. The amount that the bend will be nudged is determined by the value in the '''Amount''' field, which can be adjusted by supplying a new amount.<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_move_nudgebend1.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Move Bend''' button [[File:move_bend.png]] to move a bend using the mouse controls. <br />
<br />
First, select the bend to move. Next, the move bend tool will be placed upon this bend and can be used by clicking and dragging any of the arrows to pull the bend in a certain direction.<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_move_2.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Adjust Radius</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Adjust Radius''' button [[File:adjust_radius.png]] to increase/decrease the radius of a selected bend.<br />
<br />
First, select the bend that will be adjusted. Then just click and drag the bend back and forth to adjust the radius. <br />
<br />
[[File:edit_move_3.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_copy.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Copy</h3><br />
<h4>Copy Single Part</h4><br />
Click the '''Select Part''' button [[File:select_part.png]] to copy and paste a single part to a new location.<br />
<br />
First, select the part that will be copied. Next, choose a PickPoint to be the anchor point for the part. This point will be used as the "handle" to drag it to the new location. Last, click on the new location point to place the part.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_copy_1.png|650px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Copy Multiple Parts</h4><br />
<br />
Use the '''Copy Multiple Parts''' tools to copy and paste a specified group of parts or points to a new location.<br />
<br />
First, click the '''Set Base Point''' button [[File:set_base.png]] to define the anchor point of the part/point group. This will be used as the point to attach the group to the new location point.<br />
<br />
Next, select the points or parts that will be copied by clicking on them. Once selected, a part/point will be highlighted in red. Be sure to specify which kind of features will be copied by choosing the '''Parts''' or '''PickPoints''' option. Click the '''Clear All''' button to clear all selections. Click the '''Select All''' button to select all of parts or points currently in the assembly design. Click the '''Complete''' button [[File:complete.png]] to indicate that all the desired parts have been selected.<br />
<br />
Last, click the '''Paste Parts''' button [[File:paste_parts.png]] and select the new location point to place the parts.<br />
<br />
In order to paste the part or group of parts into another file or interface, open the new or existing file, go to the '''Edit-->Copy''' section and select the '''Paste Parts''' button [[File:paste_parts.png]] and select the new location point to place the parts.<br />
<br />
[[File:1edit_copy_2.png]][[File:1edit_rotate.png]][[File:2edit_rotate.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Rotate</h3><br />
Rotate is used to rotate current parts in the assembly design.<br />
<br />
First, select the part to rotate by clicking the '''Select Part''' button [[File:select_part.png]] and click on the part.<br />
<br />
Next, choose which axis the part will rotate about then click on a point on the part to define the rotation point. <br />
<br />
Enter an amount to rotate the part in the '''Rotation Amount''' field, or left click on the part and drag the cursor left/right/up/down to rotate the part. <br />
<br />
Enter a value in the '''Snap Increment''' field and check the '''Snap Rotation''' checkbox in order to use snap rotation. Snap rotation will rotate a part by the amount in the Snap Increment field when the part is rotated using the left mouse button. <br />
<br />
<br />
To change the amount that the part is rotated when not using snap rotation, enter an amount in the '''Rotation Speed''' field. By default, the rotation speed will be 1, meaning the part will be rotated one degree at a time. Entering a decimal will allow the part to be rotated by smaller increments. Whenever you rotate a part in a certain axis, you must click the Apply Current Rotation button before rotating the part in another axis. <br />
<br />
To apply the new rotation to the part, click the '''Apply''' button. [[File:apply_part.png]]<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_mirror.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Mirror</h3><br />
The mirror function can be used to mirror parts in an assembly across a specified axis or a custom defined plane. <br />
<br />
To do so, first click the '''Select Part''' button [[File:select_part.png]] and click on a part in the assembly display frame. <br />
<br />
Next, choose an axis to mirror the part across. If the '''Plane (3 points)''' option is chosen, three PickPoints will need to be chosen in order to define the plane. <br />
<br />
Check the '''Keep Original Part''' to treat the mirror as a copy. While this option is checked, the mirrored version of the part and the original part will remain in the design. Otherwise, the original part will be moved to the new mirrored location.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button [[File:apply_part.png]] to finalize the mirror. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_mirror_1.png]]<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_delete.png|right]]<br />
<br />
Bent and straight parts can be deleted from the current assembly design in this tab. <br />
<br />
'''To delete a part''', first select a part by clicking on it in the list (listed parts will be highlighted in yellow once they are selected) or click directly on a part in the part display (parts will be highlighted in red once they are selected).<br />
<br />
Click the '''Un-Select All''' button [[File:unselect.png]] to un-selected all parts that are currently selected.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Remove Selected''' button [[File:remove_selected.png]] to delete the selected parts.<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_stretch.png|right|300px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Stretch</h3><br />
Stretch moves a selection of PickPoints in a specified direction, adjusting all parts to compensate.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
First '''select a view'''. This will determine which direction the assembly will be viewed from during the stretch process. <br />
<br />
'''Select the parts/PickPoints''' that will be stretched by clicking on any two spots on the display in order to draw a selection rectangle between them (the rectangle will be defined by a light blue line). <br />
<br />
Then select a direction and enter the amount that the selected parts/PickPoints should be moved in the '''Distance''' field. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button [[File:apply_part.png]] to apply the stretch. <br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_stretch_1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_misc.png|right|300px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Misc</h3><br />
<br />
<h4>Add Bend</h4><br />
'''To add a bend to a preexisting part''', click the '''Add Bend''' button [[File:add_bend.png]] and '''select a straight length''' of a part by clicking on it to choose a location for the bend. The bend will be placed at the mid point of the selected part length. <br />
<br />
'''Enter the offset distance''' between the part and the bend. Then click the '''OK''' button to place the bend. Whichever die is currently selected in the Assembly [[Assembly#Die|die menu]] will be used for this bend.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_addbend.png|750px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Scale</h4><br />
'''To scale the size of parts, material, or bend radii''', click the '''Scale''' button. [[File:misc_scale_1.png]]<br />
<br />
In the scale window, scale values for each of these features can be supplied. Provide a percentage value to either increase or decrease the scale of a feature. See image below for an example. <br />
<br />
[[File:misc_scale.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Explode</h4><br />
Exploding an Assembly will move all parts away from each other so that they can be viewed separately. <br />
<br />
<br />
First, click the '''Explode''' button. [[File:explode.png]] <br />
<br />
The click on a PickPoint to set the base point for the assembly, and enter an explode factor to explode an Assembly project. Larger numbers will create greater distances between the parts. Click the '''Explode''' button to reset the assembly back to the normal display.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Clean</h4><br />
Click the '''Clean''' button [[File:clean.png]] to clear the assembly of any zero length tubes that may be in the assembly design. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Copy Radius</h4><br />
Click the '''Copy Radius''' button [[File:copy_radius.png]] to copy the radius of one bend to another. <br />
<br />
First, select the bend with the radius that you want to copy. Next, select the bend that the copied radius will be applied to.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_copyradius.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_adjustcenterline.png|500px|right]]<br />
<h4>Adjust Centerline</h4><br />
Click the '''Adjust Centerline''' button [[File:adjustcenterline.png]] to change how the part measurements are interpreted. In the part designers, parts are assumed to be based on centerline. This tool allows the current part dimensions to be from the inside or outside of the tube instead. <br />
<br />
After clicking the button, '''select''' a part in the display to adjust it. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''To change the Location and/or Location Type''' for a bend, first select the bend by clicking on it in the part display. A menu will appear where the location and location types can be adjusted. Click on either of the drop down menus to choose new options.<br />
<br />
::[[File:adjustcenterline_2.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
Once a new location or location type has been chosen, a red preview reflecting the location changes will appear. The original part will be shown in green (if the Display Original Part is checked). <br />
<br />
Click the '''Home''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_3.png]] to set the part preview to the default location and orientation.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Zoom Fit''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_4.png]] to zoom all the way in on the current view of the 3D part display and fit it to the display frame. <br />
<br />
<br />
The part model can be shown in either wire frame or as a solid shaded model. Click on the '''wireframe''' button [[File:wireframe.png]] to show the model in wireframe. Click on the '''shaded''' button [[File:shaded.png]] to show the model as a shaded part.<br />
<br />
<br />
Check the box next to '''Display Original Part''' to have the original part preview shown in the adjust centerline interface after changes are made to the locations.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Inside''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_5.png]] to set the locations for all of the bends to inside.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Center''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_6.png]] to set the locations for all of the bends back to centerline.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Outside''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_7.png]] to set the locations for all of the bends to outside.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''OK''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_8.png]] to take the location and location type adjustments and apply them to the current part design.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Labels</h3><br />
'''To place labels on the current assembly design''', first click the '''New''' button [[File:new_label.png]] and select a location for the label by clicking on a PickPoint. Next, enter the label text and click '''OK'''.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_label_1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
The size of the label font is determined by the '''Label Size''' value (larger values result in larger labels and vice versa). '''To change the size''', enter a new value in this field. The color of the labels is determined by the Label Color button. '''To change the color''', click this button and select a new color. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''To move a label''', click the '''Move''' button [[File:move_label.png]] and select a new PickPoint to place the label in the new location.<br />
<br />
'''To delete a label''', click the '''Delete''' button [[File:delete_label.png]] and click on a label.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Break or Join Tubes</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''Break Auto''' button [[File:break_auto.png]] to automatically break the part at a specified interval. <br />
<br />
First, define the maximum length of tube required between break points in the '''Max Length''' field. Next click the '''Break Auto''' button and select a part to break it. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Break Point''' button [[File:break_point.png]] to place a break point on a certain part. Break points will define where the part will be separated. After clicking this button, select which part will be broken by clicking on it in the display area. Last, select the PickPoint where the break will occur. <br />
<br />
[[File:misc_breakpoint.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Join Tubes''' button [[File:join_tubes.png]] to connect two tubes together. First, select the first part to join, and then select the other part that will be joined to it. <br />
<br />
[[File:misc_join.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_miter_1.png|right|250px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Miter Trim''' button [[File:miter_trim.png]] to add a miter at the intersection of two tubes.<br />
<br />
First select the first tube that will be mitered. Next, select the other tube that will be mitered. These tubes will be given some extra length to compensate for the mitering cut (''See image to the right''). If the '''Create Cut''' option is checked, a cut will be applied to the part at this point on the part. Cuts can be seen in the '''[[Cutting]]''' tab.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_miter.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Single Bend CLR Change</h3><br />
<br />
'''To adjust the CLR of a single bend''', first select a die in the '''Select Die''' menu in the Single Bend CLR Change area. Next click the '''Select Bend''' button [[File:select_bend.png]] and click on a bend to apply the selected die to it.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_clr.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_panel.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:panel_01.png|left|250px]]<br />
In the panel tab, plate panels can be created by defining their location on an assembly.<br />
<br />
To create a panel, first click the '''Select Tubes''' button [[File:select_tubes.png]]. Next, select sections of tube on the assembly that are on the same plane to define the outline of the panel (a minimum of 2 tubes is required). When selecting tubes, be sure to select the '''''starting end''''' of the tube. Once all the necessary tubes are selected, click the '''Complete''' button. [[File:complete.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:panel_order.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
The parts will then be listed in the chart below. The corner and value specifications will need to be supplied for the corners and the wrap value will need to be given for the edges of the panel. <br />
<br />
<br />
Once these values/options have been defined, click the '''Create Plate''' button. [[File:create_plate.png]] Give the panel and name and choose a plate material. Click the '''OK''' button to create the panel. Once a part is created, it is added to the [[Main#Parts List|parts list]] in the [[Main]] tab.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Opposite Direction''' button to flip the side of the tube that the panel is placed upon.<br />
<br />
[[File:panel_03.png|400px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
To adjust the panel after it has been created, just change any of the options and click the '''Create Plate''' button to update the panel.<br />
<br />
<br />
To do more in depth edits with the plate, such as adding holes, click the '''Edit Plate''' button to bring the plate into the [[Plate]] design interface. Once the edits are complete, the plate can be sent back into the assembly by using the '''Transfer''' menu [[File:transfer.png]] and selecting the current assembly project. The plate will be brought back in and placed in its original location on the tube(s). <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Corner'''<br />
<br />
*'''Connect:''' The corner of the panel will be flat, connecting the ends of the straight lengths on either side of the bend.<br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_connect.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Intersection:''' The corner of the panel will meet at the outside intersections of the tubes, at the apex.<br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_intersection.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Radius:''' The corner of the panel will be rounded according the the radius value given in the '''Value''' field. <br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_radius.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Chamfer:''' The corner of the panel will be cut diagonally back from the corner the distance provided in the '''Value''' field.<br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_chamfer.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Notch:''' The corner of the panel will have a 90 degree notch cut out of it. The size of the notch is determined by the size provided in the '''Value''' field.<br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_notch.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
The '''Wrap''' value determines how far the material will overlap the edge of the tube. This value is given in terms of degrees.<br />
<br />
[[File:panel_02.png]]<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_dimensions.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Dimensions</h2><br />
<h3>Create</h3><br />
<h4>Single</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Single''' button [[File:dimensions_single.png]] to place a single dimension. First, select a line feature or two points that the dimension will be placed between. Then choose a placement location for the dimension text.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_1.png|650px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Multiple</h4><br />
Click the '''Multiple''' button [[File:multiple.png]] to place multiple dimensions along a specified area of an assembly. First, select a line feature where the dimensions will start, then select end point of the dimensions. Between these features, each possible dimension will be placed.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_2.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Inside Angle</h4><br />
Click the '''Inside Angle''' button [[File:inside_angle.png]] to place an angle measure dimension at the inside of the intersection of two lines. First, select a line or reference point to represent the beginning of the dimension. Next, select the inside point of the line and/or the second reference line. Last, choose a location to place the dimension text.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_3.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Outside Angle</h4><br />
Click the '''Outside Angle''' button [[File:outside_angle.png]] to place an angle measure dimension around the outside angle of the reference lines. First, select a line or reference point to represent the beginning of the dimension. Next, select the inside point of the line and/or the second reference line. Last, choose a location to place the dimension text.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_4.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Edit</h3><br />
<br />
<h4>Move</h4><br />
Click the '''Move''' button [[File:move_dimension.png]] to relocate the text and marker of a dimension. First select the dimension that will be moved. Next, using the cursor, click on a new location to place the dimension.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_5.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Delete</h4><br />
To delete dimensions, click the '''Delete''' button [[File:delete_dimension.png]] and click on a dimension(s) to delete them.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Settings</h3><br />
The appearance of dimension text and markers can be adjusted using these settings. <br />
<br />
*'''Text Size:''' The size of the dimension text can be supplied here. Larger values will result in larger dimension font size and vice versa.<br />
<br />
*'''Text Color:''' The color of the dimension text can be chosen here. Click the color button and select a color to adjust text color. <br />
<br />
*'''Line Width:''' The width of the dimension markers can be given here. Larger values will result in thicker dimension lines and vice versa.<br />
<br />
*'''Line Color:''' The color of the dimension marker lines can be chosen here. Click the color button and select a color to adjust line color. <br />
<br />
*'''Tolerance:''' The decimal tolerance for the dimension values can be adjusted here. The decimal tolerance controls how many digits will be allowed after these values. In the tolerance options, each digit place is represented by an n. <br />
<br />
:Dimension values can be displayed in either fractional or decimal format. To change the format and/or tolerance for lengths, click the drop down menu and select an option from the list. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Display Dimensions:''' Check the box next to '''Display Dimensions''' to have the dimensions placed on the assembly design. Uncheck this box to hide the dimension markers and values.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>2D Mode</h3><br />
[[File:2d_dimensions_1.png|right]]<br />
In 2D Mode, the assembly will be shown from the top, left, and right. Dimensions can then be placed on these different views of the assembly. The display can be printed using '''File --> Print''' or by clicking the '''Print''' icon.<br />
<br />
<h4>Create</h4><br />
<br />
*'''Horizontal:''' Click the '''Horizontal''' button [[File:horizontal_dim.png]] to place a horizontal dimension along a selected line or between two selected PickPoints.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Vertical:''' Click the '''Vertical''' button [[File:vertical_dim.png]] to place a vertical dimension on a vertical line or between two selected pickpoints.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Linear:''' Click the '''Linear''' button [[File:linear_dim.png]] to place a dimension along any line or between any two PickPoints.<br />
<br />
*'''Inside Angle:''' Click the '''Inside Angle''' button [[File:inside_angle_dim.png]] to place an inside angle dimension at the intersection of two lines. First, select a line or reference point to represent the beginning of the dimension. Next, select the inside point of the line and/or the second reference line. Last, choose a location to place the dimension text.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Outside Angle:''' Click the '''Outside Angle''' button [[File:outside_angle_dim.png]] to place an outside angle dimension around the intersection of two lines. First, select a line or reference point to represent the beginning of the dimension. Next, select the inside point of the line and/or the second reference line. Last, choose a location to place the dimension text.<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Edit</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Move''' button [[File:2d_move.png]] to relocate the text and marker of a dimension. First select the dimension that will be moved. Next, using the cursor, click on a new location to place the dimension. <br />
<br />
To delete a dimension, click the '''Delete''' button [[File:2d_delete.png]] and click on a dimension.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Edit Value''' button [[File:2d_edit.png]] to change the value of a dimension. First, click on a dimension. Then enter the new value in the edit value window and click the '''OK''' button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Settings</h4><br />
<br />
*'''Arrow Width:''' This is the width of the arrows at the ends of the dimension line. Enter a value in this field to define the arrow width. Larger values will result in wider arrows and vice versa. <br />
<br />
*'''Arrow Length:'''This is the length of the arrows at the ends of a dimension line. Enter a value in this field to define the arrow width. Larger values will result in longer arrows and vice versa. <br />
<br />
*'''Extension Stand-Off:''' This is the distance between the extension lines and the entity that the dimension is measuring. <br />
<br />
*'''Extension Offset:''' This is the distance that the extension lines extend beyond the dimension line. <br />
<br />
*'''Text Size:''' The size of the dimension text can be supplied here. Larger values will result in larger dimension font size and vice versa.<br />
<br />
*'''Line Width:''' The width of the dimension markers can be given here. Larger values will result in thicker dimension lines and vice versa.<br />
<br />
*'''Arrow Type:''' This is the shape of the arrows at the ends of a dimension line. Click on the menu next to Arrow Type in the value column and select an option from the drop down menu.<br />
<br />
*'''Tolerance:''' The decimal tolerance for the dimension values can be adjusted here. The decimal tolerance controls how many digits will be allowed after these values. In the tolerance options, each digit place is represented by an n. <br />
<br />
:Dimension values can be displayed in either fractional or decimal format. To change the format and/or tolerance for lengths, click the drop down menu and select an option from the list. <br />
<br />
[[File:2d_settings.png|right|300px]]<br />
*'''Text, Extension, and Dimension Color:''' The colors of the dimension text, extensions can be changed using these color options. To change the color of a feature, click on the corresponding button and select a color from the menu. (''See the image to the right'')<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Edit Existing</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Select''' [[File:ass_select1.png]] button and click on a dimension to view and/or edit its settings, which will be generated in the Settings area above.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' [[File:ass_select2.png]] button to apply any setting changes made to the currently selected dimension. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply to All''' [[File:Apply_to_ass.png]] button to apply the currently selected dimension settings to every dimension.<br />
<br />
<h2>Cutting</h2><br />
[[File:Cutting_picture12.png|right|]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
The Cutting tab contains the tools necessary for adding cuts to the ends of parts. Wrappers can be printed which, when wrapped around the end of a tube, mark where the tube needs to be cut.<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Make Cuts</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''New Cut''' button [[File:new_cut.png]] and click a part. The cut part will be highlighted in green once selected. Click a second part, plane, or multiple parts that the first part will be cut to fit against. The second and any consecutive selected parts will be highlighted in red. Click the '''Complete''' button. [[File:complete.png]] The cut should appear in the list of cuts on the Cutting tab and shown on the assembly. <br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:cutting_1.png|650px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Auto-Cut''' button [[File:auto_cut.png]] to let the software attempt to generate all cuts in the assembly project. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Cutting Plane</h3><br />
<br />
Using the cutting plane feature, a custom plate can be defined and used to place cuts anywhere on the assembly design. <br />
<br />
To place a cutting plane, click the '''New''' button [[File:new_plane.png]] and click on a PickPoint to define the center/base point of the plane. Then click the first direction and second direction of the plane. Once a plane is place in the assembly, it can be used as a cutting feature and will allow straight cuts to be placed anywhere. <br />
<br />
[[File:cutting_plane.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
To move the plane, click the '''Move''' button. Then click and drag the move tools directly on the plane to move, resize, and rotate the plane. See image below.<br />
<br />
[[File:plane_move.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Slot & Tab</h3><br />
<br />
'''RESERVED FOR DRAGON CUSTOMERS ONLY.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Slot_Tab0_Example1.jpg]]<br />
<br />
'''Use the Slot & Tab function only after you have set up your Slot & Tab settings in the [[Tube/Pipe Library]]. Attempting to use this function without creating valid settings applied to your tubing will not produce results.'''<br />
<br />
*Click the Slot & Tab [[File:Ass_Slot_N_Tab1.png]] button after you've created a cut and click on the green highlighted tube to apply the tab to it. This will also apply the slot to the outer edge of the red highlighted tube.<br />
<br />
*If the tab & slot is not wide or long enough, you can always change the settings in your [[Tube/Pipe Library]] and then click the '''"Complete"''' button to apply the changes to the cut.<br />
<br />
[[File:Slot_Tab1_Example1.png]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Cut Settings</h3><br />
<br />
If the '''Outside Diameter Only''' option is checked, the software will not display the inside diameter cut line for each cut. <br />
Using a hole saw requires the checking of the outside of the material only.''' "Check"''' the option '''"Outside Diameter Only"'''.<br />
<br />
[[File:HoleSaw3.jpg]]<br />
<br />
Using a grinder or plasma cutter requires checking of both sides of the material. '''"Uncheck"''' the option '''"Outside Diameter Only"'''.<br />
<br />
[[File:HoleSaw4.jpg]]<br />
<br />
<br />
If '''Distance to Perp of Bend''' is checked, the red line will indicate the distance to the perpendicular of the bend. The cut wrapper's red line will display the distance to the tangent of the nearest bend combined with the outside radius of the bend.<br />
<br />
If the '''Hide Completed Features''' option is checked, completed features from the new cut will be hidden in the design.<br />
<br />
If the '''Ignore Tube Ends''' option is checked, all new cuts will ignore the excess tubing leftover from all other cuts.<br />
<br />
If '''Mitered Cut''' is checked, all new cuts will be calculated as straight mitered cuts. If you are using a hole saw to cut your tubes leave Mitered Cut unchecked.<br />
<br />
If the '''Add Slot & Tab''' checkbox is checked, all new cuts will contain a tab on the intended cut tube and a slot on the adjoining tube. ''Adding a value into the value field to the right will rotate the tab around the tube by a degree between 0-360.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Cut Chart</h3><br />
[[File:cutting_2.png|right|600px]]<br />
A chart displaying a list of all the cuts currently applied to the assembly will be shown as well. <br />
<br />
Click on a cut to see a preview of the cut on the 3D model of the assembly. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click '''Delete''' [[File:delete_cut.png]] to remove the cut from the tube, or click '''Delete All''' [[File:delete_all_cuts.png]] to remove all cuts from the Assembly project.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click '''Print''' [[File:print_cut.png]] to print the currently selected wrapper, or click '''Print All''' [[File:print_all_cuts.png]] to print out all wrappers for the entire Assembly project.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:cut_wrapper.png|400px|right]]<br />
Click the '''Details''' button [[File:details.png]] to see a preview of the cutting wrapper. On each wrapper, there is a red line with a number on it. This line is used for lining up a wrapper on a tube. The number is the distance from the end of the tube that the red line should be. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Select''' button [[File:select_cut.png]] and click on a cut in the display area to select it from the assembly directly.<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_parts.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<h2>Parts</h2><br />
The Parts tab contains a list of all parts in the current Assembly project, tools that can be used to edit them, and the ability to transfer parts to a single part designer.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click on a part in the part list to select it. Once a part is selected in the list, it will be highlighted in yellow. Parts can also be selected by clicking directly on a part in the assembly. <br />
<br />
Use the drop down menu in the '''Die''' column to change the die for that part or use the drop down in the '''Material''' column to change the material. <br />
<br />
Click on the colored box in the '''Color''' column to change the parts color using the color menu. <br />
<br />
Select a part and use the '''Transfer''' menu [[File:transfer.png]] to bring it into another part design interface. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''Double click''' on this table to open it in a separate window. Click the '''Print''' button to print this chart.<br />
<br />
[[File:parts_2.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
<h2>Details</h2><br />
[[File:assembly_details.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
In the details tab, a list of every material used in the assembly project will be listed along with the material's attributes, such as the name, width, amount used, and weight.<br />
<br />
If '''weight per unit''' values have been given to the materials in the [[Tube/Pipe Library]], the total weight of the assembly will be shown below the table. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Change Die or Material</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''All Dies''' button [[File:all_dies.png]] to change all the dies used in the assembly to one specified die. After clicking the button, select a die from the menu and click the '''OK''' button to confirm the die change. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Match Die''' button [[File:match_die.png]] to replace all bends using a certain die with an alternate die. In the menu, select the die that will be replaced and selected the die that will replace it. Click the '''OK''' button to confirm.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''All Materials''' button [[File:all_materials.png]] to change all the materials used in the assembly to one specific material. After clicking the button, select a material from the menu and click the '''OK''' button to confirm the material change. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Print Details</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''Spreadsheet''' button [[File:spreadsheet.png]] to print out a page with an image of the 3D assembly model, the parts list, the chart shown in the [[Parts]] tab, and the material chart shown in the Details tab.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Setup Pack''' button [[File:setup_pack.png]] to print out multiple setup sheets for the parts in the current assembly. In the Setup Pack menu, the printing options can be selected.<br />
<br />
[[File:setup_pack_1.png|350px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Select Features to Print:''' Select what kind of features will be included on the setup sheet. <br />
<br />
*'''Select Printer:''' Choose the printer that the setup sheets will be printed from.<br />
<br />
*'''Select Parts to Print:''' Choose which part setup sheets will be included in this printing. Click the '''Check All''' button to select all parts. Click the '''Check None''' button to un-check all parts. <br />
<br />
Click the '''OK''' button to print the setup sheets. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_fullscale.png|right|400px]]<br />
Click the '''Full Scale''' button [[File:full_scale.png]] allows a full size, to scale, 2D version of the assembly design viewed from a specific direction to be printed to scale on multiple sheets. Each printed page will display one section of the full size assembly. When these pages are all combined, they will show the entire part design. <br />
<br />
Adjust the settings explained below and click the '''Print''' button to print out a full scale part outline.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Margins:''' The margins of each individual page can be set here in terms of inches. <br />
<br />
*'''Default Orientation:''' The orientation of the pages can be adjusted here by choosing either portrait or landscape.<br />
<br />
*'''Number of Pages:''' The width and height of the block of pages can be adjusted here. A preview of what the full group will be shown below. Each page is represented by a light blue outline. <br />
<br />
*'''Line Width:''' The width of the line representing the part features can be adjusted here. Smaller values will result in thinner lines while larger numbers will result in thicker lines.<br />
<br />
*'''Orientation:''' The angle that the part printout will be viewed from can be chosen here. <br />
<br />
*'''Position... :''' To reposition the part outline on the pages, click the '''Position...''' button. [[File:printscale_3.png]] The part outline will be attached to the cursor. Click to place the part in a new location. Keep in mind, if any of the part extends past the edge of the pages, <br />
<br />
*'''Print Options:''' <br />
<br />
:[[File:printscale_2.png|left]] Select Printer: Choose which printer to print from here.<br />
<br />
Number of Copies: The number of copies to print can be specified here.<br />
<br />
Print Preview: Check this box to have a preview of the pages shown before it is printed.<br />
<br />
Print to File: Check this box to save the pages as a Printer File (.prn).<br />
<br />
Print Page Numbers: Check this box to print page numbers on each page. <br />
<br />
Print Edge Lines: Check this box to include the margin lines on the pages.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Preview:''' At the bottom of the window, a preview of the part outline and the pages will be shown.<br />
<br />
:This preview can be adjusted by zooming, panning, and rotating. To zoom, use the scroll wheel on the mouse. Scroll up to zoom out and scroll down to zoom in. To pan/move the part preview, click and hold the scroll wheel or both mouse buttons and move the cursor around. The part preview will move with the cursor. To rotate, click and hold the right mouse button. Move the cursor around and the part will rotate with the cursor movements.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Assembly Tools</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''Nesting''' button [[File:nesting.png]] to <br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_price_1.png|right|400px]]<br />
Click the '''Price''' button [[File:assembly_price.png]] to view a chart containing the assembly's materials, quantity, and cost and time. These cost settings can be set up in the [[Tools]] Menu under [[Tools#Pricing Settings|Pricing Settings]].<br />
<br />
'''To add another column''' that will calculate the price for a specified amount of the part, enter a value into the Quantity First Field area or adjust the amount using the up and down arrows. Up to two extra columns can be added. <br />
<br />
'''To add a second column''', enter a value into the Quantity Second Field or adjust the amount using the up and down arrows. <br />
<br />
To '''print''' the current view of the Price List chart, click the '''Print''' button. [[File:print.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Assembly Menu</h2><br />
<br />
When a new assembly window is open, there will be a '''menu area''' located above the tabbed section and display frame.<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_2.png]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Material</h3><br />
<br />
[[File:material.png]] In the material menu, the material for the parts in the assembly can be selected. '''To select a material''', click the drop down menu and choose a material from the list. This material can be changed for each individual part later, this is just the material that is initially applied to new parts. Tube/pipe materials are defined in the [[Tube/Pipe Library]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Die</h3><br />
<br />
[[File:die.png]] In the die menu, the die used to bend the parts in the assembly can be selected. '''To select a die''', click the drop down menu and choose a die from the list. This can be changed for each individual part later, this is just the die that is initially applied to new parts. Dies are defined in the [[Die Library]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Straight</h3><br />
'''To create a straight tube between two PickPoints''', click the Straight button [[File:straight.png]] and click any two PickPoints or Auto points (points that are automatically generated along parts, such as mid points, apex point, or start and end of bend points ) in the display window. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Bent</h3><br />
'''To create a new bent part''', click the Bent button. [[File:bent.png]] In the Number of Bends window that appears, enter the number of bends that the part will have and click the OK button. To create the part, you must select the start point and the location of each bend, and the end point of the part. You cannot create a bend that is 180° or more by using the Bent Part tool. In order to create such a bend, you would need to create two separate parts. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Delete</h3><br />
'''To remove a part from the assembly''', first click on the '''Delete''' button. Then in the design frame, click on a part to delete it. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:entities_12.png|right]]<br />
<h3>Entities</h3> <br />
The Entities tool controls which parts and points are displayed in the assembly. Click the '''Entities''' button [[File:entities.png]] to open up this menu. Each row will represent straight part, bent part, and PickPoint. To hide a certain feature, click in the green box to remove the '''X'''. To have all features shown, click '''Display All''' button. [[File:display_all2.png]] To hide all PickPoints, click the '''Hide Points''' [[File:hide_points2.png]] button. To hide all parts, click the '''Hide Parts''' button. [[File:hide_parts2.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Bend Mode</h3><br />
This option controls what kind of bend location will be for future bent parts in the assembly (In other words, this setting will not affect current parts). <br />
[[File:bend_mode.png|left]]<br />
'''Apex:''' Measures to the outside intersection (apex) of the bends two legs.<br />
<br />
'''Tangent (Start):''' Measures to the start of the bends, the tangents, so no bent material will be included in the measurements.<br />
<br />
'''Tangent (End):''' Measures to the end of the bends, the tangents, so no bent material will be included in the measurements.<br />
<br />
'''Perpendicular (Start):''' Measures to the tangent plus the CLR of the bend.<br />
<br />
'''Perpendicular (End):''' <br />
<br />
'''Mid:'''<br />
<br />
'''Direction -> Any Point:'''<br />
<br />
'''Any Point -> Direction:'''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Settings</h4><br />
[[File:assembly_settings.png|right|500px]]<br />
These settings are used to control the display and general options within the current assembly.<br />
<br />
'''Main Display'''<br />
<br />
The main display settings control the part display and part model appears in the assembly interface. The background of the main display can be shown.<br />
<br />
:*'''Background:''' Select the '''Normal''' option for the part display background to be shown with the normal blue to white gradient. Select the '''Custom Color''' option to choose a custom solid color. Select the '''Image''' option to select an image file to display as the background. <br />
<br />
:*'''Auto Zoom:''' Check this option to automatically zoom all the way in on the current view of the 3D part display and fit it to the display frame. <br />
<br />
:*'''Display Wall Thickness:''' Check this option to have the thickness of the material shown on the part model when in shaded mode.<br />
<br />
:*'''Display Tubes as Cut:''' Check this option to have the profiles of any cuts on the tubes represented on the part model.<br />
<br />
:*'''Model Quality:''' To adjust the graphic quality of the part model, select an option from this menu. Parts can be shown in high, medium, and low quality.<br />
<br />
:*'''PickPoint Size:''' To adjust the size of all the pickpoints shown in the display frame, select an option from this menu. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Help Text:''' Check the box next to '''Display Cursor Help Text''' to toggle the help text on and off in assembly. This help text will help guide certain processes within assembly. The color of this text can be adjusted using the '''Text Color''' option.<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Tri Star'''<br />
[[File:tri_star.png|left|100px]]<br />
These options will control how the tri-star will appear in the current assembly design. The tri-star can be '''Directional''' (labeled with ceiling/floor, front/back, left/right), '''XYZ''' (labeled with X, Y, and Z), '''Lines Only''', or '''None''' (not shown at all). The default scale value can also be defined here, which will control how large the tri-star will appear. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Color of New PickPoints:''' The default color of new PickPoints can be adjusted here. Click the '''color''' button and select a color from the menu to choose a new PickPoint color. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Prompt for Straight Part Names:''' While this option is checked, every time a new [[#Straight|straight part]] is added to the assembly, a window will prompt for a name to be given to this part instead of defaulting to "Straight 1" for example. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Overwrite Master Parts when Changed:'''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Auto Switch to Line Mode:''' Check this option to have the display mode automatically switched to line mode whenever new points or parts are being added/edited in the current assembly design. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Auto-Save Frequency:''' The time interval between the automatic saves can be adjusted using this menu. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''Set Defaults:''' Click the '''Set Defaults''' button [[File:set_default.png]] to use these settings as the defaults for future assembly designs.<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Restore Defaults:''' Click the '''Restore Defaults''' button [[File:restore_defaults.png]] to reset all the settings to the default selections.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Manufacture Warnings</h3> <br />
[[File:manufacture_warnings_1.png|right|400px]]<br />
If any problems are found with a part, a '''warning icon''' [[File:manufacture_warnings.png]] will appear at the top of the assembly window. If this icon is clicked, manufacturing warnings will be listed. These warnings are based on the die limitations applied to the current die used to bend the part(s). These limitations can be defined in the [[Die Library#Die Limitations - Minimum Distances|Die Library]]. The part name, a short description of the problem, location, and fix (if available). If an auto-fix is available, double-click on the auto-fix description to execute the auto-fix. Click the '''Fix All''' button [[File:fix_all.png]] to fix all problems with a fix option available.</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=File:Slot_Tab0_Example1.jpg&diff=9733File:Slot Tab0 Example1.jpg2018-05-10T16:38:38Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Assembly&diff=9732Assembly2018-05-10T16:37:51Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div>'''[[Main Page|Bend-Tech 7x Wiki]] :: Assembly''' [[File:assembly_1.png|right|500px]]<br />
<br />
'''Due to its length, the Assembly Guide has a Table of Contents to accommodate the user.'''<br />
<br />
The assembly interface allows a group of different bent and straight parts to be assembled together. Parts created in the single part designers (XYZ, Custom 3D, Sketch 2D, etc.) can be brought into assembly and parts within assembly can be transferred to single part designers. Parts can also be cut and the wrappers for these cuts can be printed out here. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''To open a new assembly design:'''<br />
<br />
1.) Go to the '''File''' menu, select '''New Assembly'''. <br />
<br />
2.) Click the '''New Assembly''' icon [[File:newassembly.png]] at the top of the window. <br />
<br />
'''...OR'''<br />
<br />
3.) Select the '''Assembly''' option from the [[View#Task Menu|Task Menu]] that appears when the software starts up, when all designs are closed, or through the view menu. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
==Icon Toolbar==<br />
<br />
[[File:single_part_2.png]]<br />
<br />
At the top of the frame just below the main menu bar, there is a series of icons. <br />
<br />
Click the '''New Part''' icon [[File:newpart.png]] to open the create new menu. This menu will allow you to choose a new part designer interface and begin a new part design. <br />
<br />
Click the '''New Assembly''' icon [[File:newassembly.png]] to open a new assembly design. <br />
<br />
Click the '''New Plate''' icon [[File:newplate.png]] to open a new plate design. See the [[Plate]] page for further information on designing a plate.<br />
<br />
Click the '''New Header''' icon [[File:newheader.png]] to open a new header design. See the [[Header Design]] page for further information.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Open''' icon [[File:open.png]] to open a part, assembly, plate, or header file. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Save''' icon [[File:save_icon.png]] to save the current active window's progress. If the current window is a new and hasn't been saved previously, the part will need to be given a name and location. Click 'Save' in the Save window to save.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Print''' icon [[File:printer.png]] to print out an image of the current view of the assembly design. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Print Preview''' icon [[File:preview.png]] to view a preview of the assembly design image print out. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Solidworks''' icon [[File:solidworks.png]] to import a part file from Solidworks that has been sent to Bend-Tech. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Display''' menu [[File:display.png]] to alternate between a line or shaded part model.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Refresh''' icon [[File:refresh.png]] to refresh the part display.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Home''' button [[File:home.png]] to reset the 3D part display to its original default view.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Zoom''' button [[File:zoom.png]] to zoom all the way in on the current view of the 3D part display and fit it to the display frame.<br />
<br />
Click on the '''Transfer''' menu [[File:transfer.png]] to send the currently selected part in the [[Parts]] tab to any of the other part designers, a new assembly design, a new or existing [[Nesting]] project, the offset part interface, or the [[Break Part]] interface.<br />
<br />
Click on the '''Projections''' icon [[File:project.png]] to view the current design from a specified plane (top, bottom, left, right, front, or back) or from a certain angle.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Tabs</h2><br />
[[File:assembly_tabs.png]]<br />
<br />
A majority of the assembly features and functions are located in the tabbed section on the right hand side of the window. To find information about how to use these features, see the links below.<br />
<br />
==Main==<br />
[[File:assembly_main.png|left|300px]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Parts List</h3><br />
The Part List is a list of all parts that have been added to the current Assembly project. Select a part in the list to view a preview of it. The Qty (Quantity) column displays the number of times that the part is used in the current Assembly project and the Key column states the key number given to the part to identify it. To remove a part from the list, click the '''Remove''' button. [[File:assembly_remove.png]] To remove all unused parts from the Master Part List, click the '''Flush''' button. [[File:assembly_flush.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Selected Part</h3><br />
<br />
<h3>Paste</h3><br />
To paste a copy of a part from the parts list into the assembly, first select a part. Then click the '''Paste''' button. [[File:assembly_paste.png]] The selected part will then be attached to the cursor. Select a PickPoint in the display to place the part upon.<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Rotate</h3> <br />
[[File:assembly_rotate.png|right|450px]]<br />
Creates a rotated version of an existing part which can be placed into the Assembly project. <br />
<br />
Select a part from the Part List and click the '''Rotate''' button. [[File:rotate.png]]<br />
<br />
Select an axis to rotate the part around in the '''Select Axis of Rotation''' area. <br />
<br />
Enter an amount to rotate the part in the '''Rotation Amount''' field, or left click on the part and drag the cursor left or right to rotate the part. <br />
<br />
Enter a value in the '''Snap Increment''' field and check the '''Snap Rotation''' checkbox in order to use snap rotation. Snap rotation will rotate a part by the amount in the Snap Increment field when the part is rotated using the left mouse button.<br />
<br />
'''To change the amount that the part is rotated''' when not using snap rotation, enter an amount in the Rotation Speed field. By default, the rotation speed will be 1, meaning the part will be rotated one degree at a time. Entering a decimal will allow the part to be rotated by smaller increments. Whenever you rotate a part in a certain axis, you must click the '''Apply Current Rotation button''' before rotating the part in another axis. <br />
<br />
'''To reset the orientation of the part''', click the Reset All button. <br />
<br />
After all rotations have been applied, click the OK button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Coupler</h3><br />
[[File:assembly_coupler.png|right|450px]]<br />
Allows the user to move the coupler (the anchor point of the part). <br />
<br />
Select a part in the Part List and click the '''Coupler''' button. [[File:coupler.png]] The Coupler Location window will appear. <br />
<br />
'''To set the reference point''', click the '''Select Reference Point''' and click a PickPoint in the Coupler Location window display area. <br />
<br />
'''To move the anchor point''', use the Incremental Move fields and enter movement values. <br />
<br />
'''To set all fields to 0''' in the Incremental Move area, click the Clear Values button. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Reset''' button to reset the coupler to its original location. <br />
<br />
'''To toggle between viewing a shaded and wireframe''' version of the part, use the display mode options. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Mirror</h3><br />
[[File:assembly_mirror.png|right|450px]]<br />
Creates a mirrored version of an existing part which can be placed into the Assembly project. <br />
<br />
Select a part from the Part List and click the '''Mirror''' button. [[File:mirror.png]] The Mirror Part window will appear. <br />
<br />
In the Select Mirror Direction area, select an axis to mirror the part across. After a part has been mirrored, you must click '''Apply Mirror''' before mirroring the part again. <br />
<br />
Click '''Reset Current''' to revert the part to the last time you clicked the Apply Mirror button. <br />
<br />
Click '''Reset All''' to reset the part to its original orientation. Click the home button to set the display to the home view. Click OK to create the mirrored part. <br />
<br />
'''To toggle between viewing a shaded and wireframe''' version of the part, use the display mode options. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Edit</h3><br />
<br />
To edit a plate part in the [[Plate]] design interface, first select a plate part from the Part List, then click the '''Edit''' button. [[File:edit.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Open File</h3><br />
<br />
To open a part or plate part and use it in the current assembly design, click the '''Open Part''' [[File:open_part.png]] or '''Open Plate''' button [[File:open_plate.png]] and select a part/plate file. The part will then be added to the Part List and attached to the cursor where it can be placed by clicking on a PickPoint in the part display.<br />
<br />
==PickPoints==<br />
<h3>Single</h3><br />
<h4>Single Point</h4> <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button [[File:set_reference.png]] and click a PickPoint to set it as the reference point. <br />
<br />
*'''Normal Mode:''' Use the fields to enter the incremental distance from the Reference point that the new point will be. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Travel Mode:''' Use the fields to enter the incremental distance from the reference point that the new point will be. Once the Apply button is clicked, this new point will automatically become the new reference point. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Move Mode:''' This mode is used to move points. The selected reference point will be the point that is moved. Enter values into the fields to move this point using it's original location as the reference location. '''''Note:''''' This is the only function in the assembly interface that can be used to relocate PickPoints. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Mirror Mode:''' While in mirror mode, all points placed will have a copy of the point mirrored across all axes. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''''Note:''''' For easier navigation, notice how the harpoon fields axis rotates with the display frame and matches the orientation of the parts/points.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button [[File:apply.png]] to create the PickPoint. To reset all fields in the Single Point area to 0, click the '''Clear Values''' button.<br />
<br />
<h3>Lines</h3><br />
<h4>Line (Two Points)</h4><br />
Creates a PickPoint that is aligned between two other PickPoints. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button and click two PickPoints or a single line. <br />
<br />
In the '''Move Amount''' field, enter the distance from the first PickPoint that the new PickPoint should be. To measure the Move Amount distance from the other point, click the Swap Ends button. To set the new point directly in between the reference points click the Split in Half button. <br />
<br />
To place the point, click the '''Apply''' button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Intersection</h4><br />
Creates a point at the intersection of two user defined lines. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button and click on a line or the start point and end point of the first line. Click the start and end point of the second line. Check the '''Closest Intersection''' option to have the new point created at the intersection to become the reference point after it is created.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place a PickPoint at the intersection of the two lines. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>String</h4><br />
Creates multiple points by specifying the quantity and spacing values.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button and click on a line or the start point and the end point of a line to define the reference points. Define the spacing between the points in the '''Spacing''' field and the number of points in the '''Quantity''' field. These points will begin at the starting end of the reference feature(s). To measure the points from the other end of the reference line, click the '''Swap Ends''' button. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place the PickPoints.<br />
<br />
<h3>Plane/Arc</h3><br />
<h4>Plane</h4><br />
Creates a point by using a line and a plane for reference. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Base Point''' button and click a PickPoint to set it as the center of the plane. Then select which axis the plane should lie on (X, Y, Z Plane or 3 Points). If 3 Points is selected, 3 PickPoints will need to be selected to define the custom plane.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click two PickPoints, a line, or an arc to set them as the feature that the new line will be placed along. The new PickPoint will be at the intersection of the line and the plane. Click the '''Ignore Arc Ends''' to treat arc features as circles. <br />
<br />
To move the new PickPoint up or down along the line, enter a value in the '''Move Amount''' field. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place the new point. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Arc</h4><br />
Creates a PickPoint by using an arc as reference. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Arc''' button and click on an arc to select it. The angle of the arc should appear under Arc Angle in the Arc area. <br />
<br />
Enter the angle along the arc that the new point should be in the '''Sweep Angle''' field. To set a point above or below the selected arc, enter a value in the '''Radius Offset''' field. Negative values will cause the PickPoint to be inside the arc. Click the '''Split in Half''' button to set the PickPoint halfway across the arc. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place the PickPoint.<br />
<br />
<h3>Angle</h3><br />
Creates a PickPoint that is at a specified angle and distance from another PickPoint. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Set Reference''' button and click on a PickPoint to set it as the reference point. <br />
<br />
Use the Tri-Globe to select the direction of the new point. Enter an angle, using the Tri-Globe to determine which direction 0° and 90° are. Enter the distance from the reference point that the new point should be in the Length field. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button to place the PickPoint. <br />
<br />
Alternatively, you can leave the Length and Angle field at 0 and use the two fields below the Length field to enter the distance from the reference point.<br />
<br />
'''Note:''' For easier navigation, notice how the tri-globe rotates with the display frame and matches the orientation of the parts/points.<br />
<br />
<h3>Edit Points</h3><br />
<h4>Change Color</h4><br />
<br />
To change the color of PickPoint(s), first select a color by clicking on the color block icon and choosing a color from the menu. Then click the '''Select Point(s)''' button and click on the point(s) in the display frame to change them to the newly select color.<br />
<br />
To change the color of all PickPoints, first select a color by clicking on the color block icon and choosing a color from the menu. Then click the '''Change All''' button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Display</h4><br />
<br />
Displays or hides PickPoints. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Hide''' button [[File:hide_pickpoints.png]] and click a PickPoint to toggle if it is displayed or hidden. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Display All''' button [[File:displayall_pickpoints.png]] to display all PickPoints. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Hide All''' button [[File:hideall_pickpoints.png]] to hide all PickPoints. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Delete Points</h4><br />
Click the '''Delete''' button [[File:delete_points.png]] and click on a PickPoint to delete it. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Verify Points</h4><br />
Displays the coordinates of up to two PickPoints and their distance from each other. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Verify Mode''' button [[File:verify_mode.png]] and click on a PickPoint. Information on that PickPoint will be displayed. Click on a second PickPoint to see information on both PickPoints and their distance from each other.<br />
<br />
<h2>Design</h2><br />
New parts can be drawn out using the Harpoon design interface or the LRA designer fields.<br />
<br />
[[Harpoon]] || [[LRA]]<br />
<br />
<h2>Edit</h2><br />
[[File:assembly_edit.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Move</h3><br />
<h4>Move Features</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Move Part''' button [[File:move_part.png]] to move full parts to new locations. <br />
<br />
First, click on a PickPoint of a part. If Incremental Move is not checked, you will be asked to choose which PickPoint will be the anchor point. You will then be able to click any PickPoint to place the part there, with its anchor point centered on the point you select. If '''Incremental Move''' is checked, you will only have to click the part you are moving once. You will then be able to enter values into the Front, Back, Left, Right, Ceiling, and Floor fields in order to move the part in that direction by that value. To reset all fields to 0, click the Clear Values button. <br />
<br />
To finalize and move the part to the new location, click the '''Apply''' button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Move Feature''' button [[File:move_feature.png]] to move single features.<br />
<br />
First, click a part and select a feature to move. If Incremental Move is checked, enter values into the Front, Back, Left, Right, Ceiling, and Floor fields and click the Apply button. If Incremental Move is not checked, click a PickPoint to move the feature there. The part will then be adjusted accordingly. See image below for an example of this function.<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_move_1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Move Bend</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Nudge Bend''' button [[File:nudge_bend.png]] to push a bend a given amount in a specific direction. <br />
<br />
Next, select the bend that will be adjusted. Use the green and pink directional buttons to slightly push the bend in a certain direction. The amount that the bend will be nudged is determined by the value in the '''Amount''' field, which can be adjusted by supplying a new amount.<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_move_nudgebend1.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Move Bend''' button [[File:move_bend.png]] to move a bend using the mouse controls. <br />
<br />
First, select the bend to move. Next, the move bend tool will be placed upon this bend and can be used by clicking and dragging any of the arrows to pull the bend in a certain direction.<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_move_2.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Adjust Radius</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Adjust Radius''' button [[File:adjust_radius.png]] to increase/decrease the radius of a selected bend.<br />
<br />
First, select the bend that will be adjusted. Then just click and drag the bend back and forth to adjust the radius. <br />
<br />
[[File:edit_move_3.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_copy.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Copy</h3><br />
<h4>Copy Single Part</h4><br />
Click the '''Select Part''' button [[File:select_part.png]] to copy and paste a single part to a new location.<br />
<br />
First, select the part that will be copied. Next, choose a PickPoint to be the anchor point for the part. This point will be used as the "handle" to drag it to the new location. Last, click on the new location point to place the part.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_copy_1.png|650px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Copy Multiple Parts</h4><br />
<br />
Use the '''Copy Multiple Parts''' tools to copy and paste a specified group of parts or points to a new location.<br />
<br />
First, click the '''Set Base Point''' button [[File:set_base.png]] to define the anchor point of the part/point group. This will be used as the point to attach the group to the new location point.<br />
<br />
Next, select the points or parts that will be copied by clicking on them. Once selected, a part/point will be highlighted in red. Be sure to specify which kind of features will be copied by choosing the '''Parts''' or '''PickPoints''' option. Click the '''Clear All''' button to clear all selections. Click the '''Select All''' button to select all of parts or points currently in the assembly design. Click the '''Complete''' button [[File:complete.png]] to indicate that all the desired parts have been selected.<br />
<br />
Last, click the '''Paste Parts''' button [[File:paste_parts.png]] and select the new location point to place the parts.<br />
<br />
In order to paste the part or group of parts into another file or interface, open the new or existing file, go to the '''Edit-->Copy''' section and select the '''Paste Parts''' button [[File:paste_parts.png]] and select the new location point to place the parts.<br />
<br />
[[File:1edit_copy_2.png]][[File:1edit_rotate.png]][[File:2edit_rotate.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Rotate</h3><br />
Rotate is used to rotate current parts in the assembly design.<br />
<br />
First, select the part to rotate by clicking the '''Select Part''' button [[File:select_part.png]] and click on the part.<br />
<br />
Next, choose which axis the part will rotate about then click on a point on the part to define the rotation point. <br />
<br />
Enter an amount to rotate the part in the '''Rotation Amount''' field, or left click on the part and drag the cursor left/right/up/down to rotate the part. <br />
<br />
Enter a value in the '''Snap Increment''' field and check the '''Snap Rotation''' checkbox in order to use snap rotation. Snap rotation will rotate a part by the amount in the Snap Increment field when the part is rotated using the left mouse button. <br />
<br />
<br />
To change the amount that the part is rotated when not using snap rotation, enter an amount in the '''Rotation Speed''' field. By default, the rotation speed will be 1, meaning the part will be rotated one degree at a time. Entering a decimal will allow the part to be rotated by smaller increments. Whenever you rotate a part in a certain axis, you must click the Apply Current Rotation button before rotating the part in another axis. <br />
<br />
To apply the new rotation to the part, click the '''Apply''' button. [[File:apply_part.png]]<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_mirror.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Mirror</h3><br />
The mirror function can be used to mirror parts in an assembly across a specified axis or a custom defined plane. <br />
<br />
To do so, first click the '''Select Part''' button [[File:select_part.png]] and click on a part in the assembly display frame. <br />
<br />
Next, choose an axis to mirror the part across. If the '''Plane (3 points)''' option is chosen, three PickPoints will need to be chosen in order to define the plane. <br />
<br />
Check the '''Keep Original Part''' to treat the mirror as a copy. While this option is checked, the mirrored version of the part and the original part will remain in the design. Otherwise, the original part will be moved to the new mirrored location.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button [[File:apply_part.png]] to finalize the mirror. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_mirror_1.png]]<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_delete.png|right]]<br />
<br />
Bent and straight parts can be deleted from the current assembly design in this tab. <br />
<br />
'''To delete a part''', first select a part by clicking on it in the list (listed parts will be highlighted in yellow once they are selected) or click directly on a part in the part display (parts will be highlighted in red once they are selected).<br />
<br />
Click the '''Un-Select All''' button [[File:unselect.png]] to un-selected all parts that are currently selected.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Remove Selected''' button [[File:remove_selected.png]] to delete the selected parts.<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_stretch.png|right|300px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Stretch</h3><br />
Stretch moves a selection of PickPoints in a specified direction, adjusting all parts to compensate.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
First '''select a view'''. This will determine which direction the assembly will be viewed from during the stretch process. <br />
<br />
'''Select the parts/PickPoints''' that will be stretched by clicking on any two spots on the display in order to draw a selection rectangle between them (the rectangle will be defined by a light blue line). <br />
<br />
Then select a direction and enter the amount that the selected parts/PickPoints should be moved in the '''Distance''' field. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' button [[File:apply_part.png]] to apply the stretch. <br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_stretch_1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:edit_misc.png|right|300px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Misc</h3><br />
<br />
<h4>Add Bend</h4><br />
'''To add a bend to a preexisting part''', click the '''Add Bend''' button [[File:add_bend.png]] and '''select a straight length''' of a part by clicking on it to choose a location for the bend. The bend will be placed at the mid point of the selected part length. <br />
<br />
'''Enter the offset distance''' between the part and the bend. Then click the '''OK''' button to place the bend. Whichever die is currently selected in the Assembly [[Assembly#Die|die menu]] will be used for this bend.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_addbend.png|750px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Scale</h4><br />
'''To scale the size of parts, material, or bend radii''', click the '''Scale''' button. [[File:misc_scale_1.png]]<br />
<br />
In the scale window, scale values for each of these features can be supplied. Provide a percentage value to either increase or decrease the scale of a feature. See image below for an example. <br />
<br />
[[File:misc_scale.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Explode</h4><br />
Exploding an Assembly will move all parts away from each other so that they can be viewed separately. <br />
<br />
<br />
First, click the '''Explode''' button. [[File:explode.png]] <br />
<br />
The click on a PickPoint to set the base point for the assembly, and enter an explode factor to explode an Assembly project. Larger numbers will create greater distances between the parts. Click the '''Explode''' button to reset the assembly back to the normal display.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Clean</h4><br />
Click the '''Clean''' button [[File:clean.png]] to clear the assembly of any zero length tubes that may be in the assembly design. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Copy Radius</h4><br />
Click the '''Copy Radius''' button [[File:copy_radius.png]] to copy the radius of one bend to another. <br />
<br />
First, select the bend with the radius that you want to copy. Next, select the bend that the copied radius will be applied to.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_copyradius.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_adjustcenterline.png|500px|right]]<br />
<h4>Adjust Centerline</h4><br />
Click the '''Adjust Centerline''' button [[File:adjustcenterline.png]] to change how the part measurements are interpreted. In the part designers, parts are assumed to be based on centerline. This tool allows the current part dimensions to be from the inside or outside of the tube instead. <br />
<br />
After clicking the button, '''select''' a part in the display to adjust it. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''To change the Location and/or Location Type''' for a bend, first select the bend by clicking on it in the part display. A menu will appear where the location and location types can be adjusted. Click on either of the drop down menus to choose new options.<br />
<br />
::[[File:adjustcenterline_2.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
Once a new location or location type has been chosen, a red preview reflecting the location changes will appear. The original part will be shown in green (if the Display Original Part is checked). <br />
<br />
Click the '''Home''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_3.png]] to set the part preview to the default location and orientation.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Zoom Fit''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_4.png]] to zoom all the way in on the current view of the 3D part display and fit it to the display frame. <br />
<br />
<br />
The part model can be shown in either wire frame or as a solid shaded model. Click on the '''wireframe''' button [[File:wireframe.png]] to show the model in wireframe. Click on the '''shaded''' button [[File:shaded.png]] to show the model as a shaded part.<br />
<br />
<br />
Check the box next to '''Display Original Part''' to have the original part preview shown in the adjust centerline interface after changes are made to the locations.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Inside''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_5.png]] to set the locations for all of the bends to inside.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Center''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_6.png]] to set the locations for all of the bends back to centerline.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Outside''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_7.png]] to set the locations for all of the bends to outside.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''OK''' button [[File:adjustcenterline_8.png]] to take the location and location type adjustments and apply them to the current part design.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Labels</h3><br />
'''To place labels on the current assembly design''', first click the '''New''' button [[File:new_label.png]] and select a location for the label by clicking on a PickPoint. Next, enter the label text and click '''OK'''.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_label_1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
The size of the label font is determined by the '''Label Size''' value (larger values result in larger labels and vice versa). '''To change the size''', enter a new value in this field. The color of the labels is determined by the Label Color button. '''To change the color''', click this button and select a new color. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''To move a label''', click the '''Move''' button [[File:move_label.png]] and select a new PickPoint to place the label in the new location.<br />
<br />
'''To delete a label''', click the '''Delete''' button [[File:delete_label.png]] and click on a label.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Break or Join Tubes</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''Break Auto''' button [[File:break_auto.png]] to automatically break the part at a specified interval. <br />
<br />
First, define the maximum length of tube required between break points in the '''Max Length''' field. Next click the '''Break Auto''' button and select a part to break it. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Break Point''' button [[File:break_point.png]] to place a break point on a certain part. Break points will define where the part will be separated. After clicking this button, select which part will be broken by clicking on it in the display area. Last, select the PickPoint where the break will occur. <br />
<br />
[[File:misc_breakpoint.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Join Tubes''' button [[File:join_tubes.png]] to connect two tubes together. First, select the first part to join, and then select the other part that will be joined to it. <br />
<br />
[[File:misc_join.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_miter_1.png|right|250px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Miter Trim''' button [[File:miter_trim.png]] to add a miter at the intersection of two tubes.<br />
<br />
First select the first tube that will be mitered. Next, select the other tube that will be mitered. These tubes will be given some extra length to compensate for the mitering cut (''See image to the right''). If the '''Create Cut''' option is checked, a cut will be applied to the part at this point on the part. Cuts can be seen in the '''[[Cutting]]''' tab.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_miter.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Single Bend CLR Change</h3><br />
<br />
'''To adjust the CLR of a single bend''', first select a die in the '''Select Die''' menu in the Single Bend CLR Change area. Next click the '''Select Bend''' button [[File:select_bend.png]] and click on a bend to apply the selected die to it.<br />
<br />
[[File:misc_clr.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_panel.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:panel_01.png|left|250px]]<br />
In the panel tab, plate panels can be created by defining their location on an assembly.<br />
<br />
To create a panel, first click the '''Select Tubes''' button [[File:select_tubes.png]]. Next, select sections of tube on the assembly that are on the same plane to define the outline of the panel (a minimum of 2 tubes is required). When selecting tubes, be sure to select the '''''starting end''''' of the tube. Once all the necessary tubes are selected, click the '''Complete''' button. [[File:complete.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:panel_order.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
The parts will then be listed in the chart below. The corner and value specifications will need to be supplied for the corners and the wrap value will need to be given for the edges of the panel. <br />
<br />
<br />
Once these values/options have been defined, click the '''Create Plate''' button. [[File:create_plate.png]] Give the panel and name and choose a plate material. Click the '''OK''' button to create the panel. Once a part is created, it is added to the [[Main#Parts List|parts list]] in the [[Main]] tab.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Opposite Direction''' button to flip the side of the tube that the panel is placed upon.<br />
<br />
[[File:panel_03.png|400px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
To adjust the panel after it has been created, just change any of the options and click the '''Create Plate''' button to update the panel.<br />
<br />
<br />
To do more in depth edits with the plate, such as adding holes, click the '''Edit Plate''' button to bring the plate into the [[Plate]] design interface. Once the edits are complete, the plate can be sent back into the assembly by using the '''Transfer''' menu [[File:transfer.png]] and selecting the current assembly project. The plate will be brought back in and placed in its original location on the tube(s). <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Corner'''<br />
<br />
*'''Connect:''' The corner of the panel will be flat, connecting the ends of the straight lengths on either side of the bend.<br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_connect.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Intersection:''' The corner of the panel will meet at the outside intersections of the tubes, at the apex.<br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_intersection.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Radius:''' The corner of the panel will be rounded according the the radius value given in the '''Value''' field. <br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_radius.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Chamfer:''' The corner of the panel will be cut diagonally back from the corner the distance provided in the '''Value''' field.<br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_chamfer.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Notch:''' The corner of the panel will have a 90 degree notch cut out of it. The size of the notch is determined by the size provided in the '''Value''' field.<br />
<br />
:[[File:panel_notch.png|150px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
The '''Wrap''' value determines how far the material will overlap the edge of the tube. This value is given in terms of degrees.<br />
<br />
[[File:panel_02.png]]<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_dimensions.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Dimensions</h2><br />
<h3>Create</h3><br />
<h4>Single</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Single''' button [[File:dimensions_single.png]] to place a single dimension. First, select a line feature or two points that the dimension will be placed between. Then choose a placement location for the dimension text.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_1.png|650px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Multiple</h4><br />
Click the '''Multiple''' button [[File:multiple.png]] to place multiple dimensions along a specified area of an assembly. First, select a line feature where the dimensions will start, then select end point of the dimensions. Between these features, each possible dimension will be placed.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_2.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Inside Angle</h4><br />
Click the '''Inside Angle''' button [[File:inside_angle.png]] to place an angle measure dimension at the inside of the intersection of two lines. First, select a line or reference point to represent the beginning of the dimension. Next, select the inside point of the line and/or the second reference line. Last, choose a location to place the dimension text.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_3.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Outside Angle</h4><br />
Click the '''Outside Angle''' button [[File:outside_angle.png]] to place an angle measure dimension around the outside angle of the reference lines. First, select a line or reference point to represent the beginning of the dimension. Next, select the inside point of the line and/or the second reference line. Last, choose a location to place the dimension text.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_4.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Edit</h3><br />
<br />
<h4>Move</h4><br />
Click the '''Move''' button [[File:move_dimension.png]] to relocate the text and marker of a dimension. First select the dimension that will be moved. Next, using the cursor, click on a new location to place the dimension.<br />
<br />
[[File:dimensions_5.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Delete</h4><br />
To delete dimensions, click the '''Delete''' button [[File:delete_dimension.png]] and click on a dimension(s) to delete them.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Settings</h3><br />
The appearance of dimension text and markers can be adjusted using these settings. <br />
<br />
*'''Text Size:''' The size of the dimension text can be supplied here. Larger values will result in larger dimension font size and vice versa.<br />
<br />
*'''Text Color:''' The color of the dimension text can be chosen here. Click the color button and select a color to adjust text color. <br />
<br />
*'''Line Width:''' The width of the dimension markers can be given here. Larger values will result in thicker dimension lines and vice versa.<br />
<br />
*'''Line Color:''' The color of the dimension marker lines can be chosen here. Click the color button and select a color to adjust line color. <br />
<br />
*'''Tolerance:''' The decimal tolerance for the dimension values can be adjusted here. The decimal tolerance controls how many digits will be allowed after these values. In the tolerance options, each digit place is represented by an n. <br />
<br />
:Dimension values can be displayed in either fractional or decimal format. To change the format and/or tolerance for lengths, click the drop down menu and select an option from the list. <br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Display Dimensions:''' Check the box next to '''Display Dimensions''' to have the dimensions placed on the assembly design. Uncheck this box to hide the dimension markers and values.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>2D Mode</h3><br />
[[File:2d_dimensions_1.png|right]]<br />
In 2D Mode, the assembly will be shown from the top, left, and right. Dimensions can then be placed on these different views of the assembly. The display can be printed using '''File --> Print''' or by clicking the '''Print''' icon.<br />
<br />
<h4>Create</h4><br />
<br />
*'''Horizontal:''' Click the '''Horizontal''' button [[File:horizontal_dim.png]] to place a horizontal dimension along a selected line or between two selected PickPoints.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Vertical:''' Click the '''Vertical''' button [[File:vertical_dim.png]] to place a vertical dimension on a vertical line or between two selected pickpoints.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Linear:''' Click the '''Linear''' button [[File:linear_dim.png]] to place a dimension along any line or between any two PickPoints.<br />
<br />
*'''Inside Angle:''' Click the '''Inside Angle''' button [[File:inside_angle_dim.png]] to place an inside angle dimension at the intersection of two lines. First, select a line or reference point to represent the beginning of the dimension. Next, select the inside point of the line and/or the second reference line. Last, choose a location to place the dimension text.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Outside Angle:''' Click the '''Outside Angle''' button [[File:outside_angle_dim.png]] to place an outside angle dimension around the intersection of two lines. First, select a line or reference point to represent the beginning of the dimension. Next, select the inside point of the line and/or the second reference line. Last, choose a location to place the dimension text.<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Edit</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Move''' button [[File:2d_move.png]] to relocate the text and marker of a dimension. First select the dimension that will be moved. Next, using the cursor, click on a new location to place the dimension. <br />
<br />
To delete a dimension, click the '''Delete''' button [[File:2d_delete.png]] and click on a dimension.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Edit Value''' button [[File:2d_edit.png]] to change the value of a dimension. First, click on a dimension. Then enter the new value in the edit value window and click the '''OK''' button. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Settings</h4><br />
<br />
*'''Arrow Width:''' This is the width of the arrows at the ends of the dimension line. Enter a value in this field to define the arrow width. Larger values will result in wider arrows and vice versa. <br />
<br />
*'''Arrow Length:'''This is the length of the arrows at the ends of a dimension line. Enter a value in this field to define the arrow width. Larger values will result in longer arrows and vice versa. <br />
<br />
*'''Extension Stand-Off:''' This is the distance between the extension lines and the entity that the dimension is measuring. <br />
<br />
*'''Extension Offset:''' This is the distance that the extension lines extend beyond the dimension line. <br />
<br />
*'''Text Size:''' The size of the dimension text can be supplied here. Larger values will result in larger dimension font size and vice versa.<br />
<br />
*'''Line Width:''' The width of the dimension markers can be given here. Larger values will result in thicker dimension lines and vice versa.<br />
<br />
*'''Arrow Type:''' This is the shape of the arrows at the ends of a dimension line. Click on the menu next to Arrow Type in the value column and select an option from the drop down menu.<br />
<br />
*'''Tolerance:''' The decimal tolerance for the dimension values can be adjusted here. The decimal tolerance controls how many digits will be allowed after these values. In the tolerance options, each digit place is represented by an n. <br />
<br />
:Dimension values can be displayed in either fractional or decimal format. To change the format and/or tolerance for lengths, click the drop down menu and select an option from the list. <br />
<br />
[[File:2d_settings.png|right|300px]]<br />
*'''Text, Extension, and Dimension Color:''' The colors of the dimension text, extensions can be changed using these color options. To change the color of a feature, click on the corresponding button and select a color from the menu. (''See the image to the right'')<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Edit Existing</h4><br />
<br />
Click the '''Select''' [[File:ass_select1.png]] button and click on a dimension to view and/or edit its settings, which will be generated in the Settings area above.<br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply''' [[File:ass_select2.png]] button to apply any setting changes made to the currently selected dimension. <br />
<br />
Click the '''Apply to All''' [[File:Apply_to_ass.png]] button to apply the currently selected dimension settings to every dimension.<br />
<br />
<h2>Cutting</h2><br />
[[File:Cutting_picture12.png|right|]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
The Cutting tab contains the tools necessary for adding cuts to the ends of parts. Wrappers can be printed which, when wrapped around the end of a tube, mark where the tube needs to be cut.<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Make Cuts</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''New Cut''' button [[File:new_cut.png]] and click a part. The cut part will be highlighted in green once selected. Click a second part, plane, or multiple parts that the first part will be cut to fit against. The second and any consecutive selected parts will be highlighted in red. Click the '''Complete''' button. [[File:complete.png]] The cut should appear in the list of cuts on the Cutting tab and shown on the assembly. <br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:cutting_1.png|650px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Auto-Cut''' button [[File:auto_cut.png]] to let the software attempt to generate all cuts in the assembly project. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Cutting Plane</h3><br />
<br />
Using the cutting plane feature, a custom plate can be defined and used to place cuts anywhere on the assembly design. <br />
<br />
To place a cutting plane, click the '''New''' button [[File:new_plane.png]] and click on a PickPoint to define the center/base point of the plane. Then click the first direction and second direction of the plane. Once a plane is place in the assembly, it can be used as a cutting feature and will allow straight cuts to be placed anywhere. <br />
<br />
[[File:cutting_plane.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
To move the plane, click the '''Move''' button. Then click and drag the move tools directly on the plane to move, resize, and rotate the plane. See image below.<br />
<br />
[[File:plane_move.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Slot & Tab</h3><br />
<br />
'''RESERVED FOR DRAGON CUSTOMERS ONLY.'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Slot_Tab0_Example1.png]]<br />
<br />
'''Use the Slot & Tab function only after you have set up your Slot & Tab settings in the [[Tube/Pipe Library]]. Attempting to use this function without creating valid settings applied to your tubing will not produce results.'''<br />
<br />
*Click the Slot & Tab [[File:Ass_Slot_N_Tab1.png]] button after you've created a cut and click on the green highlighted tube to apply the tab to it. This will also apply the slot to the outer edge of the red highlighted tube.<br />
<br />
*If the tab & slot is not wide or long enough, you can always change the settings in your [[Tube/Pipe Library]] and then click the '''"Complete"''' button to apply the changes to the cut.<br />
<br />
[[File:Slot_Tab1_Example1.png]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Cut Settings</h3><br />
<br />
If the '''Outside Diameter Only''' option is checked, the software will not display the inside diameter cut line for each cut. <br />
Using a hole saw requires the checking of the outside of the material only.''' "Check"''' the option '''"Outside Diameter Only"'''.<br />
<br />
[[File:HoleSaw3.jpg]]<br />
<br />
Using a grinder or plasma cutter requires checking of both sides of the material. '''"Uncheck"''' the option '''"Outside Diameter Only"'''.<br />
<br />
[[File:HoleSaw4.jpg]]<br />
<br />
<br />
If '''Distance to Perp of Bend''' is checked, the red line will indicate the distance to the perpendicular of the bend. The cut wrapper's red line will display the distance to the tangent of the nearest bend combined with the outside radius of the bend.<br />
<br />
If the '''Hide Completed Features''' option is checked, completed features from the new cut will be hidden in the design.<br />
<br />
If the '''Ignore Tube Ends''' option is checked, all new cuts will ignore the excess tubing leftover from all other cuts.<br />
<br />
If '''Mitered Cut''' is checked, all new cuts will be calculated as straight mitered cuts. If you are using a hole saw to cut your tubes leave Mitered Cut unchecked.<br />
<br />
If the '''Add Slot & Tab''' checkbox is checked, all new cuts will contain a tab on the intended cut tube and a slot on the adjoining tube. ''Adding a value into the value field to the right will rotate the tab around the tube by a degree between 0-360.''<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Cut Chart</h3><br />
[[File:cutting_2.png|right|600px]]<br />
A chart displaying a list of all the cuts currently applied to the assembly will be shown as well. <br />
<br />
Click on a cut to see a preview of the cut on the 3D model of the assembly. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click '''Delete''' [[File:delete_cut.png]] to remove the cut from the tube, or click '''Delete All''' [[File:delete_all_cuts.png]] to remove all cuts from the Assembly project.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click '''Print''' [[File:print_cut.png]] to print the currently selected wrapper, or click '''Print All''' [[File:print_all_cuts.png]] to print out all wrappers for the entire Assembly project.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:cut_wrapper.png|400px|right]]<br />
Click the '''Details''' button [[File:details.png]] to see a preview of the cutting wrapper. On each wrapper, there is a red line with a number on it. This line is used for lining up a wrapper on a tube. The number is the distance from the end of the tube that the red line should be. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Select''' button [[File:select_cut.png]] and click on a cut in the display area to select it from the assembly directly.<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_parts.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<h2>Parts</h2><br />
The Parts tab contains a list of all parts in the current Assembly project, tools that can be used to edit them, and the ability to transfer parts to a single part designer.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Click on a part in the part list to select it. Once a part is selected in the list, it will be highlighted in yellow. Parts can also be selected by clicking directly on a part in the assembly. <br />
<br />
Use the drop down menu in the '''Die''' column to change the die for that part or use the drop down in the '''Material''' column to change the material. <br />
<br />
Click on the colored box in the '''Color''' column to change the parts color using the color menu. <br />
<br />
Select a part and use the '''Transfer''' menu [[File:transfer.png]] to bring it into another part design interface. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''Double click''' on this table to open it in a separate window. Click the '''Print''' button to print this chart.<br />
<br />
[[File:parts_2.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
<h2>Details</h2><br />
[[File:assembly_details.png|right]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
In the details tab, a list of every material used in the assembly project will be listed along with the material's attributes, such as the name, width, amount used, and weight.<br />
<br />
If '''weight per unit''' values have been given to the materials in the [[Tube/Pipe Library]], the total weight of the assembly will be shown below the table. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Change Die or Material</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''All Dies''' button [[File:all_dies.png]] to change all the dies used in the assembly to one specified die. After clicking the button, select a die from the menu and click the '''OK''' button to confirm the die change. <br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Match Die''' button [[File:match_die.png]] to replace all bends using a certain die with an alternate die. In the menu, select the die that will be replaced and selected the die that will replace it. Click the '''OK''' button to confirm.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''All Materials''' button [[File:all_materials.png]] to change all the materials used in the assembly to one specific material. After clicking the button, select a material from the menu and click the '''OK''' button to confirm the material change. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Print Details</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''Spreadsheet''' button [[File:spreadsheet.png]] to print out a page with an image of the 3D assembly model, the parts list, the chart shown in the [[Parts]] tab, and the material chart shown in the Details tab.<br />
<br />
<br />
Click the '''Setup Pack''' button [[File:setup_pack.png]] to print out multiple setup sheets for the parts in the current assembly. In the Setup Pack menu, the printing options can be selected.<br />
<br />
[[File:setup_pack_1.png|350px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Select Features to Print:''' Select what kind of features will be included on the setup sheet. <br />
<br />
*'''Select Printer:''' Choose the printer that the setup sheets will be printed from.<br />
<br />
*'''Select Parts to Print:''' Choose which part setup sheets will be included in this printing. Click the '''Check All''' button to select all parts. Click the '''Check None''' button to un-check all parts. <br />
<br />
Click the '''OK''' button to print the setup sheets. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_fullscale.png|right|400px]]<br />
Click the '''Full Scale''' button [[File:full_scale.png]] allows a full size, to scale, 2D version of the assembly design viewed from a specific direction to be printed to scale on multiple sheets. Each printed page will display one section of the full size assembly. When these pages are all combined, they will show the entire part design. <br />
<br />
Adjust the settings explained below and click the '''Print''' button to print out a full scale part outline.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Margins:''' The margins of each individual page can be set here in terms of inches. <br />
<br />
*'''Default Orientation:''' The orientation of the pages can be adjusted here by choosing either portrait or landscape.<br />
<br />
*'''Number of Pages:''' The width and height of the block of pages can be adjusted here. A preview of what the full group will be shown below. Each page is represented by a light blue outline. <br />
<br />
*'''Line Width:''' The width of the line representing the part features can be adjusted here. Smaller values will result in thinner lines while larger numbers will result in thicker lines.<br />
<br />
*'''Orientation:''' The angle that the part printout will be viewed from can be chosen here. <br />
<br />
*'''Position... :''' To reposition the part outline on the pages, click the '''Position...''' button. [[File:printscale_3.png]] The part outline will be attached to the cursor. Click to place the part in a new location. Keep in mind, if any of the part extends past the edge of the pages, <br />
<br />
*'''Print Options:''' <br />
<br />
:[[File:printscale_2.png|left]] Select Printer: Choose which printer to print from here.<br />
<br />
Number of Copies: The number of copies to print can be specified here.<br />
<br />
Print Preview: Check this box to have a preview of the pages shown before it is printed.<br />
<br />
Print to File: Check this box to save the pages as a Printer File (.prn).<br />
<br />
Print Page Numbers: Check this box to print page numbers on each page. <br />
<br />
Print Edge Lines: Check this box to include the margin lines on the pages.<br />
<br />
<br />
*'''Preview:''' At the bottom of the window, a preview of the part outline and the pages will be shown.<br />
<br />
:This preview can be adjusted by zooming, panning, and rotating. To zoom, use the scroll wheel on the mouse. Scroll up to zoom out and scroll down to zoom in. To pan/move the part preview, click and hold the scroll wheel or both mouse buttons and move the cursor around. The part preview will move with the cursor. To rotate, click and hold the right mouse button. Move the cursor around and the part will rotate with the cursor movements.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Assembly Tools</h3><br />
<br />
Click the '''Nesting''' button [[File:nesting.png]] to <br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_price_1.png|right|400px]]<br />
Click the '''Price''' button [[File:assembly_price.png]] to view a chart containing the assembly's materials, quantity, and cost and time. These cost settings can be set up in the [[Tools]] Menu under [[Tools#Pricing Settings|Pricing Settings]].<br />
<br />
'''To add another column''' that will calculate the price for a specified amount of the part, enter a value into the Quantity First Field area or adjust the amount using the up and down arrows. Up to two extra columns can be added. <br />
<br />
'''To add a second column''', enter a value into the Quantity Second Field or adjust the amount using the up and down arrows. <br />
<br />
To '''print''' the current view of the Price List chart, click the '''Print''' button. [[File:print.png]]<br />
<br />
<br />
<h2>Assembly Menu</h2><br />
<br />
When a new assembly window is open, there will be a '''menu area''' located above the tabbed section and display frame.<br />
<br />
[[File:assembly_2.png]]<br />
<br />
<h3>Material</h3><br />
<br />
[[File:material.png]] In the material menu, the material for the parts in the assembly can be selected. '''To select a material''', click the drop down menu and choose a material from the list. This material can be changed for each individual part later, this is just the material that is initially applied to new parts. Tube/pipe materials are defined in the [[Tube/Pipe Library]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Die</h3><br />
<br />
[[File:die.png]] In the die menu, the die used to bend the parts in the assembly can be selected. '''To select a die''', click the drop down menu and choose a die from the list. This can be changed for each individual part later, this is just the die that is initially applied to new parts. Dies are defined in the [[Die Library]].<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Straight</h3><br />
'''To create a straight tube between two PickPoints''', click the Straight button [[File:straight.png]] and click any two PickPoints or Auto points (points that are automatically generated along parts, such as mid points, apex point, or start and end of bend points ) in the display window. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Bent</h3><br />
'''To create a new bent part''', click the Bent button. [[File:bent.png]] In the Number of Bends window that appears, enter the number of bends that the part will have and click the OK button. To create the part, you must select the start point and the location of each bend, and the end point of the part. You cannot create a bend that is 180° or more by using the Bent Part tool. In order to create such a bend, you would need to create two separate parts. <br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Delete</h3><br />
'''To remove a part from the assembly''', first click on the '''Delete''' button. Then in the design frame, click on a part to delete it. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:entities_12.png|right]]<br />
<h3>Entities</h3> <br />
The Entities tool controls which parts and points are displayed in the assembly. Click the '''Entities''' button [[File:entities.png]] to open up this menu. Each row will represent straight part, bent part, and PickPoint. To hide a certain feature, click in the green box to remove the '''X'''. To have all features shown, click '''Display All''' button. [[File:display_all2.png]] To hide all PickPoints, click the '''Hide Points''' [[File:hide_points2.png]] button. To hide all parts, click the '''Hide Parts''' button. [[File:hide_parts2.png]] <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Bend Mode</h3><br />
This option controls what kind of bend location will be for future bent parts in the assembly (In other words, this setting will not affect current parts). <br />
[[File:bend_mode.png|left]]<br />
'''Apex:''' Measures to the outside intersection (apex) of the bends two legs.<br />
<br />
'''Tangent (Start):''' Measures to the start of the bends, the tangents, so no bent material will be included in the measurements.<br />
<br />
'''Tangent (End):''' Measures to the end of the bends, the tangents, so no bent material will be included in the measurements.<br />
<br />
'''Perpendicular (Start):''' Measures to the tangent plus the CLR of the bend.<br />
<br />
'''Perpendicular (End):''' <br />
<br />
'''Mid:'''<br />
<br />
'''Direction -> Any Point:'''<br />
<br />
'''Any Point -> Direction:'''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h4>Settings</h4><br />
[[File:assembly_settings.png|right|500px]]<br />
These settings are used to control the display and general options within the current assembly.<br />
<br />
'''Main Display'''<br />
<br />
The main display settings control the part display and part model appears in the assembly interface. The background of the main display can be shown.<br />
<br />
:*'''Background:''' Select the '''Normal''' option for the part display background to be shown with the normal blue to white gradient. Select the '''Custom Color''' option to choose a custom solid color. Select the '''Image''' option to select an image file to display as the background. <br />
<br />
:*'''Auto Zoom:''' Check this option to automatically zoom all the way in on the current view of the 3D part display and fit it to the display frame. <br />
<br />
:*'''Display Wall Thickness:''' Check this option to have the thickness of the material shown on the part model when in shaded mode.<br />
<br />
:*'''Display Tubes as Cut:''' Check this option to have the profiles of any cuts on the tubes represented on the part model.<br />
<br />
:*'''Model Quality:''' To adjust the graphic quality of the part model, select an option from this menu. Parts can be shown in high, medium, and low quality.<br />
<br />
:*'''PickPoint Size:''' To adjust the size of all the pickpoints shown in the display frame, select an option from this menu. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Help Text:''' Check the box next to '''Display Cursor Help Text''' to toggle the help text on and off in assembly. This help text will help guide certain processes within assembly. The color of this text can be adjusted using the '''Text Color''' option.<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Tri Star'''<br />
[[File:tri_star.png|left|100px]]<br />
These options will control how the tri-star will appear in the current assembly design. The tri-star can be '''Directional''' (labeled with ceiling/floor, front/back, left/right), '''XYZ''' (labeled with X, Y, and Z), '''Lines Only''', or '''None''' (not shown at all). The default scale value can also be defined here, which will control how large the tri-star will appear. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Color of New PickPoints:''' The default color of new PickPoints can be adjusted here. Click the '''color''' button and select a color from the menu to choose a new PickPoint color. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Prompt for Straight Part Names:''' While this option is checked, every time a new [[#Straight|straight part]] is added to the assembly, a window will prompt for a name to be given to this part instead of defaulting to "Straight 1" for example. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Overwrite Master Parts when Changed:'''<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Auto Switch to Line Mode:''' Check this option to have the display mode automatically switched to line mode whenever new points or parts are being added/edited in the current assembly design. <br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Auto-Save Frequency:''' The time interval between the automatic saves can be adjusted using this menu. <br />
<br />
<br />
'''Set Defaults:''' Click the '''Set Defaults''' button [[File:set_default.png]] to use these settings as the defaults for future assembly designs.<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Restore Defaults:''' Click the '''Restore Defaults''' button [[File:restore_defaults.png]] to reset all the settings to the default selections.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<h3>Manufacture Warnings</h3> <br />
[[File:manufacture_warnings_1.png|right|400px]]<br />
If any problems are found with a part, a '''warning icon''' [[File:manufacture_warnings.png]] will appear at the top of the assembly window. If this icon is clicked, manufacturing warnings will be listed. These warnings are based on the die limitations applied to the current die used to bend the part(s). These limitations can be defined in the [[Die Library#Die Limitations - Minimum Distances|Die Library]]. The part name, a short description of the problem, location, and fix (if available). If an auto-fix is available, double-click on the auto-fix description to execute the auto-fix. Click the '''Fix All''' button [[File:fix_all.png]] to fix all problems with a fix option available.</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=File:Ethernet_Connection_A4001.png&diff=9731File:Ethernet Connection A4001.png2018-04-26T13:56:17Z<p>Fabcam1: Fabcam1 uploaded a new version of &quot;File:Ethernet Connection A4001.png&quot;</p>
<hr />
<div></div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Main_Page&diff=9730Main Page2018-04-17T18:49:17Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div><br />
'''<h3>Welcome to the Official Bend-Tech Wiki</h3>'''<br />
<br />
Use the links below for detailed information on all aspects of the Bend-Tech software products.<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|[[File:Wiki_Help_Info1.png|link=https://youtu.be/Vw7UNV_seQg Wiki Guide Help Video|40px]] '''[https://youtu.be/Vw7UNV_seQg Wiki Guide Help Video]''' || <br />
[[File:Comp_Requirements.png|link=Basic Computer Requirements/Information]] '''[[Basic Computer Requirements/Information]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #E0A366; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Training Class Walkthroughs<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
| ||[[File:QS_training_class1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6w7Ozo9u0Jk|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6w7Ozo9u0Jk Training Class I]''' || [[File:QS_training_class2.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5YUxAIxSHXQ]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5YUxAIxSHXQ Training Class II]''' || [[File:QS_training_class3_SE_advanced.png|link=http://www.bend-tech.com/files/7x_training_class_3.pdf]] '''[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/7x_training_class_3.pdf Training Class III (PDF Only)]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #5882FA; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Bend-Tech 7x CAD Main Wiki<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: center; width="100%;" <br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_CAD_Articles.png|link=Bend-Tech Articles]] || [[File:BT_Product_EZ2.png|link=EZ Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_EZ_3D2.png|link=EZ-3D Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_PRO2.png|link=PRO Guide]] || [[File:BT_Product_SE2.png|link=SE Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_IND3.png|link=IND Guide]] || [[File:YouTube_Link_Icon1.png|link=Bend-Tech YouTube Videos]]<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #f46200; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Bend-Tech Dragon - A Series Main Wiki<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_Dragon_A150_Image1.png|link=Bend-Tech Dragon - A150 Series]]<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_Dragon_A400_Image1.png|link=Bend-Tech Dragon - A400 Series]]<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #c0c0c0; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Base Product Information Videos<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_EZ1a.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7vESYne3oFw|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7vESYne3oFw EZ]'''<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_EZ_3D1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UOqCLGgt6os|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UOqCLGgt6os EZ-3D]''' <br />
|[[File:BT_Product_PRO1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o2e7MVpVjgo|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o2e7MVpVjgo PRO]''' <br />
|[[File:BT_Product_SE1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jSV7jymGzeY|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jSV7jymGzeY SE]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_IND2.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8_eQCEvd5MQ|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8_eQCEvd5MQ Industrial]''' || [[File:BT_Product1_DragonA400.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9rJ0KFi9qu8]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9rJ0KFi9qu8 Dragon - A150 Series]''' || [[File:BT_Product1_Dragon.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oz1IlPLV4jo]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oz1IlPLV4jo Dragon - A400 Series]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Main_Page&diff=9729Main Page2018-04-17T18:48:44Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div><br />
'''<h3>Welcome to the Official Bend-Tech Wiki</h3>'''<br />
<br />
Use the links below for detailed information on all aspects of the Bend-Tech software products.<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|[[File:Wiki_Help_Info1.png|link=https://youtu.be/Vw7UNV_seQg Wiki Guide Help Video|40px]] '''[https://youtu.be/Vw7UNV_seQg Wiki Guide Help Video]''' || <br />
[[File:Video1.mp4]]<br />
[[File:Comp_Requirements.png|link=Basic Computer Requirements/Information]] '''[[Basic Computer Requirements/Information]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #E0A366; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Training Class Walkthroughs<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
| ||[[File:QS_training_class1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6w7Ozo9u0Jk|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6w7Ozo9u0Jk Training Class I]''' || [[File:QS_training_class2.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5YUxAIxSHXQ]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5YUxAIxSHXQ Training Class II]''' || [[File:QS_training_class3_SE_advanced.png|link=http://www.bend-tech.com/files/7x_training_class_3.pdf]] '''[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/7x_training_class_3.pdf Training Class III (PDF Only)]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #5882FA; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Bend-Tech 7x CAD Main Wiki<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: center; width="100%;" <br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_CAD_Articles.png|link=Bend-Tech Articles]] || [[File:BT_Product_EZ2.png|link=EZ Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_EZ_3D2.png|link=EZ-3D Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_PRO2.png|link=PRO Guide]] || [[File:BT_Product_SE2.png|link=SE Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_IND3.png|link=IND Guide]] || [[File:YouTube_Link_Icon1.png|link=Bend-Tech YouTube Videos]]<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #f46200; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Bend-Tech Dragon - A Series Main Wiki<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_Dragon_A150_Image1.png|link=Bend-Tech Dragon - A150 Series]]<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_Dragon_A400_Image1.png|link=Bend-Tech Dragon - A400 Series]]<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #c0c0c0; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Base Product Information Videos<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_EZ1a.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7vESYne3oFw|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7vESYne3oFw EZ]'''<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_EZ_3D1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UOqCLGgt6os|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UOqCLGgt6os EZ-3D]''' <br />
|[[File:BT_Product_PRO1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o2e7MVpVjgo|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o2e7MVpVjgo PRO]''' <br />
|[[File:BT_Product_SE1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jSV7jymGzeY|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jSV7jymGzeY SE]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_IND2.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8_eQCEvd5MQ|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8_eQCEvd5MQ Industrial]''' || [[File:BT_Product1_DragonA400.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9rJ0KFi9qu8]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9rJ0KFi9qu8 Dragon - A150 Series]''' || [[File:BT_Product1_Dragon.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oz1IlPLV4jo]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oz1IlPLV4jo Dragon - A400 Series]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Main_Page&diff=9728Main Page2018-04-16T20:34:35Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div><br />
'''<h3>Welcome to the Official Bend-Tech Wiki</h3>'''<br />
<br />
Use the links below for detailed information on all aspects of the Bend-Tech software products.<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|[[File:Wiki_Help_Info1.png|link=https://youtu.be/Vw7UNV_seQg Wiki Guide Help Video|40px]] '''[https://youtu.be/Vw7UNV_seQg Wiki Guide Help Video]''' || [[File:Comp_Requirements.png|link=Basic Computer Requirements/Information]] '''[[Basic Computer Requirements/Information]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #E0A366; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Training Class Walkthroughs<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
| ||[[File:QS_training_class1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6w7Ozo9u0Jk|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6w7Ozo9u0Jk Training Class I]''' || [[File:QS_training_class2.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5YUxAIxSHXQ]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5YUxAIxSHXQ Training Class II]''' || [[File:QS_training_class3_SE_advanced.png|link=http://www.bend-tech.com/files/7x_training_class_3.pdf]] '''[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/7x_training_class_3.pdf Training Class III (PDF Only)]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #5882FA; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Bend-Tech 7x CAD Main Wiki<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: center; width="100%;" <br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_CAD_Articles.png|link=Bend-Tech Articles]] || [[File:BT_Product_EZ2.png|link=EZ Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_EZ_3D2.png|link=EZ-3D Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_PRO2.png|link=PRO Guide]] || [[File:BT_Product_SE2.png|link=SE Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_IND3.png|link=IND Guide]] || [[File:YouTube_Link_Icon1.png|link=Bend-Tech YouTube Videos]]<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #f46200; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Bend-Tech Dragon - A Series Main Wiki<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_Dragon_A150_Image1.png|link=Bend-Tech Dragon - A150 Series]]<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_Dragon_A400_Image1.png|link=Bend-Tech Dragon - A400 Series]]<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #c0c0c0; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Base Product Information Videos<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_EZ1a.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7vESYne3oFw|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7vESYne3oFw EZ]'''<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_EZ_3D1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UOqCLGgt6os|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UOqCLGgt6os EZ-3D]''' <br />
|[[File:BT_Product_PRO1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o2e7MVpVjgo|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o2e7MVpVjgo PRO]''' <br />
|[[File:BT_Product_SE1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jSV7jymGzeY|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jSV7jymGzeY SE]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_IND2.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8_eQCEvd5MQ|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8_eQCEvd5MQ Industrial]''' || [[File:BT_Product1_DragonA400.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9rJ0KFi9qu8]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9rJ0KFi9qu8 Dragon - A150 Series]''' || [[File:BT_Product1_Dragon.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oz1IlPLV4jo]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oz1IlPLV4jo Dragon - A400 Series]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}</div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=File:Wiki_Help_Info1.png&diff=9727File:Wiki Help Info1.png2018-04-16T20:34:20Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Fabcam1http://www.bend-tech.net/wiki7/index.php?title=Main_Page&diff=9726Main Page2018-04-16T20:33:58Z<p>Fabcam1: </p>
<hr />
<div><br />
'''<h3>Welcome to the Official Bend-Tech Wiki</h3>'''<br />
<br />
Use the links below for detailed information on all aspects of the Bend-Tech software products.<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|[[File:Wiki_Help_Info1.png|link=https://youtu.be/Vw7UNV_seQg Wiki Guide Help Video|40px]] '''[[https://youtu.be/Vw7UNV_seQg Wiki Guide Help Video]]''' || [[File:Comp_Requirements.png|link=Basic Computer Requirements/Information]] '''[[Basic Computer Requirements/Information]]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 30px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #E0A366; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Training Class Walkthroughs<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
| ||[[File:QS_training_class1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6w7Ozo9u0Jk|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6w7Ozo9u0Jk Training Class I]''' || [[File:QS_training_class2.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5YUxAIxSHXQ]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5YUxAIxSHXQ Training Class II]''' || [[File:QS_training_class3_SE_advanced.png|link=http://www.bend-tech.com/files/7x_training_class_3.pdf]] '''[http://www.bend-tech.com/files/7x_training_class_3.pdf Training Class III (PDF Only)]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #5882FA; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Bend-Tech 7x CAD Main Wiki<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: center; width="100%;" <br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_CAD_Articles.png|link=Bend-Tech Articles]] || [[File:BT_Product_EZ2.png|link=EZ Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_EZ_3D2.png|link=EZ-3D Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_PRO2.png|link=PRO Guide]] || [[File:BT_Product_SE2.png|link=SE Guide]] || |[[File:BT_Product_IND3.png|link=IND Guide]] || [[File:YouTube_Link_Icon1.png|link=Bend-Tech YouTube Videos]]<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}<br />
<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #f46200; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Bend-Tech Dragon - A Series Main Wiki<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_Dragon_A150_Image1.png|link=Bend-Tech Dragon - A150 Series]]<br />
|[[File:Bend-Tech_Dragon_A400_Image1.png|link=Bend-Tech Dragon - A400 Series]]<br />
|}<br />
{| style="text-align: left; width="100%;"<br />
|- style="height: 40px;"<br />
!colspan="4" style="background-color: #c0c0c0; font-size:170%; text-align: center;" | Base Product Information Videos<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_EZ1a.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7vESYne3oFw|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7vESYne3oFw EZ]'''<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_EZ_3D1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UOqCLGgt6os|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UOqCLGgt6os EZ-3D]''' <br />
|[[File:BT_Product_PRO1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o2e7MVpVjgo|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o2e7MVpVjgo PRO]''' <br />
|[[File:BT_Product_SE1.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jSV7jymGzeY|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jSV7jymGzeY SE]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|[[File:BT_Product_IND2.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8_eQCEvd5MQ|40px]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8_eQCEvd5MQ Industrial]''' || [[File:BT_Product1_DragonA400.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9rJ0KFi9qu8]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9rJ0KFi9qu8 Dragon - A150 Series]''' || [[File:BT_Product1_Dragon.png|link=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oz1IlPLV4jo]] '''[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Oz1IlPLV4jo Dragon - A400 Series]'''<br />
|- style="height: 80px;"<br />
|}</div>Fabcam1